RENESAS 3820_03

To all our customers
Regarding the change of names mentioned in the document, such as Mitsubishi
Electric and Mitsubishi XX, to Renesas Technology Corp.
The semiconductor operations of Hitachi and Mitsubishi Electric were transferred to Renesas
Technology Corporation on April 1st 2003. These operations include microcomputer, logic, analog
and discrete devices, and memory chips other than DRAMs (flash memory, SRAMs etc.)
Accordingly, although Mitsubishi Electric, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation, Mitsubishi
Semiconductors, and other Mitsubishi brand names are mentioned in the document, these names
have in fact all been changed to Renesas Technology Corp. Thank you for your understanding.
Except for our corporate trademark, logo and corporate statement, no changes whatsoever have been
made to the contents of the document, and these changes do not constitute any alteration to the
contents of the document itself.
Note : Mitsubishi Electric will continue the business operations of high frequency & optical devices
and power devices.
Renesas Technology Corp.
Customer Support Dept.
April 1, 2003
MITSUBISHI 8-BIT SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER
740 FAMILY / 38000 SERIES
3820
Group
User’s Manual
Keep safety first in your circuit designs!
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation puts the maximum effort into making
semiconductor products better and more reliable, but there is always the
possibility that trouble may occur with them. Trouble with semiconductors
may lead to personal injury, fire or property damage. Remember to give due
consideration to safety when making your circuit designs, with appropriate
measures such as (i) placement of substitutive, auxiliary circuits, (ii) use of
non-flammable material or (iii) prevention against any malfunction or mishap.
Notes regarding these materials
These materials are intended as a reference to assist our customers in the
selection of the Mitsubishi semiconductor product best suited to the
customer’s application; they do not convey any license under any
intellectual property rights, or any other rights, belonging to Mitsubishi
Electric Corporation or a third party.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation assumes no responsibility for any damage,
or infringement of any third-party’s rights, originating in the use of any
product data, diagrams, charts or circuit application examples contained in
these materials.
All information contained in these materials, including product data,
diagrams and charts, represent information on products at the time of
publication of these materials, and are subject to change by Mitsubishi
Electric Corporation without notice due to product improvements or other
reasons. It is therefore recommended that customers contact Mitsubishi
Electric Corporation or an authorized Mitsubishi Semiconductor product
distributor for the latest product information before purchasing a product
listed herein.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation semiconductors are not designed or
manufactured for use in a device or system that is used under
circumstances in which human life is potentially at stake. Please contact
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or an authorized Mitsubishi Semiconductor
product distributor when considering the use of a product contained herein
for any specific purposes, such as apparatus or systems for transportation,
vehicular, medical, aerospace, nuclear, or undersea repeater use.
The prior written approval of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is necessary to
reprint or reproduce in whole or in part these materials.
If these products or technologies are subject to the Japanese export
control restrictions, they must be exported under a license from the
Japanese government and cannot be imported into a country other than
the approved destination.
Any diversion or reexport contrary to the export control laws and
regulations of Japan and/or the country of destination is prohibited.
Please contact Mitsubishi Electric Corporation or an authorized Mitsubishi
Semiconductor product distributor for further details on these materials or
the products contained therein.
REVISION DESCRIPTION LIST
Rev.
No.
1.0
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Revision Description
First Edition
Rev.
date
970901
(1/1)
Preface
This user’s manual describes Mitsubishi’s CMOS 8bit microcomputers 3820 Group.
After reading this manual, the user should have a
through knowledge of the functions and features of
the 3820 Group, and should be able to fully utilize
the product. The manual starts with specifications
and ends with application examples.
For details of software, refer to the “SERIES 740
<SOFTWARE> USER’S MANUAL.”
BEFORE USING THIS USER’S MANUAL
This user’s manual consists of the following three chapters. Refer to the chapter appropriate to your conditions, such
as hardware design or software development.
1. Organization
● CHAPTER 1 HARDWARE
This chapter describes features of the microcomputer, operation of each peripheral function and electric
characteristics.
● CHAPTER 2 APPLICATION
This chapter describes usage and application examples of peripheral functions, based mainly on setting examples
of related registers.
● CHAPTER 3 APPENDIX
This chapter includes precautions for systems development using the microcomputer, a list of control registers,
the masking confirmation forms (mask ROM version), ROM programming confirmation forms (One Time PROM
version) and mark specification forms which are to be submitted when ordering.
2. Structure of register
The figure of each register structure describes its functions, contents at reset, and attributes as follows :
Bit attributes (Note 2)
Bits
(Note 1)
Values immediately after reset release
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
CPU mode register (CPUM) [Address:3B 16]
B
0
Processor mode bits
1
2
Functions
Name
Stack page selection bit
3
Fix this bit to “1.”
4
5
Port X C switch bit
00: Single-chip mode
01:
10:
Not available
11:
0 : 0 page
1 : 1 page
At reset
6
Main clock division ratio
selection bit
7
Internal system clock selection bit
0 : I/O port
1 : XCIN, XCOUT
0 : Oscillating
1 : Stopped
0 : f(XIN )/2
(high-speed mode)
(high-speed mode)
1 : f(XIN )/8
(middle-speed mode)
0 : XIN-XOUT selected
(middle-/high-speed mode)
1 : XCIN-XCOUT selected
(low-speed mode)
R W
0
0
0
1
Main clock (X IN–XOUT) stop bit
: Bit in which nothing is allocated
b1b0
0
1
1
✕
0
1
0
: Bit that is not used for control of the corresponding function
Notes 1: Values immediately after reset release
0••••••“0” at reset release
1••••••“1” at reset release
?••••••Undefined or reset release
2: Bit attributes••••••The attributes of control register bits are classified into 3 types : read-only, write-only
and read and write. In the figure, these attributes are represented as follows :
W••••••Write
R••••••Read
••••••Write enabled
••••••Read enabled
✕ ••••••Write disabled
✕ ••••••Read disabled
✽ ••••••Only “0” write enabled
0 ••••••Fixed to “0”
0 ••••••Fix to “0”
1 ••••••Fixed to “1”
1 ••••••Fix to “1”
Table of contents
Table of contents
CHAPTER 1. HARDWARE
DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................ 1-2
FEATURES ..................................................................................................................................... 1-2
APPLICATIONS .............................................................................................................................. 1-2
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW) ........................................................................................... 1-3
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM (Package: 80P6N-A) .......................................................... 1-4
PIN DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ 1-5
PART NUMBERING ....................................................................................................................... 1-7
GROUP EXPANSION .................................................................................................................... 1-8
GROUP EXPANSION (EXTENDED OPERATING TEMPERATURE VERSION) ..................... 1-9
GROUP EXPANSION (LOW POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE VERSION) ............................... 1-10
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1-11
Central Processing Unit (CPU) ...............................................................................................1-11
CPU Mode Register ................................................................................................................1-11
MEMORY ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12
Special Function Register (SFR) Area ................................................................................... 1-12
RAM ........................................................................................................................................1-12
ROM ....................................................................................................................................... 1-12
Interrupt Vector Area .............................................................................................................. 1-12
Zero Page ...............................................................................................................................1-12
Special Page ..........................................................................................................................1-12
I/O PORTS ....................................................................................................................................1-14
Direction Registers (ports P2, P41–P47, and P5–P7) ............................................................. 1-14
Direction Registers (ports P0 and P1) .................................................................................... 1-14
Ports P3 and P40 ................................................................................................................................................. 1-14
Pull-up/Pull-down Control ....................................................................................................... 1-14
INTERRUPTS ................................................................................................................................ 1-19
Interrupt Control ......................................................................................................................1-19
Interrupt Operation .................................................................................................................1-19
Notes on Use ..........................................................................................................................1-19
Key Input Interrupt (Key-on Wake up) .................................................................................... 1-21
TIMERS .........................................................................................................................................1-22
Timer X ...................................................................................................................................1-23
Timer X Write Control ............................................................................................................. 1-23
Note on CNTR0 Interrupt Active Edge Selection .................................................................... 1-23
Real Time Port Control ...........................................................................................................1-23
Timer Y ...................................................................................................................................1-24
Note on CNTR1 Interrupt Active Edge Selection .................................................................... 1-24
Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3 ....................................................................................................... 1-25
Timer 2 Write Control ............................................................................................................. 1-25
Timer 2 Output Control ...........................................................................................................1-25
Note on Timer 1 to Timer 3..................................................................................................... 1-25
SERIAL I/O1 ................................................................................................................................. 1-26
Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode ....................................................................................... 1-26
Serial I/O1 Control Register (SIO1CON) 001A16 .................................................................................... 1-28
UART Control Register (UARTCON) 001B16 ........................................................................................... 1-28
Serial I/O1 Status Register (SIO1STS) 001916 ........................................................................................ 1-28
Transmit Buffer/Receive Buffer Register (TB/RB) 001816 ................................................................... 1-28
Baud Rate Generator (BRG) 001C16 ........................................................................................................... 1-28
SERIAL I/O2 ................................................................................................................................. 1-30
Serial I/O2 Control Register (SIO2CON) 001D16 .................................................................................... 1-30
i
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Table of contents
LCD DRIVE CONTROL CIRCUIT .............................................................................................. 1-32
Bias Control and Applied Voltage to LCD Power Input Pins .................................................. 1-34
Common Pin and Duty Ratio Control ..................................................................................... 1-34
LCD Display RAM ...................................................................................................................1-35
LCD Drive Timing ...................................................................................................................1-35
WATCHDOG TIMER .................................................................................................................... 1-38
Initial Value of Watchdog Timer.............................................................................................. 1-38
Watchdog Timer Operation .................................................................................................... 1-38
φ CLOCK OUTPUT FUNCTION .................................................................................................1-39
RESET CIRCUIT .......................................................................................................................... 1-40
CLOCK GENERATING CIRCUIT ............................................................................................... 1-42
Frequency Control ..................................................................................................................1-42
Oscillation Control ..................................................................................................................1-42
NOTES ON PROGRAMMING ..................................................................................................... 1-45
Processor Status Register ...................................................................................................... 1-45
Interrupt .................................................................................................................................. 1-45
Decimal Calculations .............................................................................................................. 1-45
Timers..................................................................................................................................... 1-45
Multiplication and Division Instructions ................................................................................... 1-45
Ports .......................................................................................................................................1-45
Serial I/O................................................................................................................................. 1-45
Instruction Execution Time ..................................................................................................... 1-45
DATA REQUIRED FOR MASK ORDERS ................................................................................ 1-46
ROM PROGRAMMIG METHOD ................................................................................................. 1-46
Absolute maximum ratings ....................................................................................................... 1-47
Recommended operating conditions ...................................................................................... 1-47
Electrical characteristics ........................................................................................................... 1-49
Timing requirements 1 .............................................................................................................. 1-51
Timing requirements 2 .............................................................................................................. 1-51
Switching characteristics 1 ...................................................................................................... 1-52
Switching characteristics 2 ...................................................................................................... 1-52
Absolute maximum ratings (Extended operating temperature version) .......................... 1-53
Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) .......................................... 1-53
Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) ............................... 1-55
Timing requirements 1 (Extended operating temperature version) .................................. 1-57
Timing requirements 2 (Extended operating temperature version) .................................. 1-57
Switching characteristics 1 (Extended operating temperature version) .......................... 1-58
Switching characteristics 2 (Extended operating temperature version) .......................... 1-58
Absolute maximum ratings (Low power source voltage version) ................................... 1-59
Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) .................................................... 1-59
Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) ........................................ 1-61
Timing requirements 1 (Low power source voltage version) ........................................... 1-63
Timing requirements 2 (Low power source voltage version) ........................................... 1-63
Switching characteristics 1 (Low power source voltage version) ................................... 1-64
Switching characteristics 2 (Low power source voltage version) ................................... 1-64
Timing diagram ........................................................................................................................... 1-65
STANDARD CHARACTERISTICS .............................................................................................. 1-66
Power Source Current Characteristic Examples (I CC–VCC characteristics) ............................ 1-66
Power Source Frequency Characteristic Examples .................................................................. 1-68
Port Standard Characteristic Examples ...................................................................................... 1-69
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
ii
Table of contents
CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins .................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.1 I/O ports ........................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Function pins ...................................................................................................................2-7
2.1.3 Application examples....................................................................................................... 2-8
2.1.4 Notes on use .................................................................................................................2-12
2.2 Interrupts ...............................................................................................................................2-15
2.2.1 Explanation of operations .............................................................................................. 2-15
2.2.2 Control ........................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.2.3 Related registers ...........................................................................................................2-22
2.2.4 INT interrupts .................................................................................................................2-28
2.2.5 Key input interrupt .........................................................................................................2-29
2.2.6 Notes on use .................................................................................................................2-31
2.3 Timer X and timer Y ..........................................................................................................2-32
2.3.1 Explanation of timer X operations.................................................................................. 2-32
2.3.2 Explanation of timer Y operations.................................................................................. 2-42
2.3.3 Related registers ...........................................................................................................2-50
2.3.4 Register setting example ...............................................................................................2-66
2.3.5 Application examples..................................................................................................... 2-75
2.3.6 Notes on use .................................................................................................................2-82
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 .......................................................................................... 2-85
2.4.1 Explanation of operations .............................................................................................. 2-85
2.4.2 Related registers ...........................................................................................................2-90
2.4.3 Register setting example ...............................................................................................2-99
2.4.4 Application example .................................................................................................... 2-100
2.4.5 Notes on use ...............................................................................................................2-102
2.5 Serial I/O1 ........................................................................................................................... 2-103
2.5.1 Explanation of operations ............................................................................................ 2-103
2.5.2 Pins .............................................................................................................................. 2-120
2.5.3 Related registers .........................................................................................................2-121
2.5.4 Register setting example .............................................................................................2-129
2.5.5 Notes on use ...............................................................................................................2-139
2.6 Serial I/O2 ........................................................................................................................... 2-141
2.6.1 Explanation of operations ............................................................................................ 2-141
2.6.2 Pins .............................................................................................................................. 2-148
2.6.3 Related registers .........................................................................................................2-149
2.6.4 Register setting example .............................................................................................2-152
2.6.5 Notes on use ...............................................................................................................2-154
2.7 LCD drive control circuit .................................................................................................2-155
2.7.1 Explanation of operations ............................................................................................ 2-155
2.7.2 Pins .............................................................................................................................. 2-156
2.7.3 Related registers .........................................................................................................2-159
2.7.4 Register setting example .............................................................................................2-166
2.7.5 Application examples................................................................................................... 2-168
2.7.6 Notes on use ...............................................................................................................2-172
2.8 Watchdog timer ..................................................................................................................2-173
2.8.1 Explanation of operations ............................................................................................ 2-173
2.8.2 Related register......................................................................................................... 2-175
2.9 Standby function ...............................................................................................................2-176
2.9.1 Stop mode ...................................................................................................................2-176
2.9.2 Wait mode ...................................................................................................................2-181
2.9.3 State transitions of internal clock φ ...................................................................................... 2-184
iii
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Table of contents
2.10 Reset ..................................................................................................................................2-185
2.10.1 Explanation of operations .......................................................................................... 2-185
2.10.2 Internal state of the microcomputer immediately after reset release ......................... 2-187
2.10.3 Reset circuit ...............................................................................................................2-188
2.10.4 Notes on the RESET pin ........................................................................................... 2-189
2.11 Oscillation circuit ............................................................................................................. 2-190
2.11.1 Oscillation circuit........................................................................................................2-190
2.11.2 Internal clock φ ..........................................................................................................2-192
2.11.3 Oscillating operation ..................................................................................................2-194
2.11.4 Oscillation stabilizing time ......................................................................................... 2-197
CHAPTER 3. APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version .......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Product expansion ........................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.2 Performance overview ..................................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 Pin configuration ..............................................................................................................3-5
3.1.4 Functional block diagram ................................................................................................ 3-8
3.1.5 Notes on use ...................................................................................................................3-9
3.2 Countermeasures against noise ....................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.1 Shortest wiring length .................................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.2 Connection of a bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line ....................... 3-12
3.2.3 Oscillator concerns ........................................................................................................ 3-13
3.2.4 Installing an oscillator away from signal lines where potential levels change frequently............................ 3-14
3.2.5 Oscillator protection using VSS pattern .......................................................................... 3-14
3.2.6 Set up for I/O ports ........................................................................................................ 3-14
3.2.7 Providing of watchdog timer function by software ......................................................... 3-15
3.3 Control registers ..................................................................................................................3-16
3.4 List of instruction codes ................................................................................................... 3-29
3.5 Machine instructions ........................................................................................................... 3-30
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method ............................................................................................. 3-40
3.7 Mark specification form ..................................................................................................... 3-52
3.8 Package outlines ................................................................................................................. 3-54
3.9 SFR allocation ...................................................................................................................... 3-56
3.10 Pin configuration ............................................................................................................... 3-57
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
iv
List of figures
List of figures
CHAPTER 1. HARDWARE
Fig. 1 Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXFP .................................................................................. 1-2
Fig. 2 Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXGP/HP ........................................................................... 1-3
Fig. 3 Function block diagram ...........................................................................................................1-4
Fig. 4 Part numbering ........................................................................................................................1-7
Fig. 5 Memory expansion plan (1) .....................................................................................................1-8
Fig. 6 Memory expansion plan (2) .....................................................................................................1-9
Fig. 7 Memory expansion plan (3) ................................................................................................... 1-10
Fig. 8 Structure of CPU mode register ............................................................................................ 1-11
Fig. 9 Memory map diagram ............................................................................................................ 1-12
Fig. 10 Memory map of special function register (SFR) .................................................................. 1-14
Fig. 11 Structure of PULL register A and PULL register B .............................................................. 1-15
Fig. 12 Port block diagram (1) ......................................................................................................... 1-16
Fig. 13 Port block diagram (2) ......................................................................................................... 1-17
Fig. 14 Port block diagram (3) ......................................................................................................... 1-18
Fig. 15 Interrupt control ................................................................................................................... 1-20
Fig. 16 Structure of interrupt-related registers ................................................................................. 1-21
Fig. 17 Connection example when using key input interrupt and port P2 block diagram ................ 1-21
Fig. 18 Timer block diagram ............................................................................................................ 1-22
Fig. 19 Structure of timer X mode register ....................................................................................... 1-23
Fig. 20 Structure of timer Y mode register ....................................................................................... 1-24
Fig. 21 Structure of timer 123 mode register ................................................................................... 1-25
Fig. 22 Block diagram of clock synchronous serial I/O1 .................................................................. 1-26
Fig. 23 Operation of clock synchronous serial I/O1 function ........................................................... 1-26
Fig. 24 Block diagram of UART serial I/O1 ...................................................................................... 1-27
Fig. 25 Operation of UART serial I/O1 function ............................................................................... 1-27
Fig. 26 Structure of serial I/O1 control registers .............................................................................. 1-29
Fig. 27 Structure of serial I/O2 control register ................................................................................ 1-29
Fig. 28 Block diagram of serial I/O2 function ................................................................................... 1-30
Fig. 29 Timing of serial I/O2 function ............................................................................................... 1-31
Fig. 30 Structure of segment output enable register and LCD mode register ................................. 1-32
Fig. 31 Block diagram of LCD controller/driver ................................................................................ 1-33
Fig. 32 Example of circuit at each bias ............................................................................................ 1-34
Fig. 33 LCD display RAM map ........................................................................................................ 1-35
Fig. 34 LCD drive waveform (1/2 bias) ............................................................................................ 1-36
Fig. 35 LCD drive waveform (1/3 bias) ............................................................................................ 1-37
Fig. 36 Watchdog timer block diagram ............................................................................................ 1-38
Fig. 37 Structure of watchdog timer control register ........................................................................ 1-38
Fig. 38 Structure of φ output control register ................................................................................... 1-39
Fig. 39 Example of reset circuit ....................................................................................................... 1-40
Fig. 40 Internal state of microcomputer immediately after reset ...................................................... 1-40
Fig. 41 Reset sequence ................................................................................................................... 1-41
Fig. 42 Ceramic resonator circuit ..................................................................................................... 1-42
Fig. 43 External clock input circuit ................................................................................................... 1-42
Fig. 44 Clock generating circuit block diagram ................................................................................ 1-43
Fig. 45 State transitions of internal clock φ ............................................................................................... 1-44
Fig. 46 Programming and testing of One Time PROM version ....................................................... 1-46
Fig. 47 Circuit for measuring output switching characteristics ........................................................ 1-64
Fig. 48 Timing diagram .................................................................................................................... 1-65
Fig. 49 ICC–VCC characteristic example (f(XIN = 8 MHz)) ................................................................ 1-66
Fig. 50 ICC–VCC characteristic example (f(XIN = 4 MHz)) ................................................................ 1-66
Fig. 51 ICC–VCC characteristic example (f(XIN) = 32 kHz, oscillator used) ...................................... 1-67
Fig. 52 ICC–f(XIN) characteristic example (VCC = 3.0 V) .................................................................. 1-68
i
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
List of figures
Fig. 53 ICC–f(XIN) characteristic example (VCC = 5.0 V) .................................................................. 1-68
Fig. 54 IOH–VOH characteristic example of CMOS output port at P-channel drive (P0, P1, P3) ..... 1-69
Fig. 55 IOL–VOL characteristic example of CMOS output port at N-channel drive (P0, P1, P3) ...... 1-69
Fig. 56 IOH–VOH characteristic example of CMOS output port at P-channel drive (P2, P5, P6, P7) ... 1-70
Fig. 57 IOL–VOL characteristic example of CMOS output port at N-channel drive (P2, P5, P6, P7) .... 1-70
CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION
Fig. 2.1.1 I/O port write and read ....................................................................................................... 2-2
Fig. 2.1.2 Structure of port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction register ............................................................ 2-3
Fig. 2.1.3 Structure of ports P0 and P1 direction registers ................................................................ 2-4
Fig. 2.1.4 Port direction register setting example .............................................................................. 2-5
Fig. 2.1.5 Structure of PULL register A ..............................................................................................2-6
Fig. 2.1.6 Structure of PULL register B ..............................................................................................2-6
Fig. 2.1.7 Connection example 1 for key input .................................................................................. 2-8
Fig. 2.1.8 Key input control procedure 1 ............................................................................................ 2-8
Fig. 2.1.9 Timing diagram 1 where switch A is pressed .................................................................... 2-9
Fig. 2.1.10 Connection example 2 for key input .............................................................................. 2-10
Fig. 2.1.11 Key input control procedure 2 ........................................................................................ 2-10
Fig. 2.1.12 Timing diagram 2 where switch A is pressed ................................................................ 2-11
Fig. 2.2.1 Interrupt operation diagram ............................................................................................. 2-15
Fig. 2.2.2 Changes of stack pointer and program counter upon acceptance of interrupt request ... 2-17
Fig. 2.2.3 Processing time up to execution of interrupt processing routine ..................................... 2-18
Fig. 2.2.4 Timing after acceptance of interrupt request ................................................................... 2-18
Fig. 2.2.5 Interrupt control diagram ................................................................................................. 2-19
Fig. 2.2.6 Example of multiple interrupts ......................................................................................... 2-21
Fig. 2.2.7 Memory allocation of interrupt-related registers .............................................................. 2-22
Fig. 2.2.8 Structure of interrupt edge selection register ................................................................... 2-22
Fig. 2.2.9 Structure of interrupt request register 1 ........................................................................... 2-23
Fig. 2.2.10 Structure of interrupt request register 2 ......................................................................... 2-24
Fig. 2.2.11 Structure of interrupt control register 1 .......................................................................... 2-25
Fig. 2.2.12 Structure of interrupt control register 2 .......................................................................... 2-26
Fig. 2.2.13 Structure of processor status register ............................................................................ 2-27
Fig. 2.2.14 Structure of interrupt edge selection register ................................................................. 2-28
Fig. 2.2.15 Connection example when key input interrupt is used, and port P2 block diagram ................................... 2-29
Fig. 2.2.16 Setting values (corresponding to Figure 2.2.15) of key input interrupt-related registers ............................ 2-30
Fig. 2.2.17 Register setting example ............................................................................................... 2-31
Fig. 2.3.1 Timer mode operation example ....................................................................................... 2-33
Fig. 2.3.2 Pulse output mode operation example ............................................................................ 2-35
Fig. 2.3.3 Event counter mode operation example .......................................................................... 2-37
Fig. 2.3.4 Pulse width measurement mode operation example ....................................................... 2-39
Fig. 2.3.5 Timer mode operation example with real time port function ............................................ 2-41
Fig. 2.3.6 Timer mode operation example ....................................................................................... 2-43
Fig. 2.3.7 Period measurement mode operation example ............................................................... 2-45
Fig. 2.3.8 Event counter mode operation example .......................................................................... 2-47
Fig. 2.3.9 Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode operation example ............................ 2-49
Fig. 2.3.10 Memory allocation of timer X- and the timer Y-related registers ................................... 2-50
Fig. 2.3.11 Structure of port P5 direction register ............................................................................ 2-51
Fig. 2.3.12 Structure of port P6 direction register ............................................................................ 2-52
Fig. 2.3.13 Structure of timer X latch ............................................................................................... 2-53
Fig. 2.3.14 Structure of timer X counter ........................................................................................... 2-54
Fig. 2.3.15 Structure of timer Y latch ............................................................................................... 2-55
Fig. 2.3.16 Structure of timer Y counter ........................................................................................... 2-56
Fig. 2.3.17 Structure of timer X mode register ................................................................................. 2-57
Fig. 2.3.18 Structure of timer Y mode register ................................................................................. 2-60
Fig. 2.3.19 Structure of interrupt request register 1 ......................................................................... 2-62
Fig. 2.3.20 Structure of interrupt request register 2 ......................................................................... 2-63
Fig. 2.3.21 Structure of interrupt control register 1 .......................................................................... 2-64
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
ii
List of figures
Fig. 2.3.22 Structure of interrupt control register 2 .......................................................................... 2-65
Fig. 2.3.23 Example of setting registers for using timer mode ........................................................ 2-66
Fig. 2.3.24 Example of setting registers for using pulse output mode ............................................. 2-67
Fig. 2.3.25 Example of setting registers for using event counter mode ........................................... 2-68
Fig. 2.3.26 Example of setting registers for using pulse width measurement mode ....................... 2-69
Fig. 2.3.27 Example of setting registers for using RTP ................................................................... 2-70
Fig. 2.3.28 Example of setting registers for using timer mode ........................................................ 2-71
Fig. 2.3.29 Example of setting registers for using period measurement mode ............................... 2-72
Fig. 2.3.30 Example of setting registers for using event counter mode ........................................... 2-73
Fig. 2.3.31 Example of setting registers for using pulse width HL continuously measurement mode .......................... 2-74
Fig. 2.3.32 Example of peripheral circuit ......................................................................................... 2-75
Fig. 2.3.33 Connection of timer and setting of division ratio ............................................................ 2-75
Fig. 2.3.34 Setting of related registers ............................................................................................. 2-76
Fig. 2.3.35 Control procedure ..........................................................................................................2-76
Fig. 2.3.36 Example of peripheral circuit ......................................................................................... 2-77
Fig. 2.3.37 Setting of related registers ............................................................................................. 2-77
Fig. 2.3.38 Ringer signal waveform ................................................................................................. 2-78
Fig. 2.3.39 Operation timing when ringing pulse is input ................................................................. 2-78
Fig. 2.3.40 Control procedure ..........................................................................................................2-79
Fig. 2.3.41 Application connection example when RTP is used ...................................................... 2-80
Fig. 2.3.42 RTP output example ...................................................................................................... 2-80
Fig. 2.3.43 Timer X interrupt processing procedure example when RTP is used ........................... 2-81
Fig. 2.4.1 Timer mode operation example ....................................................................................... 2-86
Fig. 2.4.2 Rewriting example of counter and latch corresponding to timers 1 or 3 .......................... 2-87
Fig. 2.4.3 Rewriting example of timer 2 counter and timer 2 latch (Writing in timer 2 latch only) .... 2-88
Fig. 2.4.4 Pulse output example ...................................................................................................... 2-89
Fig. 2.4.5 Memory allocation of timer-related registers ................................................................... 2-90
Fig. 2.4.6 Structure of latches ..........................................................................................................2-91
Fig. 2.4.7 Structure of timer counters .............................................................................................. 2-92
Fig. 2.4.8 Structure of timer 123 mode register ............................................................................... 2-93
Fig. 2.4.9 Structure of interrupt request register 1 ........................................................................... 2-95
Fig. 2.4.10 Structure of interrupt request register 2 ......................................................................... 2-96
Fig. 2.4.11 Structure of interrupt control register 1 .......................................................................... 2-97
Fig. 2.4.12 Structure of interrupt control register 2 .......................................................................... 2-98
Fig. 2.4.13 Example of setting registers for timers 1, 2, and 3 ........................................................ 2-99
Fig. 2.4.14 Setting of related registers ........................................................................................... 2-100
Fig. 2.4.15 Control procedure ........................................................................................................2-101
Fig. 2.5.1 External connection example in clock synchronous mode ............................................ 2-103
Fig. 2.5.2 Shift clock ......................................................................................................................2-104
Fig. 2.5.3 Transmit operation in clock synchronous mode ............................................................ 2-107
Fig. 2.5.4 Transmit timing example in clock synchronous mode ................................................... 2-108
Fig. 2.5.5 Receive operation in clock synchronous mode ............................................................. 2-110
Fig. 2.5.6 Receive timing example in clock synchronous mode .................................................... 2-110
Fig. 2.5.7 Transmit/receive timing example in clock synchronous mode ...................................... 2-111
Fig. 2.5.8 External connection example in UART mode ................................................................ 2-112
Fig. 2.5.9 Transfer data format in UART mode .............................................................................2-114
Fig. 2.5.10 All transfer data formats in UART mode ......................................................................2-115
Fig. 2.5.11 Transmit timing example in UART mode ..................................................................... 2-117
Fig. 2.5.12 Receive timing example in UART mode ......................................................................2-119
Fig. 2.5.13 Memory allocation of serial I/O1-related registers ....................................................... 2-121
Fig. 2.5.14 Structure of transmit/receive buffer register ................................................................ 2-121
Fig. 2.5.15 Structure of serial I/O1 status register ......................................................................... 2-122
Fig. 2.5.16 Structure of serial I/O1 control register ........................................................................ 2-124
Fig. 2.5.17 Structure of UART control register .............................................................................. 2-127
Fig. 2.5.18 Transmitting method in clock synchronous mode (1) .................................................. 2-129
Fig. 2.5.19 Transmitting method in clock synchronous mode (2) .................................................. 2-130
Fig. 2.5.20 Receiving method in clock synchronous mode (1) ...................................................... 2-131
Fig. 2.5.21 Receiving method in clock synchronous mode (2) ...................................................... 2-132
iii
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
List of figures
Fig. 2.5.22 Transmitting method in UART mode (1) ......................................................................2-133
Fig. 2.5.23 Transmitting method in UART mode (2) ......................................................................2-134
Fig. 2.5.24 Receiving method in UART mode (1) .......................................................................... 2-135
Fig. 2.5.25 Receiving method in UART mode (2) .......................................................................... 2-136
Fig. 2.6.1 External connection example of serial I/O2 ................................................................... 2-141
Fig. 2.6.2 Shift clock ......................................................................................................................2-142
Fig. 2.6.3 Transmit operation of serial I/O2 ...................................................................................2-144
Fig. 2.6.4 Transmit timing example of serial I/O2 .......................................................................... 2-144
Fig. 2.6.5 Receive operation of serical I/O2 ..................................................................................2-146
Fig. 2.6.6 Receive timing example of serial I/O2 ........................................................................... 2-146
Fig. 2.6.7 Transmit/receive timing example of serial I/O2 (P53/SRDY2 pin is used) ....................... 2-147
Fig. 2.6.8 Memory allocation of serial I/O2-related registers ......................................................... 2-149
Fig. 2.6.9 Structure of serial I/O2 control register .......................................................................... 2-149
Fig. 2.6.10 Structure of serial I/O2 register ....................................................................................2-151
Fig. 2.6.11 Transmitting method of serial I/O2 .............................................................................. 2-152
Fig. 2.6.12 Receiving method of serial I/O2 ..................................................................................2-153
Fig. 2.7.1 Memory allocation of LCD display-related registers ...................................................... 2-159
Fig. 2.7.2 Structure of segment output enable register ................................................................. 2-160
Fig. 2.7.3 Structure of LCD mode register ..................................................................................... 2-162
Fig. 2.7.4 Structure of port P0 direction register ............................................................................2-163
Fig. 2.7.5 Structure of port P1 direction register ............................................................................2-164
Fig. 2.7.6 Structure of PULL register A ..........................................................................................2-165
Fig. 2.7.7 Example of setting registers for LCD display (1) ........................................................... 2-166
Fig. 2.7.8 Example of setting registers for LCD display (2) ........................................................... 2-167
Fig. 2.7.9 8-segment LCD panel display pattern example when the duty ratio number is 4 ......... 2-168
Fig. 2.7.10 LCD panel example .....................................................................................................2-169
Fig. 2.7.11 Segment allocation example ....................................................................................... 2-169
Fig. 2.7.12 LCD display RAM setting example .............................................................................. 2-169
Fig. 2.7.13 Setting of related registers ........................................................................................... 2-170
Fig. 2.7.14 Control procedure ........................................................................................................2-171
Fig. 2.8.1 Internal reset signal output timing ..................................................................................2-173
Fig. 2.8.2 Structure of watchdog timer control register .................................................................. 2-175
Fig. 2.9.1 Oscillation stabilizing time at restoration by reset input ................................................. 2-177
Fig. 2.9.2 Execution sequence example at restoration by occurrence of INT0 interrupt request .. 2-179
Fig. 2.9.3 Reset input time .............................................................................................................2-182
Fig. 2.9.4 State transitions of internal clock φ ......................................................................................... 2-184
Fig. 2.10.1 Internal reset state hold/release timing ........................................................................ 2-185
Fig. 2.10.2 Internal processing sequence immediately after reset release ................................... 2-186
Fig. 2.10.3 Internal state of microcomputer immediately after reset release ................................. 2-187
Fig. 2.10.4 Poweron reset conditions ............................................................................................ 2-188
Fig. 2.10.5 Poweron reset circuit examples ...................................................................................2-188
Fig. 2.11.1 Oscillation circuit example using ceramic resonators .................................................. 2-190
Fig. 2.11.2 External clock input circuit example ............................................................................2-191
Fig. 2.11.3 Clock generating circuit block diagram ........................................................................ 2-192
Fig. 2.11.4 Structure of φ output control register ........................................................................... 2-193
Fig. 2.11.5 State transitions of internal clock φ ...................................................................................... 2-196
Fig. 2.11.6 Oscillation stabilizing time at poweron ......................................................................... 2-197
Fig. 2.11.7 Oscillation stabilizing time at reoscillation of XIN ....................................................................... 2-198
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
iv
List of figures
CHAPTER 3. APPENDIX
Fig. 3.1.1 Pin configuration of EPROM version (top view) ................................................................ 3-5
Fig. 3.1.2 Pin configuration of One Time PROM version (top view) (1) ............................................. 3-6
Fig. 3.1.3 Pin configuration of One Time PROM version (top view) (2) ............................................. 3-7
Fig. 3.1.4 Functional block diagram of built-in PROM version ........................................................... 3-8
Fig. 3.1.5 Programming and testing of One Time PROM version (shipped in blank) ...................... 3-10
Fig. 3.2.1 Wiring for the RESET input pin ........................................................................................ 3-11
Fig. 3.2.2 Wiring for clock I/O pins ................................................................................................... 3-11
Fig. 3.2.3 Wiring for the VPP pin of the One Time PROM and the EPROM version ........................ 3-12
Fig. 3.2.4 Bypass capacitor across the VSS line and the VCC line ................................................... 3-12
Fig. 3.2.5 Analog signal line and a resistor and a capacitor ............................................................ 3-13
Fig. 3.2.6 Wiring for a large current signal line ................................................................................ 3-13
Fig. 3.2.7 Wiring to a signal line where potential levels change frequently ..................................... 3-14
Fig. 3.2.8 VSS pattern on the underside of an oscillator .................................................................. 3-14
Fig. 3.2.9 Setup for I/O ports ........................................................................................................... 3-14
Fig. 3.2.10 Watchdog timer by software .......................................................................................... 3-15
Fig. 3.3.1 Structure of port P0 and P1 direction registers ................................................................ 3-16
Fig. 3.3.2 Structure of port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction registers ........................................................ 3-16
Fig. 3.3.3 Structure of PULL register A ............................................................................................ 3-17
Fig. 3.3.4 Structure of PULL register B ............................................................................................ 3-17
Fig. 3.3.5 Structure of serial I/O1 status register ............................................................................. 3-18
Fig. 3.3.6 Structure of serial I/O1 control register ............................................................................ 3-19
Fig. 3.3.7 Structure of UART control register .................................................................................. 3-20
Fig. 3.3.8 Structure of serial I/O2 control register ............................................................................ 3-20
Fig. 3.3.9 Structure of timer X mode register ................................................................................... 3-21
Fig. 3.3.10 Structure of timer Y mode register ................................................................................. 3-22
Fig. 3.3.11 Structure of timer 123 mode register ............................................................................. 3-23
Fig. 3.3.12 Structure of φ output control register ............................................................................. 3-23
Fig. 3.3.13 Structure of watchdog timer control register .................................................................. 3-24
Fig. 3.3.14 Structure of segment output register ............................................................................. 3-24
Fig. 3.3.15 Structure of LCD mode register ..................................................................................... 3-25
Fig. 3.3.16 Structure of interrupt edge selection register ................................................................. 3-26
Fig. 3.3.17 Structure of CPU mode register .................................................................................... 3-26
Fig. 3.3.18 Structure of interrupt request register 1 ......................................................................... 3-27
Fig. 3.3.19 Structure of interrupt request register 2 ......................................................................... 3-27
Fig. 3.3.20 Structure of interrupt control register 1 .......................................................................... 3-28
Fig. 3.3.21 Structure of interrupt control register 2 .......................................................................... 3-28
v
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
List of tables
List of tables
CHAPTER 1. HARDWARE
Table 1 Pin description (1) ................................................................................................................. 1-5
Table 2 Pin description (2) ................................................................................................................. 1-6
Table 3 List of supported products (1) ............................................................................................... 1-8
Table 4 List of supported products (2) ............................................................................................... 1-9
Table 5 I/O ports functions .............................................................................................................. 1-15
Table 6 Interrupt vector addresses and priority ............................................................................... 1-19
Table 7 Maximum number of display pixels at each duty ratio ........................................................ 1-32
Table 8 Bias control and applied voltage to VL1–VL3 ........................................................................................ 1-34
Table 9 Duty ratio control and common pins used .......................................................................... 1-34
Table 10 Programming adapter ....................................................................................................... 1-46
Table 11 Absolute maximum ratings ...............................................................................................1-47
Table 12 Recommended operating conditions (1) ........................................................................... 1-47
Table 13 Recommended operating conditions (2) ........................................................................... 1-48
Table 14 Electrical characteristics (1) .............................................................................................. 1-49
Table 15 Electrical characteristics (2) .............................................................................................. 1-50
Table 16 Timing requirements 1 ...................................................................................................... 1-51
Table 17 Timing requirements 2 ...................................................................................................... 1-51
Table 18 Switching characteristics 1 ...............................................................................................1-52
Table 19 Switching characteristics 2 ...............................................................................................1-52
Table 20 Absolute maximum ratings (Extended operating temperature version) ............................ 1-53
Table 21 Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) (1) ....... 1-53
Table 22 Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) (2) ....... 1-54
Table 23 Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) (1) .......................... 1-55
Table 24 Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) (2) .......................... 1-56
Table 25 Timing requirements 1 (Extended operating temperature version) .................................. 1-57
Table 26 Timing requirements 2 (Extended operating temperature version) .................................. 1-57
Table 27 Switching characteristics 1 (Extended operating temperature version) ............................ 1-58
Table 28 Switching characteristics 2 (Extended operating temperature version) ............................ 1-58
Table 29 Absolute maximum ratings (Low power source voltage version) ..................................... 1-59
Table 30 Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) (1) ................. 1-59
Table 31 Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) (2) ................. 1-60
Table 32 Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) (1) .................................... 1-61
Table 33 Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) (2) .................................... 1-62
Table 34 Timing requirements 1 (Low power source voltage version) ............................................ 1-63
Table 35 Timing requirements 2 (Low power source voltage version) ............................................ 1-63
Table 36 Switching characteristics 1 (Low power source voltage version) ..................................... 1-64
Table 37 Switching characteristics 2 (Low power source voltage version) ..................................... 1-64
CHAPTER 2. APPLICATION
Table 2.1.1 Memory allocation of port registers ................................................................................ 2-3
Table 2.1.2 Memory allocation of port direction registers .................................................................. 2-4
Table 2.1.3 I/O ports which either pull-up or pull-down is controlled by software .............................. 2-5
Table 2.1.4 Termination of unused pins .......................................................................................... 2-14
Table 2.2.1 Interrupt sources and interrupt request generating conditions ..................................... 2-16
Table 2.2.2 List of interrupt bits for individual interrupt sources ...................................................... 2-20
Table 2.3.1 Real time ports and bits for storing data ....................................................................... 2-40
Table 2.3.2 Relation between timer X operating mode bits and operating modes .......................... 2-58
Table 2.3.3 Relation between timer Y operating mode bits and operating modes .......................... 2-61
Table 2.3.4 Table example for timer X setting value ....................................................................... 2-81
Table 2.3.5 Table example for RTP setting value ........................................................................... 2-81
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
i
List of tables
Table 2.4.1 Relation between timer 2 count source selection bit and count sources ...................... 2-94
Table 2.4.2 Relation between timer 3 count source selection bit and count sources ...................... 2-94
Table 2.4.3 Relation between timer 1 count source selection bit and count sources ...................... 2-94
Table 2.5.1 Baud rate selection table (reference values) .............................................................. 2-113
Table 2.5.2 Each bit function of UART transmit data .................................................................... 2-114
Table 2.5.3 Control contents of transmit enable bit ....................................................................... 2-125
Table 2.5.4 Control contents of receive enable bit ........................................................................ 2-126
Table 2.5.5 Relation between UART control register and transfer data formats ........................... 2-128
Table 2.6.1 Relation between internal synchronization clock selection bit and synchronizing clock ......................... 2-150
Table 2.7.1 Pin functions by setting segment output enable register ............................................ 2-156
Table 2.7.2 Pin functions by setting the corresponding registers when they are not used as segment output pins .. 2-157
Table 2.7.3 Setting of segment output pins for LCD display ......................................................... 2-157
Table 2.7.4 Setting of input port P3 and I/O ports P0, P1 ............................................................. 2-158
Table 2.7.5 Setting of pull-down pins ............................................................................................ 2-158
Table 2.8.1 Program runaway detection time (maximum) ............................................................. 2-173
Table 2.9.1 State in stop mode ...................................................................................................... 2-176
Table 2.9.2 State in wait mode ...................................................................................................... 2-181
Table 2.10.1 Timers 1 and 2 at reset ............................................................................................. 2-186
CHAPTER 3. APPENDIX
Table 3.1.1 Product expansion of built-in PROM version .................................................................. 3-3
Table 3.1.2 Performance overview of built-in PROM version ............................................................ 3-4
ii
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
CHAPTER 1
HARDWARE
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
APPLICATIONS
PIN CONFIGURATION
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK
PIN DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBERING
GROUP EXPANSION
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
NOTES ON PROGRAMMING
DATA REQUIRED FOR MASK
ORDERS
ROM PROGRAMMING METHOD
MITSUBISHI
MICROCOMPUTERS
MITSUBISHI
MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 3820
Group
Group
SINGLE-CHIP
SINGLE-CHIP
8-BIT
8-BIT
CMOS
CMOS
MICROCOMPUTER
MICROCOMPUTER
• LCD drive control circuit
DESCRIPTION
The 3820 group is the 8-bit microcomputer based on the 740 family core technology.
The 3820 group has the LCD drive control circuit and the serial I/
O as additional functions.
The various microcomputers in the 3820 group include variations
of internal memory size and packaging. For details, refer to the
section on part numbering.
For details on availability of microcomputers in the 3820 group, refer to the section on group expansion.
•
•
•
FEATURES
• Basic machine-language instructions ....................................... 71
• The minimum instruction execution time ............................ 0.5 µs
(at 8MHz oscillation frequency)
• Memory size
•
•
•
•
•
•
ROM .................................................................. 4 K to 32 K bytes
RAM ................................................................. 192 to 1024 bytes
Programmable input/output ports ............................................. 43
Software pull-up/pull-down resistors (Ports P0-P7 except Port P40)
Interrupts .................................................. 16 sources, 16 vectors
(includes key input interrupt)
Timers ........................................................... 8-bit ✕ 3, 16-bit ✕ 2
Serial I/O1 ..................... 8-bit ✕ 1 (UART or Clock-synchronized)
Serial I/O2 .................................... 8-bit ✕ 1 (Clock-synchronized)
•
•
Bias ................................................................................... 1/2, 1/3
Duty ............................................................................ 1/2, 1/3, 1/4
Common output .......................................................................... 4
Segment output ......................................................................... 40
2 Clock generating circuit
Clock (XIN-XOUT) .................................. Internal feedback resistor
Sub-clock (XCIN-XCOUT) .......... Without internal feedback resistor
(connect to external ceramic resonator or quartz-crystal oscillator)
Watchdog timer ............................................................. 15-bit ✕ 1
Power source voltage
In high-speed mode .................................................... 4.0 to 5.5 V
(at 8MHz oscillation frequency and high-speed selected)
In middle-speed mode ................................................ 2.5 to 5.5 V
(at 8MHz oscillation frequency and middle-speed selected)
In low-speed mode ...................................................... 2.5 to 5.5 V
(Extended operating temperature version: 3.0 V to 5.5 V)
Power dissipation
In high-speed mode ........................................................... 32 mW
(at 8 MHz oscillation frequency)
In low-speed mode .............................................................. 45 µW
(at 32 kHz oscillation frequency, at 3 V power source voltage)
Operating temperature range ................................... – 20 to 85°C
(Extended operating temperature version: –40 to 85°C)
APPLICATIONS
Household appliances, consumer electronics, etc.
P30/SEG16
P31/SEG17
P32/SEG18
P33/SEG19
P34/SEG20
P35/SEG21
P36/SEG22
P37/SEG23
P00/SEG24
P01/SEG25
P02/SEG26
P03/SEG27
P04/SEG28
P05/SEG29
P06/SEG30
P07/SEG31
P10/SEG32
P11/SEG33
P12/SEG34
P13/SEG35
P14/SEG36
P15/SEG37
P16/SEG38
P17/SEG39
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
VCC
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
65
40
66
39
67
38
68
37
69
36
70
35
34
71
M38203M4-XXXFP
M38203M4-XXXFP
72
73
74
32
31
75
30
76
29
77
28
78
27
79
80
26
25
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SEG0
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM0
VL3
VL2
VL1
P61/RTP1
P60/INT3/RTP0
P57/INT2
P56/TOUT
P55/CNTR1
P54/CNTR0
P53/SRDY2
P52/SCLK2
P51/SOUT2
P50/SIN2
P47/SRDY1
P46/SCLK1
P45/TXD
P44/RXD
P43/INT1
P42/INT0
1 2 3 4
Package type : 80P6N-A
80-pin plastic-molded QFP
Fig. 1 Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXFP
1-2
33
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
VSS
XOUT
XIN
P70/XCOUT
P71/XCIN
RESET
P40
P41/φ
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
P32/SEG18
P33/SEG19
P34/SEG20
P35/SEG21
P36/SEG22
P37/SEG23
P00/SEG24
P01/SEG25
P02/SEG26
P03/SEG27
P04/SEG28
P05/SEG29
P06/SEG30
P07/SEG31
P10/SEG32
P11/SEG33
P12/SEG34
P13/SEG35
P14/SEG36
P15/SEG37
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P31/SEG17
P30/SEG16
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
VCC
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
SEG0
COM3
61
40
62
39
63
38
64
37
65
36
66
35
67
34
68
33
M38203M4-XXXGP
M38203M4-XXXHP
69
70
71
72
32
31
30
29
73
28
74
27
75
26
76
25
77
24
78
23
79
22
21
80
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
COM2
COM1
COM0
VL3
VL2
VL1
P61/RTP1
P60/INT3/RTP0
P57/INT2
P56/TOUT
P55/CNTR1
P54/CNTR0
P53/SRDY2
P52/SCLK2
P51/SOUT2
P50/SIN2
P47/SRDY1
P46/SCLK1
P45/TXD
P44/RXD
1 2 3
P16/SEG38
P17/SEG39
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
VSS
XOUT
XIN
P70/XCOUT
P71/XCIN
RESET
P40
P41/φ
P42/INT0
P43/INT1
Package type : 80P6S-A/80P6D-A
80-pin plastic-molded QFP
Fig. 2 Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXGP/ HP
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-3
XCOUT
Subclock
output
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I/O port P5
9 10
P5(8)
P4(8)
I/O port P4
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
RTP0,RTP1
PS
PCL
S
Y
X
A
1
27
Reset input
RESET
SI/O2(8)
TOUT
CNTR0,CNTR1
PCH
I/O port P6
P6(2)
RESET
φ
28 29
P7(2)
Watchdog timer
XCIN
Subclock
input
CPU
I/O port P7
XCOUT
XCIN
31
29
Clock
output
XOUT
Clock generating
circuit
30
28
Clock
input
XIN
INT2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
SI/O1(8)
Input port P3
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
P3(8)
Timer 1(8)
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
I/O port P0
I/O port P1
P0(8)
P0(8)
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
P1(8)
LCD
drive control
circuit
I/O port P2
P2(8)
LCD display
RAM
(20 bytes)
RAM
Key-on wake up
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Timer 3(8)
Timer 2(8)
Timer Y(16)
Timer X(16)
ROM
32
73
Data bus
(0V)
VSS
(5V)
VCC
φ
Fig. 3 Functional block diagram
INT0,INT1
1-4
Real time port function
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM (Package : 80P6N-A)
7
8
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEG0
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
SEG8
SEG9
SEG10
SEG11
SEG12
SEG13
SEG14
SEG15
COM0
COM1
COM2
COM3
VL1
VL2
VL3
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM (Package : 80P6N-A)
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
PIN DESCRIPTION
Table 1. Pin description (1)
Pin
VCC
Name
Function
Function except a port function
Power source
• Apply voltage of 2.5 V to 5.5 V to VCC, and 0 V to VSS.
(Extended operating temperature version : 3.0 V to 5.5 V)
RESET
Reset input
• Reset input pin for active “L”
XIN
Clock input
XOUT
Clock output
• Input and output pins for the main clock generating circuit.
• Feedback resistor is built in between XIN pin and XOUT pin.
• Connect a ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator between the XIN and XOUT pins to set
the oscillation frequency.
• If an external clock is used, connect the clock source to the XIN pin and leave the XOUT pin open.
• This clock is used as the oscillating source of system clock.
VL1 – VL3
LCD power source
• Input 0 ≤ VL1 ≤ VL2 ≤ VL3 ≤ VCC voltage
• Input 0 – VL3 voltage to LCD
COM0 – COM3
Common output
• LCD common output pins
• COM2 and COM3 are not used at 1/2 duty ratio.
• COM3 is not used at 1/3 duty ratio.
SEG0 – SEG15
Segment output
• LCD segment output pins
P00/SEG24 –
P07/SEG31
I/O port P0
•
•
•
•
P10/SEG32 –
P17/SEG39
I/O port P1
•
•
•
•
P20 – P27
I/O port P2
•
•
•
•
8-bit I/O port
CMOS compatible input level
CMOS 3-state output structure
I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually
programmed as either input or output.
• Pull-up control is enabled.
• Key input (key-on wake up) interrupt
input pins
P30/SEG16 –
P37/SEG23
Input port P3
• 8-bit Input port
• CMOS compatible input level
• Pull-down control is enabled.
• LCD segment pins
P40
Input port P4
• 1-bit input pin
• CMOS compatible input level
P41/ φ
I/O port P4
•
•
•
•
VSS
P42/INT0,
P43/INT1
P44/RXD,
P45/TXD,
P46/SCLK1,
P47/SRDY1
8-bit I/O port
CMOS compatible input level
CMOS 3-state output structure
I/O direction register allows each port to be individually
programmed as either input or output.
• Pull-down control is enabled.
• LCD segment pins
8-bit I/O port
CMOS compatible input level
CMOS 3-state output structure
I/O direction register allows each port to be individually
programmed as either input or output.
• Pull-down control is enabled.
7-bit I/O port
CMOS compatible input level
CMOS 3-state output structure
I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually
programmed as either input or output.
• Pull-up control is enabled.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
• φ clock output pin
• Interrupt input pins
• Serial I/O1 function pins
1-5
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 2. Pin description (2)
Pin
Name
Function
Function except a port function
P50/SIN2,
P51/SOUT2,
P52/SCLK2,
P53/SRDY2
I/O port P5
P54/CNTR0,
P55/CNTR1
•
•
•
•
8-bit I/O port
CMOS compatible input level
CMOS 3-state output structure
I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually
programmed as either input or output.
• Pull-up control is enabled.
• Serial I/O2 function pins
• Timer function pins
P56/TOUT
• Timer output pin
P57/INT2
• Interrupt input pin
P60/INT3/RTP0
I/O port P6
P61/RTP1
P70/XCOUT,
P71/XCIN
1-6
I/O port P7
•
•
•
•
2-bit I/O port
CMOS compatible input level
CMOS 3-state output structure
I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually
programmed as either input or output.
• Pull-up control is enabled.
• Interrupt input pins(P60)
•
•
•
•
• Sub-clock generating circuit input
pins
(Connect a resonator. External clock
cannot be used.)
2-bit I/O port
CMOS compatible input level
CMOS 3-state output structure
I/O direction register allows each pin to be individually
programmed as either input or output.
• Pull-up control is enabled.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
• Real time port function pin
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
PART NUMBERING
Product M3820 3 M 4 - XXX FP
Package type
FP : 80P6N-A package
GP : 80P6S-A package
HP : 80P6D-A package
FS : 80D0 package
ROM number
Omitted in some types.
Normally, using hyphen
When electrical characteristic, or division of quality
identification code using alphanumeric character
– : standard
D : Extended operating temperature version
ROM/PROM size
1 : 4096 bytes
2 : 8192 bytes
3 : 12288 bytes
4 : 16384 bytes
5 : 20480 bytes
6 : 24576 bytes
7 : 28672 bytes
8 : 32768 bytes
The first 128 bytes and the last 2 bytes of ROM
are reserved areas ; they cannot be used.
Memory type
M : Mask ROM version
E : EPROM or One Time PROM version
RAM size
0 : 192 bytes
1 : 256 bytes
2 : 384 bytes
3 : 512 bytes
4 : 640 bytes
5 : 768 bytes
6 : 896 bytes
7 : 1024 bytes
Fig. 4 Part numbering
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-7
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
GROUP EXPANSION
(3) Packages
80P6N-A ............................. 0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
80P6S-A ........................... 0.65 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
80P6D-A ............................. 0.5 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
80D0 ................ 0.8 mm-pitch ceramic LCC (EPROM version)
Mitsubishi plans to expand the 3820 group as follows:
(1) Support for mask ROM, One Time PROM, and EPROM
versions
(2) ROM/PROM size .......................................... 8 K to 32 K bytes
RAM size ..................................................... 512 to 1024 bytes
Memory Expansion Plan
New product
ROM size (bytes)
32K
M38207M8/E8
28K
24K
20K
Mass product
16K
M38203M4/E4
12K
8K
4K
192 256
384
512
640
768
896
1024
RAM size (bytes)
Products under development: the development schedule and specification may be revised without notice.
Fig. 5 Memory expansion plan (1)
Currently supported products are listed below.
Table 3. List of supported products (1)
Product
M38203M4-XXXFP
M38203E4-XXXFP
M38203E4FP
M38203M4-XXXGP
M38203E4-XXXGP
M38203E4GP
M38203M4-XXXHP
M38203E4-XXXHP
M38203E4HP
M38203E4FS
M38207M8-XXXFP
M38207E8-XXXFP
M38207E8FP
M38207M8-XXXGP
M38207E8-XXXGP
M38207E8GP
M38207M8-XXXHP
M38207E8-XXXHP
M38207E8HP
M38207E8FS
1-8
(P) ROM size (bytes)
ROM size for User in ( )
As of April 1995
RAM size (bytes)
Package
80P6N-A
16384
(16254)
512
80P6S-A
80P6D-A
80D0
80P6N-A
32768
(32638)
1024
80P6S-A
80P6D-A
80D0
Remarks
Mask ROM version
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version (blank)
Mask ROM version
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version (blank)
Mask ROM version
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version (blank)
EPROM version
Mask ROM version
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version (blank)
Mask ROM version
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version (blank)
Mask ROM version
One Time PROM version
One Time PROM version (blank)
EPROM version
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
(2) ROM size ................................................... 16 K to 32 K bytes
RAM size ..................................................... 512 to 1024 bytes
(3) Packages
80P6N-A ............................. 0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
GROUP EXPANSION
(EXTENDED OPERATING TEMPERATURE VERSION)
Mitsubishi plans to expand the 3820 group (extended operating
temperature version) as follows:
(1) Support for mask ROM, One Time PROM, and EPROM
versions
Memory Expansion Plan
New product
ROM size (bytes)
32K
M38207M8D
28K
24K
20K
New product
16K
M38203M4D
12K
8K
4K
192 256
384
512
640
768
896
1024
RAM size (bytes)
Products under development: the development schedule and specification may be revised without notice.
Fig. 6 Memory expansion plan (2)
Currently supported products are listed below.
Table 4. List of supported products (2)
As of April 1995
Product
ROM size (bytes)
ROM size for User in ( )
RAM size (bytes)
Package
M38203M4DXXXFP
M38207M8DXXXFP
16384(16254)
32768(32638)
512
1024
80P6N-A
80P6N-A
Remarks
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-9
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
(3) Packages
80P6N-A ............................. 0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
80P6S-A ........................... 0.65 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
80P6D-A ............................. 0.5 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
80D0 ................ 0.8 mm-pitch ceramic LCC (EPROM version)
GROUP EXPANSION
(LOW POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE VERSION)
Mitsubishi plans to expand the 3820 group (low power source voltage version) as follows:
(1) Support for mask ROM, One Time PROM, and EPROM
versions
(2) ROM/PROM size .......................................... 8 K to 32 K bytes
RAM size ..................................................... 512 to 1024 bytes
Memory Expansion Plan
ROM size (bytes)
32K
28K
24K
20K
New product
16K
M38203M4L
12K
New product
8K
M38203M2L
4K
192 256
384
512
640
768
896
1024
RAM size (bytes)
Products under development: the development schedule and specification may be revised without notice.
Fig. 7 Memory expansion plan (3)
Currently supported products are listed below.
Table 5. List of supported products (3)
Product
M38203M2L-XXXFP
M38203M2L-XXXGP
M38203M2L-XXXHP
M38203M4L-XXXFP
M38203M4L-XXXGP
M38203M4L-XXXHP
1-10
ROM size (bytes)
ROM size for User in ( )
As of April 1995
RAM size (bytes)
Package
512
80P6N-A
80P6S-A
80P6D-A
80P6N-A
80P6S-A
80P6D-A
8192
(8062)
16384
(16254)
Remarks
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version
Mask ROM version
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
The 3820 group uses the standard 740 family instruction set. Refer to the table of 740 family addressing modes and machine instructions or the SERIES 740 <Software> User’s Manual for details on the instruction set.
Machine-resident 740 family instructions are as follows:
The FST and SLW instruction cannot be used.
The STP, WIT, MUL, and DIV instruction can be used.
CPU Mode Register
The CPU mode register is allocated at address 003B16.
The CPU mode register contains the stack page selection bit and
the internal system clock selection bit.
7
0
CPU mode register
(CPUM (CM) : address 003B16)
Processor mode bits
b1 b0
0 0 : Single-chip mode
0 1 :
1 0 : Not available
1 1 :
Stack page selection bit
0 : 0 page
1 : 1 page
Not used (returns “1” when read)
(Do not write “0” to this bit)
Port X C switch bit
0 : I/O port
1 : X CIN, XCOUT
Main clock ( X IN–XOUT) stop bit
0 : Oscillating
1 : Stopped
Main clock division ratio selection bit
0 : f(X IN)/2 (high-speed mode)
1 : f(X IN)/8 (middle-speed mode)
Internal system clock selection bit
0 : X IN-XOUT selected (middle-/high-speed mode)
1 : X CIN-XCOUT selected (low-speed mode)
Fig. 8 Structure of CPU mode register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-11
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
MEMORY
Special Function Register (SFR) Area
The Special Function Register area in the zero page contains control registers such as I/O ports and timers.
RAM
RAM is used for data storage and for stack area of subroutine
calls and interrupts.
Zero Page
The 256 bytes from addresses 000016 to 00FF 16 are called the
zero page area. The internal RAM and the special function registers (SFR) are allocated to this area.
The zero page addressing mode can be used to specify memory
and register addresses in the zero page area. Access to this area
with only 2 bytes is possible in the zero page addressing mode.
Special Page
ROM
The first 128 bytes and the last 2 bytes of ROM are reserved for
device testing and the rest is user area for storing programs.
Interrupt Vector Area
The 256 bytes from addresses FF0016 to FFFF16 are called the
special page area. The special page addressing mode can be
used to specify memory addresses in the special page area. Access to this area with only 2 bytes is possible in the special page
addressing mode.
The interrupt vector area contains reset and interrupt vectors.
RAM area
RAM size
(bytes)
Address
XXXX16
192
256
384
512
640
768
896
1024
00FF16
013F16
01BF16
023F16
02BF16
033F16
03BF16
043F16
000016
SFR area
004016 LCD display RAM area
RAM
Zero page
005416
010016
XXXX16
Reserved area
044016
ROM area
Not used
ROM size
(bytes)
Address
YYYY16
Address
ZZZZ16
4096
8192
12288
16384
20480
24576
28672
32768
F00016
E00016
D00016
C00016
B00016
A00016
900016
800016
F08016
E08016
D08016
C08016
B08016
A08016
908016
808016
YYYY16
Reserved ROM area
(128 bytes)
ZZZZ16
ROM
FF0016
FFDC16
Interrupt vector area
FFFE16
FFFF16
Fig. 9 Memory map diagram
1-12
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Reserved ROM area
Special page
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
000016
Port P0 (P0)
002016
Timer X (low-order) (TXL)
000116
Port P0 direction register (P0D)
002116
Timer X (high-order) (TXH)
000216
Port P1 (P1)
002216
Timer Y (low-order) (TYL)
000316
Port P1 direction register (P1D)
002316
Timer Y (high-order) (TYH)
000416
Port P2 (P2)
002416
Timer 1 (T1)
000516
Port P2 direction register (P2D)
002516
Timer 2 (T2)
000616
Port P3 (P3)
002616
Timer 3 (T3)
000716
002716
Timer X mode register (TXM)
Timer Y mode register (TYM)
000816
Port P4 (P4)
002816
000916
Port P4 direction register (P4D)
002916
Timer 123 mode register (T123M)
000A16
Port P5 (P5)
002A16
φ output control register (CKOUT)
000B16
Port P5 direction register (P5D)
002B16
000C16
Port P6 (P6)
002C16
000D16
Port P6 direction register (P6D)
002D16
000E16
Port P7 (P7)
002E16
000F16
Port P7 direction register (P7D)
002F16
001016
003016
001116
003116
001216
003216
001316
003316
001416
003416
001516
003516
001616
PULL register A (PULLA)
003616
001716
PULL register B (PULLB)
003716
Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON)
001816
Transmit/Receive buffer register (TB/RB)
003816
Segment output enable register (SEG)
001916
Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS)
003916
LCD mode register (LM)
001A16
Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON)
003A16
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE)
001B16
UART control register (UARTCON)
003B16
CPU mode register (CPUM)
001C16
Baud rate generator (BRG)
003C16
Interrupt request register 1(IREQ1)
001D16
Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON)
003D16
Interrupt request register 2(IREQ2)
003E16
Interrupt control register 1(ICON1)
003F16
Interrupt control register 2(ICON2)
001E16
001F16
Serial I/O2 register (SIO2)
Fig. 10 Memory map of special function register (SFR)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-13
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
I/O PORTS
Direction Registers (ports P2, P4 1–P47, and
P5–P7)
The 3820 group has 43 programmable I/O pins arranged in seven
I/O ports (ports P0–P2 and P4–P7). The I/O ports P2, P41–P4 7,
and P5–P7 have direction registers which determine the input/output direction of each individual pin. Each bit in a direction register
corresponds to one pin, each pin can be set to be input port or
output port.
When “0” is written to the bit corresponding to a pin, that pin becomes an input pin. When “1” is written to that bit, that pin becomes an output pin.
If data is read from a pin set to output, the value of the port output
latch is read, not the value of the pin itself. Pins set to input are
floating. If a pin set to input is written to, only the port output latch
is written to and the pin remains floating.
7
PULL register A
(PULLA : address 0016 16)
P00–P07 pull-down
P10–P17 pull-down
P20–P27 pull-up
P30–P37 pull-down
P70, P71 pull-up
Not used (return "0" when read)
7
0
PULL register B
(PULLB : address 0017 16)
P41–P43 pull-up
P44–P47 pull-up
P50–P53 pull-up
P54–P57 pull-up
P60, P61 pull-up
Not used (return "0" when read)
Direction Registers (ports P0 and P1)
Ports P0 and P1 have direction registers which determine the input /output direction of each individual port.
Each port in a direction register corresponds to one port, each
port can be set to be input or output.
When “0” is written to the bit 0 of a direction register, that port becomes an input port. When “1” is written to that port, that port becomes an output port.
Bits 1 to 7 of ports P0 and P1 direction registers are not used.
0 : No pull-up (no pull-down)
1 : Pull-up (pull-down)
Note : For ports set for the output mode,
pull-up or pull-down is impossible.
Fig. 11 Structure of PULL register A and PULL register B
Ports P3 and P40
These ports are only for input.
Pull-up/Pull-down Control
By setting the PULL register A (address 001616) or the PULL register B (address 001716), ports except for port P40 can control either pull-down or pull-up (pins that are shared with the segment
output pins for LCD are pull-down; all other pins are pull-up) with a
program.
However, the contents of PULL register A and PULL register B do
not affect ports programmed as the output ports.
1-14
0
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 6. I/O ports functions
Pin
Name
Input/Output
Port P0
Input/output,
individual ports
P10/SEG32–
P17/SEG39
Port P1
Input/output,
individual ports
P20 – P27
Port P2
Input/output,
individual bits
P30/SEG16–
P37/SEG23
Port P3
Input
CMOS compatible
input level
Input
CMOS compatible
input level
P00/SEG24–
P07/SEG31
P40
I/O Format
CMOS compatible
input level
CMOS 3-state output
CMOS compatible
input level
CMOS 3-state output
CMOS compatible
input level
CMOS 3-state output
P41/ φ
P42/INT0,
Non-Port Function
LCD segment output
LCD segment output
Key input(Key-on
wake up) interrupt
input
LCD segment output
Port P4
Input/output,
individual bits
P44/RXD
P45/TXD
P46/SCLK1
P47/SRDY1
P50/SIN2
P51/SOUT2
P52/SCLK2
P53/SRDY2
CMOS compatible
input level
CMOS 3-state output
External interrupt input
Serial I/O1 function I/O
Serial I/O2 function I/O
P54/CNTR0
Port P5
P55/CNTR1
Input/output,
individual bits
CMOS compatible
input level
CMOS 3-state output
Timer I/O
Timer I/O
P56/TOUT
Timer output
P57/INT2
External interrupt input
P60/INT3/RTP0
External interrupt input
Real time port
function output
Port P6
Input/output,
individual bits
CMOS compatible
input level
CMOS 3-state output
Input/output,
individual bits
CMOS compatible
input level
CMOS 3-state output
output
output
LCD common output
LCD segment output
P61/RTP1
P70/XCOUT
Port P7
P71/XCIN
COM0-COM3
SEG0-SEG15
Common
Segment
Diagram No.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
φ clock output
P43/INT1
Related SFRs
PULL register A
Segment output
enable register
PULL register A
Segment output
enable register
PULL register A
Interrupt control
register 2
PULL register A
Segment output
enable register
Real time port
function output
Sub-clock
generating circuit
I/O
PULL register B
φ output control
register
PULL register B
Interrupt edge selection
register
PULL register B
Serial I/O1 control register
Serial I/O1 status register
UART control register
PULL register B
Serial I/O2 control
register
PULL register B
Timer X mode register
PULL register B
Timer Y mode register
PULL register B
Timer 123 mode register
PULL register B
Interrupt edge
selection register
PULL register B
Timer X mode register
Interrupt edge
selection register
PULL register B
Timer X mode register
PULL register A
CPU mode register
LCD mode register
(5)
(2)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(10)
(15)
(2)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
Note : Make sure that the input level at each pin is either 0 V or VCC during execution of the STP instruction.
When an input level is at an intermediate potential, a current will flow from VCC to VSS through the input-stage gate.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-15
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
(1)Ports P0,P1
(2)Ports P2,P42,P43,P57
VL2/VL3
Pull-up control
VL1/VSS
Segment output enable bit
(Note)
Direction register
Direction register
Data bus
Data bus
Port latch
Port latch
Key input (Key-on wake up) interrupt input
INT0–INT2 interrupt input
Pull-down control
Segment output enable bit
Note. Bit 0 of port P0 direction register and
port P1 direction register.
(3)Ports P30–P37
(4)Port P40
VL2/VL3
Data bus
VL1/VSS
Data bus
Pull-down
control
Segment output enable bit
(6)Port P44
(5)Port P41
Pull-up control
Pull-up control
Serial I/O1 enable bit
Reception enable bit
Direction register
Direction register
Port latch
Data bus
Data bus
Port latch
output control bit
Serial I/O1 input
(8)Port P46
(7)Port P45
Pull-up control
P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit
Serial I/O1 enable bit
Transmission enable bit
Serial I/O1 synchronization clock
selection bit
Serial I/O1 enable bit
Serial I/O1 mode selection bit
Serial I/O1 enable bit
Direction register
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
Serial I/O1 output
Pull-up control
Data bus
Port latch
Serial I/O1 clock output
Serial I/O1 clock input
Fig. 12 Port block diagram (1)
1-16
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
(9) Port P47
(10) Ports P50,P55
Serial I/O1 mode selection bit
Pull-up control
Pull-up control
Serial I/O1 enable bit
SRDY1 output enable bit
Direction register
Direction register
Data bus
Data bus
Port latch
Port latch
Serial I/O2 input
CNTR1 interrupt input
Serial I/O1 ready output
(11) Port P51
(12) Port P52
Pull-up control
Serial I/O2 transmit completion signal
Internal synchronization clock
select bits
Serial I/O2 port selection bit
Pull-up control
Serial I/O2 port selection bit
Direction register
Direction register
Data bus
Data bus
Port latch
Port latch
Serial I/O2 clock output
Serial I/O2 output
Serial I/O2 clock input
(13) Port P53
(14) Port P54
Pull-up control
Pull-up control
SRDY2 output enable bit
Direction register
Data bus
Direction register
Port latch
Data bus
Port latch
Timer X operating mode bit
(Pulse output mode selection)
Timer output
Serial I/O2 ready output
CNTR0 interrupt input
(15) Port P56
(16) Ports P60, P61
Pull-up control
Pull-up control
Direction register
Direction register
Data bus
Port latch
TOUT output control bit
Timer output
Data bus
Port latch
Real time port control bit
Data for real time port
INT3 interrupt input
Except P61
Fig. 13 Port block diagram (2)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-17
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
(17) Port P70
(18) Port P71
Port selection/Pull-up control
Data bus
Port selection/Pull-up control
Port XC switch bit
Port XC switch bit
Direction register
Direction register
Port latch
Port latch
Data bus
Oscillation circuit
Sub-clock generating circuit input
Port P71
Port XC switch bit
(19) COM0 –COM3
(20) SEG0 – SEG15
VL2/VL3
The voltage applied to the sources of
P-channel and N-channel transistors
is the controlled voltage by the bias
value.
VL3
VL1/VSS
VL2
VL1
The gate input signal of each transistor is
controlled by the LCD duty ratio and the
bias value.
VSS
Fig. 14 Port block diagram (3)
1-18
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
INTERRUPTS
Interrupt Operation
Interrupts occur by sixteen sources: seven external, eight internal,
and one software.
When an interrupt is received, the contents of the program counter
and processor status register are automatically stored into the
stack. The interrupt disable flag is set to inhibit other interrupts
from interfering.The corresponding interrupt request bit is cleared
and the interrupt jump destination address is read from the vector
table into the program counter.
Interrupt Control
Each interrupt is controlled by an interrupt request bit, an interrupt
enable bit, and the interrupt disable flag except for the software interrupt set by the BRK instruction. An interrupt occurs if the corresponding interrupt request and enable bits are “1” and the interrupt disable flag is “0”.
Interrupt enable bits can be set or cleared by software.
Interrupt request bits can be cleared by software, but cannot be
set by software.
The BRK instruction cannot be disabled with any flag or bit. The I
(interrupt disable) flag disables all interrupts except the BRK instruction interrupt.
Notes on Use
When the active edge of an external interrupt (INT0–INT3, CNTR0,
or CNTR 1) is changed, the corresponding interrupt request bit
may also be set. Therefore, please take following sequence;
(1) Disable the external interrupt which is selected.
(2) Change the active edge selection.
(3) Clear the interrupt request bit which is selected to “0”.
(4) Enable the external interrupt which is selected.
Table 7. Interrupt vector addresses and priority
Interrupt Source
Priority
Vector Addresses (Note 1)
High
Low
FFFD16
FFFC16
Reset (Note 2)
1
INT0
2
FFFB16
FFFA16
INT1
3
FFF916
FFF816
Serial I/O1
receive
4
FFF716
FFF616
Serial I/O1
transmit
5
FFF516
FFF416
Timer X
Timer Y
Timer 2
Timer 3
6
7
8
9
FFF316
FFF116
FFEF16
FFED16
FFF216
FFF016
FFEE16
FFEC16
CNTR0
10
FFEB16
FFEA16
CNTR1
11
FFE916
FFE816
Timer 1
12
FFE716
FFE616
INT2
13
FFE516
FFE416
INT3
14
FFE316
FFE216
Key input
(Key-on wake up)
15
FFE116
FFE016
Serial I/O2
16
FFDF16
FFDE16
BRK instruction
17
FFDD16
FFDC16
Interrupt Request
Generating Conditions
At reset
At detection of either rising or
falling edge of INT0 input
At detection of either rising or
falling edge of INT1 input
At completion of serial I/O1
data reception
At completion of serial I/O1
transmit shift or when transmit
buffer register is empty
At timer X underflow
At timer Y underflow
At timer 2 underflow
At timer 3 underflow
At detection of either rising or
falling edge of CNTR0 input
At detection of either rising or
falling edge of CNTR1 input
At timer 1 underflow
At detection of either rising or
falling edge of INT2 input
At detection of either rising or
falling edge of INT3 input
At falling of conjunction of input
level for port P2 (at input mode)
At completion of serial I/O2
data transmission or reception
At BRK instruction execution
Remarks
Non-maskable
External interrupt
(active edge selectable)
External interrupt
(active edge selectable)
Valid when serial I/O1 is selected
Valid when serial I/O1 is selected
External interrupt
(active edge selectable)
External interrupt
(active edge selectable)
External interrupt
(active edge selectable)
External interrupt
(active edge selectable)
External interrupt
(valid when an “L” level is applied)
Valid when serial I/O2 is selected
Non-maskable software interrupt
Note 1: Vector addresses contain interrupt jump destination addresses.
2: Reset function in the same way as an interrupt with the highest priority.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-19
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Interrupt request bit
Interrupt enable bit
Interrupt disable flag (I)
Interrupt request
BRK instruction
Reset
Fig. 15 Interrupt control
7
0 Interrupt edge selection register
(INTEDGE : address 003A16)
INT0 interrupt edge selection bit
INT1 interrupt edge selection bit
INT2 interrupt edge selection bit
INT3 interrupt edge selection bit
Not used (return “0” when read)
7
0
0 : Falling edge active
1 : Rising edge active
Interrupt request register 1
(IREQ1 : address 003C16)
7
0
Interrupt request register 2
(IREQ2 : address 003D16)
CNTR0 interrupt request bit
CNTR1 interrupt request bit
Timer 1 interrupt request bit
INT2 interrupt request bit
INT3 interrupt request bit
Key input interrupt request bit
Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit
Not used (returns “0” when read)
INT0 interrupt request bit
INT1 interrupt request bit
Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit
Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit
Timer X interrupt request bit
Timer Y interrupt request bit
Timer 2 interrupt request bit
Timer 3 interrupt request bit
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
7
0 Interrupt control register 1
(ICON1 : address 003E16)
7
0
INT0 interrupt enable bit
INT1 interrupt enable bit
Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit
Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit
Timer X interrupt enable bit
Timer Y interrupt enable bit
Timer 2 interrupt enable bit
Timer 3 interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt control register 2
(ICON2 : address 003F16)
CNTR0 interrupt enable bit
CNTR1 interrupt enable bit
Timer 1 interrupt enable bit
INT2 interrupt enable bit
INT3 interrupt enable bit
Key input interrupt enable bit
Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit
Not used (returns “0” when read)
(Do not write “1” to this bit)
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
Fig. 16 Structure of interrupt-related registers
1-20
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Key Input Interrupt (Key-on Wake Up)
A Key input interrupt request is generated by applying “L” level to
any pin of port P3 that have been set to input mode. In other
words, it is generated when AND of input level goes from “1” to “0”.
An example of using a key input interrupt is shown in Figure 9,
where an interrupt request is generated by pressing one of the
keys consisted as an active-low key matrix which inputs to ports
P20–P23.
Port PXx
"L" level output
PULL register A
Bit 2 = "1"
✽
✽✽
✽
✽✽
✽
✽✽
Port P27
direction register = "1"
Port P27
latch
Key input interrupt request
P27 output
Port P2 6
direction register = "1"
Port P26
latch
P26 output
Port P25
direction register = "1"
Port P25
latch
P25 output
✽
✽✽
✽
✽✽
✽
✽✽
✽
✽✽
Port P24
direction register = "1"
Port P24
latch
P24 output
P23 input
P22 input
P21 input
✽
P20 input
✽✽
Port P23
direction register = "0"
Port P2
Input reading circuit
Port P23
latch
Port P22
direction register = "0"
Port P22
latch
Port P21
direction register = "0"
Port P21
latch
Port P20
direction register = "0"
Port P20
latch
✽
✽✽
P-channel transistor for pull-up
CMOS output buffer
Fig. 17 Connection example when using key input interrupt and port P2 block diagram
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-21
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
TIMERS
Read and write operation on 16-bit timer must be performed for
both high and low-order bytes. When reading a 16-bit timer, read
the high-order byte first. When writing to a 16-bit timer, write the
low-order byte first. The 16-bit timer cannot perform the correct operation when reading during the write operation, or when writing
during the read operation.
The 3820 group has five timers: timer X, timer Y, timer 1, timer 2,
and timer 3. Timer X and timer Y are 16-bit timers, and timer 1,
timer 2, and timer 3 are 8-bit timers.
All timers are down count timers. When the timer reaches “0016”,
an underflow occurs at the next count pulse and the corresponding timer latch is reloaded into the timer and the count is continued. When a timer underflows, the interrupt request bit corresponding to that timer is set to “1”.
Real time port
control bit "1"
Data bus
Q D
P60 data for real time port
P60
P60 direction register
Latch
"0"
P60 latch
Real time port
control bit
"1"
Q D
P61 data for real time port
P61
P61 direction register
Real time port
control bit "0"
Latch
"0"
P61 latch
f(XIN)/16
(f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*)
P54/CNTR0
Timer X stop
control bit
Timer X operating mode bit
"00","01","11"
CNTR0 active
edge switch bit
"0"
Timer X mode register
write signal
"1"
"10"
"1"
Pulse width
measurement
CNTR0 active
mode
edge switch bit "0"
Timer X write
control bit
Timer X (low) latch (8)
Timer X (high) latch (8)
Timer X (low) (8)
Timer X (high) (8)
CNTR0
interrupt
request
Pulse output mode
QS
Timer Y operating mode bit
"00","01","10"
T
"1"
Q
P54 direction register
Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
P54 latch
P55/CNTR1
Falling edge detection
f(XIN)/16
(f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*)
Timer Y stop
control bit
"00","01","11"
Period
measurement mode
Timer Y (low) latch (8)
Timer Y (high) latch (8)
Timer Y (low) (8)
Timer Y (high) (8)
Timer Y
interrupt
request
"10"Timer Y operating
mode bit
"1"
f(XIN)/16
(f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*)
Timer 1 count source
selection bit
"0"
Timer 1 latch (8)
Timer 2 count source
selection bit
Timer 2 latch (8)
"0"
Timer 1 (8)
XCIN
"1"
CNTR1
interrupt
request
"11"
Rising edge detection
Pulse output mode
CNTR1 active
edge switch bit
"0"
Timer X
interrupt
request
Timer 2 (8)
"1"
Timer 2 write
control bit
Timer 1
interrupt
request
Timer 2
interrupt
request
f(XIN)/16
(f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*)
TOUT output
TOUT output
control bit
active edge
switch bit "0"
Q S
P56/TOUT
P56 direction register
"1"
P56 latch
T
Q
"0"
TOUT output control bit
f(XIN)/16(f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode*)
* Internal clock φ = XCIN/2.
Timer 3 latch (8)
Timer 3 (8)
"1"
Timer 3 count
source selection
bit
Fig. 18 Timer block diagram
1-22
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Timer 3
interrupt
request
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timer X
Timer X is a 16-bit timer that can be selected in one of four modes
and can be controlled the timer X write and the real time port by
setting the timer X mode register.
Timer mode
The timer counts f(XIN)/16 (or f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode).
Pulse output mode
Each time the timer underflows, a signal output from the CNTR0
pin is inverted. Except for this, the operation in pulse output mode
is the same as in timer mode. When using a timer in this mode, set
the corresponding port P54 direction register to output mode.
Event counter mode
The timer counts signals input through the CNTR0 pin.
Except for this, the operation in event counter mode is the same
as in timer mode. When using a timer in this mode, set the corresponding port P54 direction register to input mode.
Note on CNTR0 Interrupt Active Edge Selection
CNTR0 interrupt active edge depends on the CNTR0 active edge
switch bit.
Real Time Port Control
While the real time port function is valid, data for the real time port
are output from por ts P6 0 and P6 1 each time the timer X
underflows. (However, after rewriting a data for real time port, if the
real time port control bit is changed from “0” to “1”, data is output
without the timer X.) If the data for the real time port is changed
while the real time port function is valid, the changed data are output at the next underflow of timer X.
Before using this function, set the corresponding port direction
registers to output mode.
7
0
Timer X mode register
(TXM : address 0027 16)
Pulse width measurement mode
The count source is f(XIN)/16 (or f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode. If
CNTR0 active edge switch bit is “0”, the timer counts while the input signal of CNTR0 pin is at “H”. If it is “1”, the timer counts while
the input signal of CNTR0 pin is at “L”. When using a timer in this
mode, set the corresponding port P5 4 direction register to input
mode.
Timer X write control bit
0 : Write value in latch and counter
1 : Write value in latch only
Real time port control bit
0 : Real time port function invalid
1 : Real time port function valid
P60 data for real time port
0 : "L" level output
1 : "H" level output
P61 data for real time port
0 : "L" level output
1 : "H" level output
Timer X operating mode bits
b5 b4
0 0 : Timer mode
0 1 : Pulse output mode
1 0 : Event counter mode
1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode
CNTR0 active edge switch bit
• CNTR0 interrupt
0 : Falling edge active
1 : Rising edge active
• Pulse output mode
0 : Start at initial level "H" output
1 : Start at initial level "L" output
• Event counter mode
0 : Rising edge active
1 : Falling edge active
• Pulse width measurement mode
0 : Measure "H" level width
1 : Measure "L" level width
Timer X stop control bit
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
Timer X Write Control
If the timer X write control bit is “0”, when the value is written in the
address of timer X, the value is loaded in the timer X and the latch
at the same time.
If the timer X write control bit is “1”, when the value is written in the
address of timer X, the value is loaded only in the latch. The value
in the latch is loaded in timer X after timer X underflows.
If the value is written in latch only, unexpected value may be set in
the high-order counter when the writing in high-order latch and the
underflow of timer X are performed at the same timing.
Fig. 19 Structure of timer X mode register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-23
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timer Y
Timer Y is a 16-bit timer that can be selected in one of four modes.
7
Timer Y mode register
(TYM : address 0028 16)
Timer mode
The timer counts f(XIN)/16 (or f(XCIN)/16 in low-speed mode).
Not used (return "0" when read)
Timer Y operating mode bits
b5 b4
0 0 : Timer mode
0 1 : Period measurement mode
1 0 : Event counter mode
1 1 : Pulse width HL continuously
measurement mode
CNTR1 active edge switch bit
• CNTR1 interrupt
0 : Falling edge active
1 : Rising edge active
• Period measurement mode
0 : Measure falling edge to falling edge
1 : Measure rising edge to rising edge
• Event counter mode
0 : Rising edge active
1 : Falling edge active
Timer Y stop control bit
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
Period measurement mode
CNTR 1 interrupt request is generated at rising/falling edge of
CNTR1 pin input signal. Simultaneously, the value in timer Y latch
is reloaded in timer Y and timer Y continues counting down/Except
for the above-mentioned, the operation in period measurement
mode is the same as in timer mode.
The timer value just before the reloading at rising/falling of CNTR1
pin input signal is retained until the timer Y is read once after the
reload.
The rising/falling timing of CNTR 1 pin input signal is found by
CNTR1 interrupt. When using a timer in this mode, set the corresponding port P55 direction register to input mode.
Event counter mode
The timer counts signals input through the CNTR1 pin.
Except for this, the operation in event counter mode is the same
as in timer mode. When using a timer in this mode, set the corresponding port P55 direction register to input mode.
Fig. 20 Structure of timer Y mode register
Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
CNTR 1 interrupt request is generated at both rising and falling
edges of CNTR 1 pin input signal. Except for this, the operation in
pulse width HL continuously measurement mode is the same as in
period measurement mode. When using a timer in this mode, set
the corresponding port P55 direction register to input mode.
Note on CNTR1 Interrupt Active Edge Selection
CNTR1 interrupt active edge depends on the CNTR1 active edge
switch bit. However, in pulse width HL continuously measurement
mode, CNTR 1 interrupt request is generated at both rising and
falling edges of CNTR1 pin input signal regardless of the setting of
CNTR1 active edge switch bit.
1-24
0
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timer 1, Timer 2, Timer 3
Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 are 8-bit timers. The count source for
each timer can be selected by timer 123 mode register. The timer
latch value is not affected by a change of the count source. However, because changing the count source may cause an inadvertent count down of the timer. Therefore, rewrite the value of timer
whenever the count source is changed.
7
0
Timer 123 mode register
(T123M :address 0029 16)
TOUT output active edge switch bit
0 : Start at "H" output
1 : Start at "L" output
TOUT output control bit
0 : TOUT output disabled
1 : TOUT output enabled
Timer 2 write control bit
0 : Write value in latch and counter
1 : Write value in latch only
Timer 2 count source selection bit
0 : Timer 1 underflow
1 : f(XIN)/16
(Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16
(Low-speed mode)(Note)
Timer 3 count source selection bit
0 : Timer 1 underflow
1 : f(XIN)/16
(Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16
(Low-speed mode)(Note)
Timer 1 count source selection bit
0 : f(XIN)/16
(Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16
(Low-speed mode)(Note)
1 : f(XCIN)
Not used (return "0" when read)
Timer 2 Write Control
If the timer 2 write control bit is “0”, when the value is written in the
address of timer 2, the value is loaded in the timer 2 and the latch
at the same time.
If the timer 2 write control bit is “1”, when the value is written in the
address of timer 2, the value is loaded only in the latch. The value
in the latch is loaded in timer 2 after timer 2 underflows.
Timer 2 Output Control
When the timer 2 (T OUT) is output enabled, an inversion signal
from pin TOUT is output each time timer 2 underflows.
In this case, set the port P56 shared with the port TOUT to the output mode.
Note : Internal clock φ is f (XCIN)/2 in the low-speed mode.
Note on Timer 1 to Timer 3
When the count source of timer 1 to 3 is changed, the timer counting value may be changed large because a thin pulse is generated
in count input of timer . If timer 1 output is selected as the count
source of timer 2 or timer 3, when timer 1 is written, the counting
value of timer 2 or timer 3 may be changed large because a thin
pulse is generated in timer 1 output.
Therefore, set the value of timer in the order of timer 1, timer 2 and
timer 3 after the count source selection of timer 1 to 3.
Fig. 21 Structure of timer 123 mode register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-25
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
SERIAL I/O1
Clock Synchronous Serial I/O Mode
Serial I/O1 can be used as either clock synchronous or asynchronous (UART) serial I/O1. A dedicated timer (baud rate generator)
is also provided for baud rate generation.
Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode can be selected by setting
the mode selection bit of the serial I/O1 control register to “1”.
For clock synchronous serial I/O1, the transmitter and the receiver
must use the same clock. If an internal clock is used, transfer is
started by a write signal to the TB/RB (address 001816).
Data bus
Serial I/O1 control register
Address 0018 16
Receive buffer register (RB)
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)
Serial I/O receive interrupt request (RI)
Receive shift register
P44/RXD
Address 001A 16
Shift clock
Clock control circuit
P46/SCLK1
f(X
IN)
XIN
Serial I/O1 synchronization
clock selection bit
Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1)
BRG count source selection bit
Baud rate generator
Address 001C 16
1/4
P47/SRDY1
F/F
1/4
Clock control circuit
Falling-edge detector
Shift clock
P45/TXD
Transmit shift register shift completion flag (TSC)
Transmit interrupt source selection bit
Serial I/O transmit interrupt request (TI)
Transmit shift register
Transmit buffer register (TB)
Address 0018 16
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)
Serial I/O1 status register
Address 0019 16
Data bus
Fig. 22 Block diagram of clock synchronous serial I/O1
Transfer shift clock
(1/2 to 1/2048 of the internal
clock, or an external clock)
Serial output TxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Serial input RxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Receive enable signal SRDY1
Write signal to receive/transmit
buffer register (address 001816)
TBE = 0
RBF = 1
TSC = 1
Overrun error (OE)
detection
TBE = 1
TSC = 0
Notes 1 : The serial I/O1 transmit interrupt (TI) can be selected to occur either when the transmit buffer register has emptied (TBE=1)
or after the transmit shift operation has ended (TSC=1), by setting the transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC) of the
serial I/O1 control register.
2 : If data is written to the transmit buffer register when TSC=0, the transmit clock is generated continuously and serial data is
output continuously from the TxD pin.
3 : The serial I/O1 receive interrupt (RI) is set when the receive buffer full flag (RBF) becomes “1” .
Fig. 23 Operation of clock synchronous serial I/O1 function
1-26
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
ter, but the two buffers have the same address in memory. Since
the shift register cannot be written to or read from directly, transmit
data is written to the transmit buffer register, and receive data is
read from the receive buffer register.
The transmit buffer register can also hold the next data to be
transmitted, and the receive buffer register can hold a character
while the next character is being received.
Asynchronous Serial I/O1 (UART) Mode
Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 mode (UART) can be selected by
clearing the serial I/O1 mode selection bit of the serial I/O1 control
register to “0”.
Eight serial data transfer formats can be selected, and the transfer
formats used by a transmitter and receiver must be identical.
The transmit and receive shift registers each have a buffer regis-
Data bus
Address 0018 16
Serial I/O1 control register Address 001A16
Receive buffer register(RB)
OE
Character length selection bit
P44/RXD
STdetector
7 bits
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)
Serial I/O receive interrupt request (RI)
Receive shift register
1/16
8 bits
UART control register
Address 001B16
SP detector
PE FE
Clock control circuit
Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit
P46/SCLK1
f(XIN)
BRG count source selection bit Frequency division ratio 1/(n+1)
Baud rate generator
Address 001C 16
1/4
ST/SP/PA generator
Transmit shift register shift completion flag (TSC)
1/16
Transmit shift register
P45/TXD
Transmit interrupt source selection bit
Serial I/O1 status register
Character length selection bit
Transmit buffer register
Address 001816
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)
Serial I/O1 status register Address 001916
Data bus
Fig. 24 Block diagram of UART serial I/O1
Transmit or receive clock
Transmit buffer register
write signal
TBE=0
TSC=0
TBE=1
Serial output TXD
TBE=0
TSC=1✽
TBE=1
ST
D0
D1
SP
ST
D0
✽
1 start bit
7 or 8 data bits
1 or 0 parity bit
1 or 2 stop bit (s)
Receive buffer register
read signal
SP
D1
Generated at 2nd bit in 2-stop-bit mode
RBF=0
RBF=1
Serial input RXD
ST
D0
D1
SP
RBF=1
ST
D0
D1
SP
Notes 1: Error flag detection occurs at the same time that the RBF flag becomes "1" (at 1st stop bit, during reception).
2: The transmit interrupt (TI) can be selected to occur when either the TBE or TSC flag becomes "1", depending on the setting of the transmit interrupt
source selection bit (TIC) of the serial I/O1 control register.
3: The serial I/O1 receive interrupt (RI) is set when the RBF flag becomes "1".
4: After data is written to the transmit buffer register when TSC=1, 0.5 to 1.5 cycles of the data shift cycle is necessary until changing to TSC=0.
Fig. 25 Operation of UART serial I/O1 function
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-27
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Serial I/O1 Control Register (SIO1CON) 001A16
The serial I/O1 control register contains eight control bits for the
serial I/O1 function.
UART Control Register (UARTCON) 001B16
The UART control register consists of four control bits (bits 0 to 3)
which are valid when asynchronous serial I/O is selected and set
the data format of an data transfer. One bit in this register (bit 4) is
always valid and sets the output structure of the P45/TXD pin.
Serial I/O1 Status Register (SIO1STS) 001916
The read-only serial I/O1 status register consists of seven flags
(bits 0 to 6) which indicate the operating status of the serial I/O
function and various errors.
Three of the flags (bits 4 to 6) are valid only in UART mode.
The receive buffer full flag (bit 1) is cleared to “0” when the receive
buffer is read.
If there is an error, it is detected at the same time that data is
transferred from the receive shift register to the receive buffer register, and the receive buffer full flag is set. A write to the serial I/O
status register clears all the error flags OE, PE, FE, and SE (bit 3
to bit 6, respectively). Writing “0” to the serial I/O enable bit SIOE
(bit 7 of the Serial I/O Control Register) also clears all the status
flags, including the error flags.
All bits of the serial I/O1 status register are initialized to “0” at reset, but if the transmit enable bit (bit 4) of the serial I/O control register has been set to “1”, the transmit shift register shift completion
flag (bit 2) and the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0) become “1”.
Transmit Buffer/Receive Buffer Register (TB/
RB) 001816
The transmit buffer register and the receive buffer register are located at the same address. The transmit buffer register is writeonly and the receive buffer register is read-only. If a character bit
length is 7 bits, the MSB of data stored in the receive buffer register is “0”.
Baud Rate Generator (BRG) 001C16
The baud rate generator determines the baud rate for serial transfer.
The baud rate generator divides the frequency of the count source
by 1/(n + 1), where n is the value written to the baud rate generator.
1-28
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
7
0
7
Serial I/O1 status register
(SIO1STS : address 0019 16)
Transmit buffer empty flag (TBE)
0: Buffer full
1: Buffer empty
Receive buffer full flag (RBF)
0: Buffer empty
1: Buffer full
Transmit shift register shift completion flag (TSC)
0: Transmit shift in progress
1: Transmit shift completed
Parity error flag (PE)
0: No error
1: Parity error
Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (SCS)
•In clock synchronous mode
0 : BRG output/4
1 : External clock input
•In UART mode
0 : BRG output/16
1 : External clock input/16
Transmit interrupt source selection bit (TIC)
0: When transmit buffer has emptied
1: When transmit shift operation is completed
Framing error flag (FE)
0: No error
1: Framing error
Transmit enable bit (TE)
0: Transmit disabled
1: Transmit enabled
Summing error flag (SE)
0: OE U PE U FE =0
1: OE U PE U FE =1
Receive enable bit (RE)
0: Receive disabled
1: Receive enabled
Not used (returns “1” when read)
0
Serial I/O1 control register
(SIO1CON : address 001A 16)
BRG count source selection bit (CSS)
0: f(X IN)
1: f(X IN)/4
SRDY1 output enable bit (SRDY)
0: P4 7 SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47
1: P4 7 SRDY1 pin operates as signal output pin SRDY1
(SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state)
Overrun error flag (OE)
0: No error
1: Overrun error
7
0
Serial I/O1 mode selection bit (SIOM)
0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode
1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode
UART control register
(UARTCON : address 001B 16)
Character length selection bit (CHAS)
0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
Serial I/O1 enable bit (SIOE)
0: Serial I/O1 disabled
(pins P4 4–P4 7 operate as I/O pins)
1: Serial I/O1 enabled
(pins P4 4–P4 7 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Parity enable bit (PARE)
0: Parity checking disabled
1: Parity checking enabled
Parity selection bit (PARS)
0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
Stop bit length selection bit (STPS)
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit (POFF)
0: CMOS output (in output mode)
1: N-channel open-drain output (in output mode)
Not used (return“1” when read)
Fig. 26 Structure of serial I/O1 control registers
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-29
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
SERIAL I/O2
b7
b0
The serial I/O2 function can be used only for clock synchronous
serial I/O.
For clock synchronous serial I/O2 the transmitter and the receiver
must use the same clock. If the internal clock is used, transfer is
started by a write signal to the serial I/O2 register.
Serial I/O2 control register
(SIO2CON : address 001D16)
Internal synchronization clock select bits
b2 b1 b0
0 0 0: f(XIN)/8
0 0 1: f(XIN)/16
0 1 0: f(XIN)/32
0 1 1: f(XIN)/64
1 0 0: Do not set
1 0 1:
1 1 0: f(XIN)/128
1 1 1: f(XIN)/256
Serial I/O2 Control Register (SIO2CON) 001D16
The serial I/O2 control register contains 7 bits which control various serial I/O functions.
Serial I/O2 port selection bit
0: I/O port
1: SOUT2,SCLK2 signal output
SRDY2 output enable bit
0: I/O port
1: SRDY2 signal output
Transfer direction selection bit
0: LSB first
1: MSB first
Synchronization clock selection bit
0: External clock
1: Internal clock
Not used (returns “0” when read)
Fig. 27 Structure of serial I/O2 control register
1/8
Divider
1/16
XIN
Internal synchronization
clock select bits
1/32
Data bus
1/64
1/128
1/256
P53 latch
Synchronization clock
selection bit
"0"
SRDY2
"1"
Synchronization circuit
"1"
SRDY2 output enable bit
SCLK2
P53/SRDY2
"0"
External clock
P52 latch
"0"
P52/SCLK2
"1"
Serial I/O2 port selection bit
Serial I/O counter 2 (3)
P51 latch
"0"
P51/SOUT2
"1"
Serial I/O2 port selection bit
P50/SIN2
Serial I/O shift register 2 (8)
Fig. 28 Block diagram of serial I/O2 function
1-30
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Serial I/O2
interrupt request
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Transfer clock (Note 1)
Serial I/O2 register
write signal
(Note 2)
Serial I/O2 output S OUT2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Serial I/O2 input S IN2
Receive enable signal SRDY2
Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit set
Notes 1: When the internal clock is selected as the transfer clock, the divide ratio can be selected by setting bits 0 to 2 of the serial
I/O2 control register.
2: When the internal clock is selected as the transfer clock, the S OUT2 pin goes to high impedance after transfer completion.
Fig. 29 Timing of serial I/O2 function
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-31
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
the segment output enable register and the LCD display RAM, the
LCD drive control circuit starts reading the display data automatically, performs the bias control and the duty ratio control, and displays the data on the LCD panel.
LCD DRIVE CONTROL CIRCUIT
The 3820 group has the built-in Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) drive
control circuit consisting of the following.
LCD display RAM
Segment output enable register
LCD mode register
Selector
Timing controller
Common driver
Segment driver
Bias control circuit
A maximum of 40 segment output pins and 4 common output pins
can be used.
Up to 160 pixels can be controlled for LCD display. When the LCD
enable bit is set to “1” after data is set in the LCD mode register,
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7
Table 8. Maximum number of display pixels at each
duty ratio
Duty ratio
2
3
4
Maximum number of display pixel
80 dots
or 8 segment LCD 10 digits
120 dots
or 8 segment LCD 15 digits
160 dots
or 8 segment LCD 20 digits
0
Segment output enable register
(SEG : address 0038 16)
Segment output enable bit 0
0 : Input ports P30–P37
1 : Segment output SEG16–SEG23
Segment output enable bit 1
0 : I/O ports P00, P01
1 : Segment output SEG 24,SEG25
Segment output enable bit 2
0 : I/O ports P02–P07
1 : Segment output SEG26–SEG31
Segment output enable bit 3
0 : I/O ports P10,P11
1 : Segment output SEG32,SEG33
Segment output enable bit 4
0 : I/O port P12
1 : Segment output SEG34
Segment output enable bit 5
0 : I/O ports P13–P17
1 : Segment output SEG35–SEG39
Not used (return "0" when read)
(Do not write "1" to this bit)
7
0
LCD mode register
(LM : address 0039 16)
Duty ratio selection bits
0 0 : Not available
0 1 : 2 (use COM 0,COM1)
1 0 : 3 (use COM 0–COM2)
1 1 : 4 (use COM 0–COM3)
Bias control bit
0 : 1/3 bias
1 : 1/2 bias
LCD enable bit
0 : LCD OFF
1 : LCD ON
Not used (returns "0" when read)
(Do not write "1" to this bit)
LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits
0 0 : LCDCK count source
0 1 : 2 division of LCDCK count source
1 0 : 4 division of LCDCK count source
1 1 : 8 division of LCDCK count source
LCDCK count source selection bit (Note)
0 : f(XCIN)/32
1 : f(XIN)/8192
Note : LCDCK is a clock for a LCD timing controller.
Fig. 30 Structure of segment output enable register and LCD mode register
1-32
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Selector
Selector
Selector
Address 004116
SEG0
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
Segment Segment Segment Segment
driver
driver
driver
driver
Selector
Address 004016
Data bus
P30/SEG16
Selector
Bias control bit
VSS VL1 VL2 VL3
Bias control
LCD display RAM
P16/SEG38 P17/SEG39
Segment Segment
driver
driver
Selector
Address 005316
2
COM0 COM1 COM2 COM3
Common Common Common Common
driver
driver
driver
driver
Timing controller
2
LCD circuit
divider division
ratio selection bits
Duty ratio selection bits
LCD enable bit
LCDCK
1/32
LCD
divider
“0”
f(XCIN)
LCDCK count source
selection bit
“1”
f(XIN)/ 256
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Fig. 31 Block diagram of LCD controller/driver
1-33
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Bias Control and Applied Voltage to LCD
Power Input Pins
To the LCD power input pins (VL1–VL3), apply the voltage shown in
Table 3 according to the bias value.
Select a bias value by the bias control bit (bit 2 of the LCD mode
register).
Table 9. Bias control and applied voltage to VL1–VL3
Bias value
VL3=VLCD
VL2=2/3 VLCD
VL1=1/3 VLCD
VL3=VLCD
VL2=VL1=1/2 VLCD
1/3 bias
1/2 bias
Common Pin and Duty Ratio Control
The common pins (COM 0–COM3) to be used are determined by
duty ratio.
Select duty ratio by the duty ratio selection bits (bits 0 and 1 of the
LCD mode register).
Voltage value
Note 1 : VLCD is the maximum value of supplied voltage for the
LCD panel.
Table 10. Duty ratio control and common pins used
Duty
ratio
Duty ratio selection bit
2
Bit 1
0
Bit 0
1
3
4
1
1
0
1
Common pins used
COM0, COM1 (Note 1)
COM0–COM2 (Note 2)
COM0–COM3
Notes 1 : COM2 and COM3 are open
2 : COM3 is open
Contrast control
Contrast control
VL3
VL3
R1
R4
VL2
VL2
R2
VL1
VL1
R5
R3
1/3 bias
R1 = R2 = R3
1/2 bias
Fig. 32 Example of circuit at each bias
1-34
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
R4 = R5
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
LCD Display RAM
LCD Drive Timing
Address 004016 to 005316 is the designated RAM for the LCD display. When “1” are written to these addresses, the corresponding
segments of the LCD display panel are turned on.
The LCDCK timing frequency (LCD drive timing) is generated internally and the frame frequency can be determined with the following equation;
f(LCDCK)=
(frequency of count source for LCDCK)
(divider division ratio for LCD)
Frame frequency=
f(LCDCK)
duty ratio
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Address
COM 3 COM 2 COM 1 COM 0 COM 3 COM 2 COM 1 COM 0
004016
004116
004216
004316
004416
004516
004616
004716
004816
004916
004A16
004B16
004C16
004D16
004E16
004F16
005016
005116
005216
005316
SEG1
SEG3
SEG5
SEG7
SEG9
SEG11
SEG13
SEG15
SEG17
SEG19
SEG21
SEG23
SEG25
SEG27
SEG29
SEG31
SEG33
SEG35
SEG37
SEG39
SEG0
SEG2
SEG4
SEG6
SEG8
SEG10
SEG12
SEG14
SEG16
SEG18
SEG20
SEG22
SEG24
SEG26
SEG28
SEG30
SEG32
SEG34
SEG36
SEG38
Fig. 33 LCD display RAM map
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-35
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Internal logic
LCDCK timing
1/4 duty
Voltage level
VL3
VL2=VL1
VSS
COM0
COM1
COM2
COM3
VL3
VSS
SEG0
OFF
COM3
ON
COM2
COM1
OFF
COM0
COM3
ON
COM2
COM1
COM0
1/3 duty
VL3
VL2=VL1
VSS
COM0
COM1
COM2
VL3
VSS
SEG0
ON
OFF
COM0
COM2
ON
COM1
OFF
COM0
COM2
ON
COM1
OFF
COM0
COM2
1/2 duty
VL3
VL2=VL1
VSS
COM0
COM1
VL3
VSS
SEG0
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
COM1
COM0
COM1
COM0
COM1
COM0
COM1
COM0
Fig. 34 LCD drive waveform (1/2 bias)
1-36
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Internal logic
LCDCK timing
1/4 duty
Voltage level
VL3
VL2
VL1
VSS
COM0
COM1
COM2
COM3
VL3
SEG0
VSS
OFF
COM3
ON
COM2
COM1
OFF
COM0
COM3
ON
COM2
COM1
COM0
1/3 duty
VL3
VL2
VL1
VSS
COM0
COM1
COM2
VL3
SEG0
VSS
ON
OFF
COM0
COM2
ON
COM1
OFF
COM0
COM2
ON
COM1
OFF
COM0
COM2
1/2 duty
VL3
VL2
VL1
VSS
COM0
COM1
VL3
SEG0
VSS
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
COM1
COM0
COM1
COM0
COM1
COM0
COM1
COM0
Fig. 35 LCD drive waveform (1/3 bias)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-37
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
WATCHDOG TIMER
The watchdog timer gives a mean of returning to the reset status
when a program cannot run on a normal loop (for example, because of a software run-away).
The watchdog timer consists of an 8-bit watchdog timer L and a 6bit watchdog timer H.
Initial Value of Watchdog Timer
At reset or when writing data into the watchdog timer control register, the watchdog timer H is set to “3F16” and the watchdog timer
L is set to “FF16”. As a write instruction, it is possible to use any instruction that can cause a write signal such as STA, LDM and
CLB. Write data except bit 7 has no significance and the above
value is set independently.
Watchdog Timer Operation
The watchdog timer stops at reset and starts a countdown by writing to the watchdog timer control register. When the watchdog
timer H underflows, an internal reset occurs, and the reset status
is released after waiting the reset release time.
Then the program executes from the reset vector address.
Usually, a program is designed so that data can be written into the
watchdog timer control register before the watchdog timer H
underflows. If data is not written once into the watchdog timer control register, the watchdog timer does not function.
At execution of the STP instruction, both clock and watchdog timer
stops. At the same time that the stop mode is released, the watchdog timer restarts a count (Note). On the other hand, at execution
of the WIT instruction, the watchdog timer does not stop.
The time from execution of writing to the watchdog timer control
register until an underflow of the watchdog timer register H is as
follows: (When bit 7 of the watchdog timer control register is “0”)
Middle / High-speed mode (f(XIN)=8 MHz) .................. 32.768 ms
Low-speed mode (f(XCIN)=32 kHz) ..................................... 8.19 s
Note: During the stop release wait time [XIN (or XCIN) : about 8200
clock cycles], the watchdog timer counts.
Accordingly, does not underflow the watchdog timer H.
•
•
When writing to
watchdog timer
control register
XCIN
Data bus
When writing to
watchdog timer control
register
set “3F16”
set “FF16”
Internal system “1”
clock selection bit
(Note)
Watchdog timer L (8)
1/16
“0”
“1”
Watchdog timer H (6)
Watchdog timer H
count source selection bit
“0”
XIN
Undefined instruction
Reset
Reset circuit
RESET
Internal reset
Reset release wait time (about 8200 X IN clock cycles)
Note: This bit is bit 7 of CPU mode register. It selects the mode (middle/high-speed or low-speed)
Fig. 36 Watchdog timer block diagram
7
0
Watchdog timer control register
(WDTCON : address 0037 16)
Watchdog timer H bits (read only)
Not used (returns “1” when read)
Watchdog timer H count source selection bit
0 : Underflow from watchdog timer L
1 : f(XIN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16
Fig. 37 Structure of watchdog timer control register
1-38
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
φ CLOCK OUTPUT FUNCTION
The internal system clock φ can be output from port P41 by setting
the φ output control register. Set bit 1 of the port P4 direction register to when outputting φ clock.
7
0
φ output control register
(CKOUT : address 002A 16)
φ output control bit
0 : Port function
1 : φ clock output
Not used (return “0” when read)
Fig. 38 Structure of φ output control register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-39
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
RESET CIRCUIT
To reset the microcomputer, RESET pin should be held at an “L”
level for 2 µs or more. Then the RESET pin is returned to an “H”
level (the power source voltage should be between 2.5 V and
5.5 V, and the oscillation should be stable), reset is released. In order to give the XIN clock time to stabilize, internal operation does
not begin until after 8200 XIN clock cycles (timer 1 and timer 2 are
connected together and 512 cycles of f(XIN)/16) are complete. After the reset is completed, the program starts from the address
contained in address FFFD 16 (high-order byte) and address
FFFC16 (low-order byte).
Make sure that the reset input voltage is less than 0.5 V for VCC of
2.5 V (Extended operating temperature version: the reset input
voltage is less than 0.6V for VCC of 3.0V).
Power on
RESET
VCC
Power source
voltage
0.2VCC
Note. Reset release voltage : VCC = 2.5V
(Extended operating temperature version : 3.0V)
RESET
Register contents
(000116) • • •
0016
( 2 ) Port P1 direction register
(000316) • • •
0016
( 3 ) Port P2 direction register
(000516) • • •
0016
( 4 ) Port P4 direction register
(000916) • • •
0016
( 5 ) Port P5 direction register
(000B16) • • •
0016
( 6 ) Port P6 direction register
(000D16) • • •
0016
( 7 ) Port P7 direction register
(000F16) • • •
0016
( 8 ) PULL register A
(001616) • • • 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
( 9 ) PULL register B
(001716) • • •
(10) Serial I/O1 status register
(001916) • • • 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(11) Serial I/O1 control register
(001A16) • • •
(12) UART control register
(001B16) • • • 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
(13) Serial I/O2 control register
(001D16) • • •
0016
(14) Timer X (low-order)
(002016) • • •
FF16
(15) Timer X (high-order)
(002116) • • •
FF16
(16) Timer Y (low-order)
(002216) • • •
FF16
(17) Timer Y (high-order)
(002316) • • •
FF16
(18) Timer 1
(002416) • • •
FF16
(19) Timer 2
(002516) • • •
0116
(20) Timer 3
(002616) • • •
FF16
(21) Timer X mode register
(002716) • • •
0016
(22) Timer Y mode register
(002816) • • •
0016
(23) Timer 123 mode register
(002916) • • •
0016
(24) φ output control register
(002A16) • • •
0016
(25) Watchdog timer control register
(003716) • • • 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(26) Segment output enable register
(003816) • • •
0016
(27) LCD mode register
(003916) • • •
0016
(28) Interrupt edge selection register
(003A16) • • •
0016
(29) CPU mode register
(003B16) • • • 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
(30) Interrupt request register 1
(003C16) • • •
0016
(31) Interrupt request register 2
(003D16) • • •
0016
(32) Interrupt control register 1
(003E16) • • •
0016
(33) Interrupt control register 2
(003F16) • • •
0016
0016
0016
(Note)
0V
Reset input
voltage
0V
Address
( 1 ) Port P0 direction register
VCC
Power source voltage
detection circuit
Fig. 39 Example of reset circuit
(34) Processor status register
(35) Program counter
(PS) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 1 ✕ ✕
(PCH) Contents of address FFFD 16
(PCL) Contents of address FFFC 16
Note. ✕ : Undefined
The contents of all other registers and RAM are undefined
at poweron reset, so they must be initialized by software.
Fig. 40 Internal state of microcomputer immediately after reset
1-40
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
XIN
φ
RESET
Internal reset
Address
Reset address from
vector table
?
?
?
?
FFFC
Data
FFFD
ADL
ADH, ADL
ADH
SYNC
XIN : about 8200
clock cycles
Notes 1 : X IN and φ are in the relation : f(XIN) = 8 • f(φ)
Notes 2 : A question mark (?) indicates an undefined status that depens on the previous status.
Fig. 41 Reset sequence
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-41
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
CLOCK GENERATING CIRCUIT
Oscillation Control
The 3820 group has two built-in oscillation circuits. An oscillation
circuit can be formed by connecting a resonator between X IN and
XOUT (XCIN and XCOUT). Use the circuit constants in accordance
with the resonator manufacturer's recommended values. No external resistor is needed between XIN and XOUT since a feed-back resistor exists on-chip. However, an external feed-back resistor is
needed between XCIN and XCOUT.
To supply a clock signal externally, input it to the XIN pin and make
the X OUT pin open. The sub-clock XCIN-XCOUT oscillation circuit
cannot directly input clocks that are externally generated. Accordingly, be sure to cause an external resonator to oscillate.
Immediately after poweron, only the X IN oscillation circuit starts
oscillating, and X CIN and X COUT pins function as I/O ports. The
pull-up resistor of X CIN and XCOUT pins must be made invalid to
use the sub-clock.
Stop mode
If the STP instruction is executed, the internal clock φ stops at an
“H” level, and XIN and XCIN oscillators stop. Timer 1 is set to “FF16”
and timer 2 is set to “0116”.
Either X IN or X CIN divided by 16 is input to timer 1 as count
source, and the output of timer 1 is connected to timer 2.
The bits of the timer 123 mode register except bit 4 are cleared to
“0”. Set the timer 1 and timer 2 interrupt enable bits to disabled
(“0”) before executing the STP instruction.
Oscillator restarts at reset or when an external interrupt is received, but the internal clock φ is not supplied to the CPU until
timer 2 underflows. This allows time for the clock circuit oscillation
to stabilize.
Frequency Control
Middle-speed mode
The internal clock φ is the frequency of XIN divided by 8.
After reset, this mode is selected.
Wait mode
If the WIT instruction is executed, the internal clock φ stops at an
“H” level. The states of XIN and XCIN are the same as the state before the executing the WIT instruction. The internal clock restarts
at reset or when an interrupt is received. Since the oscillator does
not stop, normal operation can be started immediately after the
clock is restarted.
High-speed mode
The internal clock φ is half the frequency of XIN.
Low-speed mode
The internal clock φ is half the frequency of XCIN.
A low-power consumption operation can be realized by stopping
the main clock XIN in this mode. To stop the main clock, set bit 5
of the CPU mode register to “1”.
When the main clock XIN is restarted, set enough time for oscillation to stabilize by programming.
Note: If you switch the mode between middle/high-speed and lowspeed, stabilize both X IN and XCIN oscillations. The sufficient time is required for the sub-clock to stabilize, especially immediately after poweron and at returning from stop
mode. When switching the mode between middle/highspeed and low-speed, set the frequency on condition that
f(XIN)>3f(XCIN).
•
•
XCIN
XCOUT
Rf
XIN
Rd
CCOUT
CCIN
XOUT
CIN
Fig. 42 Ceramic resonator circuit
XCIN
Rf
CCIN
XCOUT
XIN
CCOUT
External oscillation
circuit
VSS
Fig. 43 External clock input circuit
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
XOUT
Open
Rd
VCC
1-42
COUT
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
XCOUT
XCIN
"0"
"1"
Port XC switch bit
XIN
XOUT
Timer 1 count
source selection
bit
Internal system clock selection bit
(Note 1)
"1"
Low-speed mode
1/2
Timer 2 count
source selection
bit
1/4
1/2
Middle/High-speed mode
Timer 1
"0"
Timer 2
"0"
"1"
Main clock division ratio selection bit
Middle-speed mode
Timing φ
(Internal system clock)
High-speed mode
or Low-speed mode
Main clock stop bit
Q
S
R
S
STP instruction
WIT
instruction
Q
Q S
R
R
STP instruction
Reset
Interrupt disable flag I
Interrupt request
Note : When using the low-speed mode, set the port XC switch bit to "1" .
Fig. 44 Clock generating circuit block diagram
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-43
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Reset
4
"1
"
"1
6
"
M
0"
M
"
"0
C
CM 4
"1"
C
"0
"
4
CM
6
"
"1 CM
"
"1
High-speed mode (f(φ) =4MHz)
CM7=0(8MHz selected)
CM6=0(High-speed)
CM5=0(8MHz oscillating)
CM4=0(32kHz stopped)
"0"
"0"
"0"
CM7=0(8MHz selected)
CM6=1(Middle-speed)
CM5=0(8MHz oscillating)
CM4=0(32kHz stopped)
"
"0
"
Middle-speed mode (f(φ) =1 MHz)
CM 6
"1"
"0"
CM 6
"1"
"0"
High-speed mode (f(φ) =4MHz)
CM7=0(8MHz selected)
CM6=0(High-speed)
CM5=0(8MHz oscillating)
CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
CM 7
"1"
CM 7
"1"
"0"
"0"
CM7=0(8MHz selected)
CM6=1(Middle-speed)
CM5=0(8MHz oscillating)
CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
"0
"
6
"1
"
"0
"
"1
Low-speed mode (f( φ) =16 kHz)
"0"
5
"1
M
"
"0
M
"
C
CM
6
"
"1 CM
CM7=1(32kHz selected)
CM6=0(High-speed)
CM5=0(8MHz oscillating)
CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
"0
"
5
CM 5
"1"
Low-speed mode (f(φ) =16 kHz)
C
"0"
CM7=1(32kHz selected)
CM6=1(Middle-speed)
CM5=0(8MHz oscillating)
CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
CM 5
"1"
Low-speed mode (f( φ) =16 kHz)
CM7=1(32kHz selected)
CM6=1(Middle-speed)
CM5=1(8MHz stopped)
CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
CM 4
"1"
CM 6
"1"
Middle-speed mode (f(φ) =1 MHz)
"
CM 6
"1"
Low-speed mode (f(φ) =16 kHz)
"0"
CM7=1(32kHz selected)
CM6=0(High-speed)
CM5=1(8MHz stopped)
CM4=1(32kHz oscillating)
7
4
CPU mode register
(CPUM : address 003B 16)
CM4 : Port Xc switch bit
0: I/O port
1: X CIN, XCOUT
CM5 : Main clock (X IN–XOUT) stop bit
0: Oscillating
1: Stopped
CM6: Main clock division ratio selection bit
0: f(X IN)/2 (high-speed mode)
1: f(X IN)/8 (middle-speed mode)
CM7: Internal system clock selection bit
0: X IN–XOUT selected
(middle-/high-speed mode)
1: X CIN–XCOUT selected
(low-speed mode)
Note 1:Switch the mode by the allows shown between the mode blocks. (Do not switch between the mode directly without an allow.)
2:The all modes can be switched to the stop mode or the wait mode and returned to the source mode when the stop mode or the wait
mode is released.
3:Timer and LCD operate in the wait mode.
4:In middle-/high-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 1 ms occurs automatically by timer 1 and
timer 2.
5:In low-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 0.25 s occurs automatically by timer 1 and timer 2.
6:Wait until oscillation stabilizes after oscillating the main clock XIN before the switching from the low-speed mode to middle-/highspeed mode.
7:The example assumes that 8 MHz is being applied to the XIN pin and 32 kHz to the XCIN pin. φ indicates the internal clock.
Fig. 45 State transitions of internal clock φ
1-44
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
NOTES ON PROGRAMMING
Processor Status Register
Serial I/O
The contents of the processor status register (PS) after a reset are
undefined, except for the interrupt disable flag (I) which is “1”. After a reset, initialize flags which affect program execution.
In particular, it is essential to initialize the index X mode (T) and
the decimal mode (D) flags because of their effect on calculations.
In clock synchronous serial I/O, if the receive side is using an external clock and it is to output the SRDY signal, set the transmit enable bit, the receive enable bit, and the SRDY output enable bit to
“1”.
Serial I/O1 continues to output the final bit from the TXD pin after
transmission is completed. The SOUT2 pin from serial I/O2 goes to
high impedance after transmission is completed.
Interrupt
The contents of the interrupt request bits do not change immediately after they have been written. After writing to an interrupt request register, execute at least one instruction before performing a
BBC or BBS instruction.
Decimal Calculations
To calculate in decimal notation, set the decimal mode flag (D) to
“1”, then execute an ADC or SBC instruction. Only the ADC and
SBC instructions yield proper decimal results. After executing an
ADC or SBC instruction, execute at least one instruction before
executing a SEC, CLC, or CLD instruction.
Instruction Execution Time
The instruction execution time is obtained by multiplying the frequency of the internal clock φ by the number of cycles needed to
execute an instruction.
The number of cycles required to execute an instruction is shown
in the list of machine instructions.
The frequency of the internal clock φ is half of the XIN frequency.
In decimal mode, the values of the negative (N), overflow (V), and
zero (Z) flags are invalid.
The carry flag can be used to indicate whether a carry or borrow
has occurred. Initialize the carry flag before each calculation.
Clear the carry flag before an ADC and set the flag before an
SBC.
Timers
If a value n (between 0 and 255) is written to a timer latch, the frequency division ratio is 1/(n + 1).
Multiplication and Division Instructions
The index mode (T) and the decimal mode (D) flags do not affect
the MUL and DIV instruction.
The execution of these instructions does not change the contents
of the processor status register.
Ports
The contents of the port direction registers cannot be read.
The following cannot be used:
• The data transfer instruction (LDA, etc.)
• The operation instruction when the index X mode flag (T) is “1”
• The addressing mode which uses the value of a direction register as an index
• The bit-test instruction (BBC or BBS, etc.) to a direction register
• The read-modify-write instruction (ROR, CLB, or SEB, etc.) to a
direction register
Use instructions such as LDM and STA, etc., to set the port direction registers.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-45
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
DATA REQUIRED FOR MASK ORDERS
ROM PROGRAMMING METHOD
The following are necessary when ordering a mask ROM production:
1. Mask ROM Order Confirmation Form
2. Mark Specification Form
3. Data to be written to ROM, in EPROM form (three identical
copies)
The built-in PROM of the blank One Time PROM version and builtin EPROM version can be read or programmed with a generalpurpose PROM programmer using a special programming
adapter. Set the address of PROM programmer in the user ROM
area.
Table 11. Programming adapter
Package
Name of Programming Adapter
80P6N-A
PCA4738F-80A
80P6S-A
PCA4738G-80
80P6D-A
PCA4738H-80
80D0
PCA4738L-80A
The PROM of the blank One Time PROM version is not tested or
screened in the assembly process and following processes. To ensure proper operation after programming, the procedure shown in
Figure 46 is recommended to verify programming.
Programming with PROM
programmer
Screening (Caution)
(150°C for 40 hours)
Verification with
PROM programmer
Functional check in
target device
Caution : The screening temperature is far higher
than the storage temperature. Never
expose to 150 °C exceeding 100 hours.
Fig. 46 Programming and testing of One Time PROM version
1-46
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Absolute maximum ratings
Table 12 Absolute maximum ratings
Symbol
VI
VI
VI
VI
Parameter
Power source voltage
Input voltage P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27,
P30–P37, P40–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71
Input voltage VL1
Input voltage VL2
Input voltage VL3
Input voltage RESET, XIN
VO
Output voltage P00–P07, P10–P17
VO
Output voltage P30–P37
Output voltage P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71
Output voltage SEG0–SEG15
Output voltage XOUT
Power dissipation
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
VCC
VI
VO
VO
VO
Pd
Topr
Tstg
Conditions
Ratings
All voltages are based on VSS.
Output transistors are cut off.
At output port
At segment output
At segment output
Ta = 25 °C
–0.3 to 7.0
Unit
V
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
–0.3 to VL2
VL1 to VL3
VL2 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VL3 +0.3
–0.3 to VL3 +0.3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
–0.3 to VL3 +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
300
–20 to 85
–40 to 125
V
V
mW
°C
°C
Recommended operating conditions
Table 13 Recommended operating conditions (1) (VCC = 2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
VCC
Power source voltage
VSS
Power source voltage
“H” input voltage
VIH
VIH
“H” input voltage
VIH
VIH
“H” input voltage
“H” input voltage
“L” input voltage
VIL
VIL
“L” input voltage
VIL
VIL
“L” input voltage
“L” input voltage
High-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz
Middle-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz
Low-speed mode
P00–P07,
P53, P56,
P20–P27,
P60
RESET
XIN
P00–P07,
P51, P53,
P20–P27,
P60
RESET
XIN
P10–P17, P30–P37, P41, P45, P47, P51,
P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0)
P42–P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57,
P10–P17, P30–P37, P40, P41, P45, P47,
P56, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0)
P42–P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57,
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Min.
4.0
2.5
2.5
Limits
Typ.
5.0
5.0
5.0
0
Max.
5.5
5.5
5.5
Unit
V
V
0.7 VCC
VCC
V
0.8 VCC
VCC
V
0.8 VCC
0.8 VCC
VCC
VCC
V
V
0
0.3 VCC
V
0
0.2 VCC
V
0
0
0.2 VCC
0.2 VCC
V
V
1-47
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 14 Recommended operating conditions (2) (VCC = 2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
ΣIOH(peak)
ΣIOH(peak)
ΣIOL(peak)
ΣIOL(peak)
ΣIOH(avg)
ΣIOH(avg)
ΣIOL(avg)
ΣIOL(avg)
IOH(peak)
IOL(peak)
IOL(peak)
Parameter
“H” total peak output current
“H” total peak output current
“L” total peak output current
“L” total peak output current
“H” total average output current
“H” total average output current
“L” total average output current
“L” total average output current
“H” peak output current
“L” peak output current
“L” peak output current
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 2)
P00–P07, P10–P17 (Note 2)
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71
(Note 2)
P00–P07, P10–P17 (Note 3)
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71
(Note 3)
P00–P07, P10–P17 (Note 3)
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71
(Note 3)
IOH(avg)
IOH(avg)
“H” average output current
“H” average output current
IOL(avg)
IOL(avg)
“L” average output current
“L” average output current
f(CNTR0)
f(CNTR1)
Clock input frequency
for timers X and Y
(duty cycle 50 %)
f(XIN)
Main clock input oscillation
frequency (Note 4)
f(XCIN)
Sub-clock input oscillation frequency (Note 4, 5)
4.0 V ≤ VCC ≤ 5.5 V
VCC ≤ 4.0 V
High-speed mode (4.0 V ≤ VCC ≤ 5.5 V)
High-speed mode (VCC ≤ 4.0 V)
Middle-speed mode
Limits
Min.
Typ.
Max.
–40
–40
40
40
–20
–20
20
20
Unit
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
–5
mA
5
mA
10
mA
–1.0
mA
–2.5
mA
2.5
mA
5.0
mA
4.0
MHz
(2XVCC)–4 MHz
8.0
MHz
(4XVCC)–8 MHz
MHz
8.0
kHz
50
32.768
Note 1: The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents.
2: The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port.
3: The average output current is an average value measured over 100 ms.
4: When the oscillation frequency has a duty cycle of 50 %.
5: When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, make sure that the sub-clock input oscillation frequency f(XCIN) is less than
f(XIN)/3.
1-48
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Electrical characteristics
Table 15 Electrical characteristics (1) (VCC =4.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
VOH
VOH
VOL
VOL
VT+ – VT–
VT+ – VT–
VT+ – VT–
IIH
IIH
IIH
IIH
IIL
IIL
IIL
IIL
VRAM
Parameter
Test conditions
“H” output voltage P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37
“H” output voltage P20–P27, P41–P47,P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
“L” output voltage P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37
“L” output voltage P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
“H” input current
“H” input current
“H” input current
“H” input current
“L” input current
“L” input current
CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0–INT3, P20–P27
RXD, SCLK1, SIN2, SCLK2
RESET
P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37
P20–P27, P40–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71
RESET
XIN
P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37,
P40, P70
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P71
“L” input current
RESET
“L” input current
XIN
RAM hold voltage
IOH = –0.1 mA
IOH = –25 µA
VCC = 2.5 V
IOH = –5 mA
IOH = –1.25 mA
IOH = –1.25 mA
VCC = 2.5 V
IOL = 5 mA
IOL = 1.25 mA
IOL = 1.25 mA
VCC = 2.5 V
IOL = 10 mA
IOL = 2.5 mA
IOL = 2.5 mA
VCC = 2.5 V
RESET: VCC=2.5 V to 5.5 V
VI = VCC
Pull-downs “off”
VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VCC
Pull-downs “on”
VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VCC
Pull-downs “on”
Min.
VCC–2.0
Limits
Typ.
Unit
V
VCC–1.0
V
VCC–2.0
VCC–0.5
V
V
VCC–1.0
V
2.0
0.5
V
V
1.0
V
2.0
0.5
V
1.0
V
0.5
0.5
0.5
V
V
V
V
5.0
µA
30
70
140
µA
6.0
25
45
µA
5.0
µA
5.0
µA
µA
–5.0
µA
–5.0
µA
VI = VCC
VI = VCC
VI = VCC
VI = VSS
Pull-ups “off”
VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VSS
Pull-ups “on”
VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VSS
Pull-ups “on”
VI = VSS
VI = VSS
When clock is stopped
Max.
4.0
–30
–70
–140
µA
–6
–25
–45
µA
–5.0
µA
µA
V
–4.0
2.0
5.5
Note 1: When “1” is set to port XC switch bit (bit 4 of address 003B16) of CPU mode register, the drive ability of port P70 is different from the
value above mentioned.
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-49
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 16 Electrical characteristics (2) (VCC =2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
ICC
Parameter
Power source current
Test conditions
• High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V
f(XIN) = 8 MHz
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V
f(XIN) = 8 MHz (in WIT state)
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 5V, Ta ≤ 55°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 5 V, Ta = 25°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state)
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 3 V, Ta ≤ 55°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 3V, Ta = 25°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state)
Output transistors “off”
All oscillation stopped
(in STP state)
Output transistors “off”
1-50
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Ta = 25 °C
Ta = 85 °C
Min.
Limits
Typ.
Max.
6.4
13
mA
1.6
3.2
mA
25
36
µA
7.0
14.0
µA
15
22
µA
4.5
9.0
µA
0.1
1.0
10
µA
Unit
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timing requirements 1
Table 17 Timing requirements 1 (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
tw(RESET)
tc(XIN)
twH(XIN)
twL(XIN)
tc(CNTR)
twH(CNTR)
twL(CNTR)
twH(INT)
twL(INT)
tc(SCLK1)
twH(SCLK1)
twL(SCLK1)
tsu(RXD–SCLK1)
th(SCLK1–RXD)
tc(SCLK2)
twH(SCLK2)
twL(SCLK2)
tsu(SIN2–SCLK2)
th(SCLK2–SIN2)
Parameter
Reset input “L” pulse width
Main clock input cycle time (XIN input)
Main clock input “H” pulse width
Main clock input “L” pulse width
CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “H” pulse width
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “L” pulse width
INT0 to INT3 input “H” pulse width
INT0 to INT3 input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “H” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “L” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 input set up time
Serial I/O1 input hold time
Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time
Serial I/O2 clock input “H” pulse width
Serial I/O2 clock input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O2 input set up time
Serial I/O2 input hold time
Min.
2
125
45
40
250
105
105
80
80
800
370
370
220
100
1000
400
400
200
200
Limits
Typ.
Max.
Unit
µs
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “1” (clock synchronous).
Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “0” (UART).
Timing requirements 2
Table 18 Timing requirements 2 (VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
tw(RESET)
tc(XIN)
twH(XIN)
twL(XIN)
Reset input “L” pulse width
Main clock input cycle time (XIN input)
Main clock input “H” pulse width
Main clock input “L” pulse width
tc(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time
twH(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “H” pulse width
twL(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “L” pulse width
twH(INT)
twL(INT)
tc(SCLK1)
twH(SCLK1)
twL(SCLK1)
tsu(RXD–SCLK1)
th(SCLK1–RXD)
tc(SCLK2)
twH(SCLK2)
twL(SCLK2)
tsu(SIN2–SCLK2)
th(SCLK2–SIN2)
INT0 to INT3 input “H” pulse width
INT0 to INT3 input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “H” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “L” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 input set up time
Serial I/O1 input hold time
Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time
Serial I/O2 clock input “H” pulse width
Serial I/O2 clock input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O2 input set up time
Serial I/O2 input hold time
Min.
2
125
45
40
500/
(VCC–2)
Limits
Typ.
Max.
Unit
µs
ns
ns
ns
ns
250/
(VCC–2)–20
250/
(VCC–2)–20
ns
230
230
2000
950
950
400
200
2000
950
950
400
300
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “1” (clock synchronous).
Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “0” (UART).
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-51
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Switching characteristics 1
Table 19 Switching characteristics 1 (VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
twH(SCLK1)
twL(SCLK1)
td(SCLK1–TXD)
tv(SCLK1–TXD)
tr(SCLK1)
tf(SCLK1)
twH(SCLK2)
twL(SCLK2)
td(SCLK2–SOUT2)
tv(SCLK2–SOUT2)
tf(SCLK2)
tr(CMOS)
tf(CMOS)
Parameter
Serial I/O1 clock output “H” pulse width
Serial I/O1 clock output “L” pulse width
Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1)
Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1)
Serial I/O1 clock output rising time
Serial I/O1 clock output falling time
Serial I/O2 clock output “H” pulse width
Serial I/O2 clock output “L” pulse width
Serial I/O2 output delay time
Serial I/O2 output valid time
Serial I/O2 clock output falling time
CMOS output rising time (Note 2)
CMOS output falling time (Note 2)
Limits
Min.
Typ.
Max.
tc(SCLK1)/2–30
tc(SCLK1)/2–30
140
–30
30
30
tc(SCLK2)/2–160
tc(SCLK2)/2–160
0.2✕tC(SCLK2)
0
10
10
40
30
30
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is “0”.
2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
Switching characteristics 2
Table 20 Switching characteristics 2 (VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
twH(SCLK1)
twL(SCLK1)
td(SCLK1–TXD)
tv(SCLK1–TXD)
tr(SCLK1)
tf(SCLK1)
twH(SCLK2)
twL(SCLK2)
td(SCLK2–SOUT2)
tv(SCLK2–SOUT2)
tf(SCLK2)
tr(CMOS)
tf(CMOS)
Parameter
Serial I/O1 clock output “H” pulse width
Serial I/O1 clock output “L” pulse width
Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1)
Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1)
Serial I/O1 clock output rising time
Serial I/O1 clock output falling time
Serial I/O2 clock output “H” pulse width
Serial I/O2 clock output “L” pulse width
Serial I/O2 output delay time
Serial I/O2 output valid time
Serial I/O2 clock output falling time
CMOS output rising time (Note 2)
CMOS output falling time (Note 2)
Min.
tc(SCLK1)/2–50
tc(SCLK1)/2–50
Limits
Typ.
350
–30
50
50
tc(SCLK2)/2–240
tc(SCLK2)/2–240
0.2✕tC(SCLK2)
0
20
20
Note1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is “0”.
2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
1-52
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Max.
50
50
50
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Absolute maximum ratings (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 21 Absolute maximum ratings (Extended operating temperature version)
Symbol
VCC
Parameter
Conditions
VI
VI
VI
VI
Power source voltage
Input voltage P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27,
P30–P37, P40–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71
Input voltage VL1
Input voltage VL2
Input voltage VL3
Input voltage RESET, XIN
VO
Output voltage P00–P07, P10–P17
VO
Output voltage P30–P37
Output voltage P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71
Output voltage SEG0–SEG15
Output voltage XOUT
Power dissipation
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
VI
VO
VO
VO
Pd
Topr
Tstg
Ratings
All voltages are based on VSS.
Output transistors are cut off.
At output port
At segment output
At segment output
Ta = 25 °C
–0.3 to 7.0
Unit
V
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
–0.3 to VL2
VL1 to VL3
VL2 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VL3 +0.3
–0.3 to VL3 +0.3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
–0.3 to VL3 +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
300
–40 to 85
–65 to 150
V
V
mW
°C
°C
Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 22 Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) (1)
(VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = –40 to –20 °C and VCC = 2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
High-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz
VCC
Power source voltage
Middle-speed mode
f(XIN)=8 MHz
Low-speed mode
VSS
VIH
VIH
VIH
VIH
Power source voltage
“H” input voltage
“H” input voltage
P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37, P41, P45, P47, P51,
P53, P56, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0)
P20–P27, P42–P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57,
P60
VIL
“L” input voltage
VIL
VIL
“L” input voltage
RESET
XIN
P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37, P40, P41, P45, P47,
P51, P53, P56, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0)
P20–P27, P42–P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57,
P60
RESET
“L” input voltage
XIN
VIL
“H” input voltage
“H” input voltage
“L” input voltage
Ta = –20 to 85 °C
Ta = –40 to –20 °C
Ta = –20 to 85 °C
Ta = –40 to –20 °C
Min.
4.0
2.5
3.0
2.5
3.0
Max.
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
Unit
V
V
0.7 VCC
VCC
V
0.8 VCC
VCC
V
0.8 VCC
0.8 VCC
VCC
VCC
V
V
0
0.3 VCC
V
0
0.2 VCC
V
0
0.2 VCC
0.2 VCC
V
V
0
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Limits
Typ.
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
0
1-53
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 23 Recommended operating conditions (Extended operating temperature version) (2)
(VCC = 3.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = –40 to –20 °C and VCC = 2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
ΣIOH(peak)
ΣIOH(peak)
ΣIOL(peak)
ΣIOL(peak)
ΣIOH(avg)
ΣIOH(avg)
ΣIOL(avg)
ΣIOL(avg)
IOH(peak)
Parameter
“H” total peak output current
“H” total peak output current
“L” total peak output current
“L” total peak output current
“H” total average output current
“H” total average output current
“L” total average output current
“L” total average output current
“H” peak output current
IOL(peak)
IOL(peak)
“L” peak output current
“L” peak output current
IOH(avg)
IOH(avg)
“H” average output current
“H” average output current
IOL(avg)
IOL(avg)
“L” average output current
“L” average output current
f(CNTR0)
f(CNTR1)
Clock input frequency
for timers X and Y
(duty cycle 50 %)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 2)
P00–P07, P10–P17 (Note 2)
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71
(Note 2)
P00–P07, P10–P17 (Note 3)
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71
(Note 3)
P00–P07, P10–P17 (Note 3)
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71
(Note 3)
4.0 V ≤ VCC ≤ 5.5 V
VCC ≤ 4.0 V
High-speed mode (4.0 V ≤ VCC ≤ 5.5 V)
High-speed mode (VCC ≤ 4.0 V)
Middle-speed mode
f(XIN)
Main clock input oscillation
frequency (Note 4)
f(XCIN)
Sub-clock input oscillation frequency (Note 4, 5)
Limits
Min.
Typ.
Max.
–40
–40
40
40
–20
–20
20
20
Unit
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
–5
mA
5
mA
10
mA
–1.0
mA
–2.5
mA
2.5
mA
5.0
mA
4.0
MHz
(2XVCC)–4 MHz
8.0
MHz
(4XVCC)–8 MHz
MHz
8.0
kHz
50
32.768
Note 1: The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents.
2: The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port.
3: The average output current is an average value measured over 100 ms.
4: When the oscillation frequency has a duty cycle of 50 %.
5: When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, make sure that the sub-clock input oscillation frequency f(XCIN) is less than
f(XIN)/3.
1-54
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 24 Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) (1)
(VCC =2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, and VCC =3.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = –40 to –20 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
VOH
VOH
VOL
VOL
Parameter
Test conditions
“H” output voltage P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37
“H” output voltage P20–P27, P41–P47,P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note)
“L” output voltage P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37
“L” output voltage P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note)
IOH = –2.5 mA
IOH = –0.6 mA
VCC = 3.0 V
IOH = –5 mA
IOH = –1.25 mA
IOH = –1.25 mA
VCC = 3.0 V
IOL = 5 mA
IOL = 1.25 mA
IOL = 1.25 mA
VCC = 3.0 V
IOL = 10 mA
IOL = 2.5 mA
IOL = 2.5 mA
Limits
Min.
VCC–2.0
Typ.
VT+ – VT–
VT+ – VT–
IIH
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
“H” input current
IIH
“H” input current
IIH
IIH
“H” input current
“H” input current
“L” input current
IIL
IIL
IIL
IIL
VRAM
“L” input current
CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0–INT3, P20–P27
RXD, SCLK1, SIN2, SCLK2
RESET
P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37
P20–P27, P40–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71
RESET
XIN
P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37,
P40, P70
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P71
“L” input current
RESET
“L” input current
XIN
RAM hold voltage
RESET: VCC=3.0 V to 5.5 V
VI = VCC
Pull-downs “off”
VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VCC
Pull-downs “on”
VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VCC
Pull-downs “on”
VCC–0.9
V
VCC–2.0
VCC–0.5
V
V
VCC–0.9
V
2.0
0.5
V
V
1.1
V
2.0
0.5
V
1.1
V
0.5
0.5
0.5
V
V
V
V
5.0
µA
30
70
170
µA
6.0
25
55
µA
5.0
µA
5.0
µA
µA
–5.0
µA
–5.0
µA
VI = VCC
VI = VCC
VI = VCC
VI = VSS
Pull-ups “off”
VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VSS
Pull-ups “on”
VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VSS
Pull-ups “on”
VI = VSS
VI = VSS
When clock is stopped
Unit
V
VCC = 3.0 V
VT+ – VT–
Max.
4.0
–30
–70
–140
µA
–6
–25
–45
µA
–5.0
µA
µA
V
–4.0
2.0
5.5
Note 1: When “1” is set to port XC switch bit (bit 4 of address 003B16) of CPU mode register, the drive ability of port P70 is different from the
value above mentioned.
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-55
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 25 Electrical characteristics (Extended operating temperature version) (2)
(VCC =3.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = –40 to –20 °C and VCC =2.5 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
ICC
Parameter
Power source current
Test conditions
• High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V
f(XIN) = 8 MHz
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V
f(XIN) = 8 MHz (in WIT state)
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 5V, Ta ≤ 55°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 5 V, Ta = 25°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state)
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 3 V, Ta ≤ 55°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 3V, Ta = 25°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state)
Output transistors “off”
All oscillation stopped
(in STP state)
Output transistors “off”
1-56
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Ta = 25 °C
Ta = 85 °C
Min.
Limits
Typ.
Max.
6.4
13
mA
1.6
3.2
mA
25
36
µA
7.0
14.0
µA
15
22
µA
4.5
9.0
µA
0.1
1.0
10
µA
Unit
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timing requirements 1 (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 26 Timing requirements 1 (Extended operating temperature version)
(VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –40 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
tw(RESET)
tc(XIN)
twH(XIN)
twL(XIN)
tc(CNTR)
twH(CNTR)
twL(CNTR)
twH(INT)
twL(INT)
tc(SCLK1)
twH(SCLK1)
twL(SCLK1)
tsu(RXD–SCLK1)
th(SCLK1–RXD)
tc(SCLK2)
twH(SCLK2)
twL(SCLK2)
tsu(SIN2–SCLK2)
th(SCLK2–SIN2)
Parameter
Reset input “L” pulse width
Main clock input cycle time (XIN input)
Main clock input “H” pulse width
Main clock input “L” pulse width
CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “H” pulse width
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “L” pulse width
INT0 to INT3 input “H” pulse width
INT0 to INT3 input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “H” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “L” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 input set up time
Serial I/O1 input hold time
Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time
Serial I/O2 clock input “H” pulse width
Serial I/O2 clock input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O2 input set up time
Serial I/O2 input hold time
Min.
2
125
45
40
250
105
105
80
80
800
370
370
220
100
1000
400
400
200
200
Limits
Typ.
Max.
Unit
µs
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “1” (clock synchronous).
Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “0” (UART).
Timing requirements 2 (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 27 Timing requirements 2 (Extended operating temperature version)
(VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, and VCC = 3.0 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –40 to –20 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Typ.
Max.
Min.
2
tw(RESET)
Reset input “L” pulse width
125
tc(XIN)
Main clock input cycle time (XIN input)
45
twH(XIN)
Main clock input “H” pulse width
40
twL(XIN)
Main clock input “L” pulse width
500/
tc(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time
(VCC–2)
250/
twH(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “H” pulse width
(VCC–2)–20
twL(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “L” pulse width
twH(INT)
twL(INT)
tc(SCLK1)
twH(SCLK1)
twL(SCLK1)
tsu(RXD–SCLK1)
th(SCLK1–RXD)
tc(SCLK2)
twH(SCLK2)
twL(SCLK2)
tsu(SIN2–SCLK2)
th(SCLK2–SIN2)
INT0 to INT3 input “H” pulse width
INT0 to INT3 input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “H” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “L” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 input set up time
Serial I/O1 input hold time
Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time
Serial I/O2 clock input “H” pulse width
Serial I/O2 clock input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O2 input set up time
Serial I/O2 input hold time
250/
(VCC–2)–20
230
230
2000
950
950
400
200
2000
950
950
400
300
Unit
µs
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “1” (clock synchronous).
Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “0” (UART).
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-57
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Switching characteristics 1 (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 28 Switching characteristics 1 (Extended operating temperature version)
(VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –40 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
twH(SCLK1)
twL(SCLK1)
td(SCLK1–TXD)
tv(SCLK1–TXD)
tr(SCLK1)
tf(SCLK1)
twH(SCLK2)
twL(SCLK2)
td(SCLK2–SOUT2)
tv(SCLK2–SOUT2)
tf(SCLK2)
tr(CMOS)
tf(CMOS)
Parameter
Serial I/O1 clock output “H” pulse width
Serial I/O1 clock output “L” pulse width
Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1)
Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1)
Serial I/O1 clock output rising time
Serial I/O1 clock output falling time
Serial I/O2 clock output “H” pulse width
Serial I/O2 clock output “L” pulse width
Serial I/O2 output delay time
Serial I/O2 output valid time
Serial I/O2 clock output falling time
CMOS output rising time (Note 2)
CMOS output falling time (Note 2)
Limits
Min.
Typ.
Max.
tc(SCLK1)/2–30
tc(SCLK1)/2–30
140
–30
30
30
tc(SCLK2)/2–160
tc(SCLK2)/2–160
0.2✕tC(SCLK2)
0
10
10
40
30
30
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is “0”.
2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
Switching characteristics 2 (Extended operating temperature version)
Table 29 Switching characteristics 2 (Extended operating temperature version)
(VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, and VCC = 3.0 to 4.0 V, Ta = –40 to –20 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Limits
Symbol
Parameter
Min.
Typ.
Max.
twH(SCLK1)
tc(SCLK1)/2–50
Serial I/O1 clock output “H” pulse width
twL(SCLK1)
tc(SCLK1)/2–50
Serial I/O1 clock output “L” pulse width
td(SCLK1–TXD)
Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1)
350
tv(SCLK1–TXD)
–30
Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1)
tr(SCLK1)
Serial I/O1 clock output rising time
50
tf(SCLK1)
Serial I/O1 clock output falling time
50
twH(SCLK2)
tc(SCLK2)/2–240
Serial I/O2 clock output “H” pulse width
twL(SCLK2)
tc(SCLK2)/2–240
Serial I/O2 clock output “L” pulse width
td(SCLK2–SOUT2) Serial I/O2 output delay time
0.2✕tC(SCLK2)
tv(SCLK2–SOUT2) Serial I/O2 output valid time
0
tf(SCLK2)
50
Serial I/O2 clock output falling time
tr(CMOS)
20
50
CMOS output rising time (Note 2)
tf(CMOS)
20
50
CMOS output falling time (Note 2)
Note1: When the P45/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B16) is “0”.
2: XOUT and XCOUT pins are excluded.
1-58
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Unit
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Absolute maximum ratings (Low power source voltage version)
Table 30 Absolute maximum ratings (Low power source voltage version)
Symbol
VI
VI
VI
VI
Parameter
Power source voltage
Input voltage P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27,
P30–P37, P40–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71
Input voltage VL1
Input voltage VL2
Input voltage VL3
Input voltage RESET, XIN
VO
Output voltage P00–P07, P10–P17
VO
Output voltage P30–P37
Output voltage P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71
Output voltage SEG0–SEG15
Output voltage XOUT
Power dissipation
Operating temperature
Storage temperature
VCC
VI
VO
VO
VO
Pd
Topr
Tstg
Conditions
Ratings
All voltages are based on VSS.
Output transistors are cut off.
At output port
At segment output
At segment output
Ta = 25 °C
–0.3 to 7.0
Unit
V
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
–0.3 to VL2
VL1 to VL3
VL2 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
–0.3 to VL3 +0.3
–0.3 to VL3 +0.3
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
V
–0.3 to VL3 +0.3
–0.3 to VCC +0.3
300
–20 to 85
–40 to 150
V
V
mW
°C
°C
Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version)
Table 31 Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) (1)
(VCC = 2.2 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Parameter
VCC
Power source voltage
VSS
Power source voltage
“H” input voltage
VIH
VIH
“H” input voltage
VIH
VIH
“H” input voltage
“H” input voltage
“L” input voltage
VIL
VIL
“L” input voltage
VIL
VIL
“L” input voltage
“L” input voltage
High-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz
Middle-speed mode f(XIN)=8 MHz
Low-speed mode
P00–P07,
P53, P56,
P20–P27,
P60
RESET
XIN
P00–P07,
P51, P53,
P20–P27,
P60
RESET
XIN
P10–P17, P30–P37, P41, P45, P47, P51,
P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0)
P42–P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57,
P10–P17, P30–P37, P40, P41, P45, P47,
P56, P61, P70, P71 (CM4=0)
P42–P44, P46, P50, P52, P54, P55, P57,
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Min.
4.0
2.2
2.2
Limits
Typ.
5.0
5.0
5.0
0
Max.
5.5
5.5
5.5
Unit
V
V
0.7 VCC
VCC
V
0.8 VCC
VCC
V
0.8 VCC
0.8 VCC
VCC
VCC
V
V
0
0.3 VCC
V
0
0.2 VCC
V
0
0
0.2 VCC
0.2 VCC
V
V
1-59
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 32 Recommended operating conditions (Low power source voltage version) (2)
(VCC = 2.2 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
ΣIOH(peak)
ΣIOH(peak)
ΣIOL(peak)
ΣIOL(peak)
ΣIOH(avg)
ΣIOH(avg)
ΣIOL(avg)
ΣIOL(avg)
IOH(peak)
Parameter
“H” total peak output current
“H” total peak output current
“L” total peak output current
“L” total peak output current
“H” total average output current
“H” total average output current
“L” total average output current
“L” total average output current
“H” peak output current
Limits
Min.
Typ.
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27 (Note 1)
P41–P47,P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 1)
P00–P07, P10–P17, P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note 2)
P00–P07, P10–P17 (Note 2)
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71
(Note 2)
P00–P07, P10–P17 (Note 3)
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71
(Note 3)
P00–P07, P10–P17 (Note 3)
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57, P60, P61, P70, P71
(Note 3)
IOL(peak)
IOL(peak)
“L” peak output current
“L” peak output current
IOH(avg)
IOH(avg)
“H” average output current
“H” average output current
IOL(avg)
IOL(avg)
“L” average output current
“L” average output current
f(CNTR0)
f(CNTR1)
Clock input frequency
for timers X and Y
(duty cycle 50 %)
f(XIN)
Main clock input oscillation
frequency (Note 4)
f(XCIN)
Sub-clock input oscillation frequency (Note 4, 5)
4.0 V ≤ VCC ≤ 5.5 V
Max.
–40
–40
40
40
–20
–20
20
20
Unit
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
mA
–5
mA
5
mA
10
mA
–1.0
mA
–2.5
mA
2.5
mA
5.0
mA
4.0
MHz
(10XVCC–4)
MHz
9
MHz
8.0
VCC ≤ 4.0 V
High-speed mode (4.0 V ≤ VCC ≤ 5.5 V)
(20XVCC–8) MHz
9
High-speed mode (VCC ≤ 4.0 V)
Middle-speed mode
32.768
8.0
50
MHz
kHz
Note 1: The total output current is the sum of all the currents flowing through all the applicable ports. The total average current is an average value measured over 100 ms. The total peak current is the peak value of all the currents.
2: The peak output current is the peak current flowing in each port.
3: The average output current is an average value measured over 100 ms.
4: When the oscillation frequency has a duty cycle of 50 %.
5: When using the microcomputer in low-speed mode, make sure that the sub-clock input oscillation frequency f(XCIN) is less than
f(XIN)/3.
1-60
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version)
Table 33 Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) (1)
(VCC =4.0 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
VOH
VOH
VOL
VOL
VT+ – VT–
VT+ – VT–
VT+ – VT–
IIH
IIH
IIH
IIH
IIL
IIL
IIL
IIL
Parameter
Test conditions
“H” output voltage P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37
“H” output voltage P20–P27, P41–P47,P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note)
“L” output voltage P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37
“L” output voltage P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71 (Note)
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
“H” input current
“H” input current
“H” input current
“H” input current
“L” input current
“L” input current
“L” input current
“L” input current
CNTR0, CNTR1, INT0–INT3, P20–P27
RXD, SCLK1, SIN2, SCLK2
RESET
P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37
P20–P27, P40–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P70, P71
RESET
XIN
P00–P07, P10–P17, P30–P37,
P40, P70
P20–P27, P41–P47, P50–P57,
P60, P61, P71
RESET
XIN
IOH = –0.1 mA
IOH = –25 µA
VCC = 2.2 V
IOH = –5 mA
IOH = –1.25 mA
IOH = –1.25 mA
VCC = 2.2 V
IOL = 5 mA
IOL = 1.25 mA
IOL = 1.25 mA
VCC = 2.2 V
IOL = 10 mA
IOL = 2.5 mA
IOL = 2.5 mA
VCC = 2.2 V
RESET: VCC=2.2 V to 5.5 V
VI = VCC
Pull-downs “off”
VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VCC
Pull-downs “on”
VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VCC
Pull-downs “on”
Min.
VCC–2.0
Limits
Typ.
Unit
V
VCC–1.0
V
VCC–2.0
VCC–0.5
V
V
VCC–1.0
V
2.0
0.5
V
V
1.1
V
2.0
0.5
V
1.0
V
0.5
0.5
0.5
V
V
V
V
5.0
µA
30
70
170
µA
6.0
25
55
µA
5.0
µA
5.0
µA
µA
–5.0
µA
–5.0
µA
VI = VCC
VI = VCC
VI = VCC
VI = VSS
Pull-ups “off”
VCC= 5.0 V, VI = VSS
Pull-ups “on”
VCC= 3.0 V, VI = VSS
Pull-ups “on”
VI = VSS
VI = VSS
Max.
8.0
4.0
–30
–70
–140
µA
–6
–25
–45
µA
–5.0
µA
µA
–8.0
Note 1: When “1” is set to port XC switch bit (bit 4of address 003B16) of CPU mode register, the drive ability of port P70 is different from the
value above mentioned.
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-61
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Table 34 Electrical characteristics (Low power source voltage version) (2)
(VCC =2.2 to 5.5 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
VRAM
ICC
Parameter
RAM hold voltage
Power source current
Test conditions
When clock is stopped
• High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V
f(XIN) = 8 MHz
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• High-speed mode, VCC = 5 V
f(XIN) = 8 MHz (in WIT state)
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 5V, Ta ≤ 55°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 5 V, Ta = 25°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state)
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 3 V, Ta ≤ 55°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
Output transistors “off”
• Low-speed mode, VCC = 3V, Ta = 25°C
f(XIN) = stopped
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz (in WIT state)
Output transistors “off”
All oscillation stopped
(in STP state)
Output transistors “off”
1-62
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Ta = 25 °C
Ta = 85 °C
Min.
2.0
Limits
Typ.
Max.
5.5
Unit
V
6.4
13
mA
1.6
3.2
mA
25
36
µA
7.0
14.0
µA
15
22
µA
4.5
9.0
µA
0.2
2.0
20
µA
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timing requirements 1 (Low power source voltage version)
Table 35 Timing requirements 1 (Low power source voltage version)
(VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
_____
tw(RESET)
tc(XIN)
twH(XIN)
twL(XIN)
tc(CNTR)
twH(CNTR)
twL(CNTR)
twH(INT)
twL(INT)
tc(SCLK1)
twH(SCLK1)
twL(SCLK1)
tsu(RXD–SCLK1)
th(SCLK1–RXD)
tc(SCLK2)
twH(SCLK2)
twL(SCLK2)
tsu(SIN2–SCLK2)
th(SCLK2–SIN2)
Parameter
Reset input “L” pulse width
Main clock input cycle time (XIN input)
Main clock input “H” pulse width
Main clock input “L” pulse width
CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “H” pulse width
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “L” pulse width
INT0 to INT3 input “H” pulse width
INT0 to INT3 input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “H” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “L” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 input set up time
Serial I/O1 input hold time
Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time
Serial I/O2 clock input “H” pulse width
Serial I/O2 clock input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O2 input set up time
Serial I/O2 input hold time
Min.
2
125
45
40
250
105
105
80
80
800
370
370
220
100
1000
400
400
200
200
Limits
Typ.
Max.
Unit
µs
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “1” (clock synchronous).
Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 8 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “0” (UART).
Timing requirements 2 (Low power source voltage version)
Table 36 Timing requirements 2 (Low power source voltage version)
(VCC = 2.5 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
_____
Parameter
tw(RESET)
tc(XIN)
twH(XIN)
twL(XIN)
Reset input “L” pulse width
Main clock iuput cycle time (XIN input)
Main clock input “H” pulse width
Main clock input “L” pulse width
tc(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1 input cycle time
twH(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “H” pulse width
twL(CNTR)
CNTR0, CNTR1 input “L” pulse width
twH(INT)
twL(INT)
tc(SCLK1)
twH(SCLK1)
twL(SCLK1)
tsu(RXD–SCLK1)
th(SCLK1–RXD)
tc(SCLK2)
twH(SCLK2)
twL(SCLK2)
tsu(SIN2–SCLK2)
th(SCLK2–SIN2)
INT0 to INT3 input “H” pulse width
INT0 to INT3 input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O1 clock input cycle time (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “H” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 clock input “L” pulse width (Note)
Serial I/O1 input set up time
Serial I/O1 input hold time
Serial I/O2 clock input cycle time
Serial I/O2 clock input “H” pulse width
Serial I/O2 clock input “L” pulse width
Serial I/O2 input set up time
Serial I/O2 input hold time
Min.
2
125
45
40
900/
(VCC–0.4)
450/
(VCC–0.4)–20
450/
(VCC–0.4)–20
230
230
2000
950
950
400
200
2000
950
950
400
300
Limits
Typ.
Max.
Unit
µs
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
Note: When f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “1” (clock synchronous).
Divide this value by four when f(XIN) = 2 MHz and bit 6 of address 001A16 is “0” (UART).
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-63
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Switching characteristics 1 (Low power source voltage version)
Table 37 Switching characteristics 1 (Low power source voltage version)
(VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V, V SS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Limits
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Typ.
Unit
ns
twH(SCLK1)
Serial I/O1 clock output “H” pulse width
tc(SCLK1) /2–30
twL(SCLK1 )
Serial I/O1 clock output “L” pulse width
tc(SCLK1) /2–30
td(SCLK1–TXD)
Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1)
tv(SCLK1–TXD)
Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1)
tr(SCLK1)
Serial I/O1 clock output rising time
30
ns
tf(SCLK1 )
Serial I/O1 clock output falling time
30
ns
twH(SCLK2)
Serial I/O2 clock output “H” pulse width
t c(SCLK2)/2–160
twL(SCLK2 )
Serial I/O2 clock output “L” pulse width
t c(SCLK2)/2–160
td(SCLK2–SOUT2)
Serial I/O2 output delay time
tv(SCLK2–SOUT2)
Serial I/O2 output valid time
tf(SCLK2 )
Serial I/O2 clock output falling time
tr(CMOS)
CMOS output rising time (Note 2)
tf(CMOS)
CMOS output falling time (Note 2)
ns
140
ns
ns
–30
ns
ns
0.2✕tC(SCLK2)
ns
ns
0
40
ns
10
30
ns
10
30
ns
Notes 1: When the P4 5/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B 16) is “0”.
2: XOUT and X COUT pins are excluded.
Switching characteristics 2 (Low power source voltage version)
Table 38 Switching characteristics 2 (Low power source voltage version)
(VCC = 2.2 to 4.0 V, VSS = 0 V, Ta = –20 to 85 °C, unless otherwise noted)
Symbol
Limits
Parameter
Min.
Max.
Typ.
Unit
ns
twH(SCLK1)
Serial I/O1 clock output “H” pulse width
tc(SCLK1) /2–50
twL(SCLK1 )
Serial I/O1 clock output “L” pulse width
tc(SCLK1) /2–50
td(SCLK1–TXD)
Serial I/O1 output delay time (Note 1)
tv(SCLK1–TXD)
Serial I/O1 output valid time (Note 1)
tr(SCLK1)
Serial I/O1 clock output rising time
50
ns
tf(SCLK1 )
Serial I/O1 clock output falling time
50
ns
twH(SCLK2)
Serial I/O2 clock output “H” pulse width
t c(SCLK2)/2–240
twL(SCLK2 )
Serial I/O2 clock output “L” pulse width
t c(SCLK2)/2–240
td(SCLK2–SOUT2)
Serial I/O2 output delay time
tv(SCLK2–SOUT2)
Serial I/O2 output valid time
tf(SCLK2 )
Serial I/O2 clock output falling time
tr(CMOS)
CMOS output rising time (Note 2)
tf(CMOS)
CMOS output falling time (Note 2)
ns
350
ns
ns
0.2✕tC(SCLK2)
50
ns
20
50
ns
20
50
ns
Notes 1: When the P4 5/TXD P-channel output disable bit of the UART control register (bit 4 of address 001B 16) is “0”.
2: XOUT and X COUT pins are excluded.
Measurement output pin
1kΩ
Measurement output pin
100pF
CMOS output
N-channel open-drain output (Note)
Note : When bit 4 of the UART
control register (address 001B 16) is “1”.
(N-channel open-drain output mode)
Fig.47 Circuit for measuring output switching characteristics
1-64
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
ns
ns
0
100pF
ns
ns
–30
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Timing diagram
tC(CNTR)
tWL(CNTR)
tWH(CNTR)
CNTR0,CNTR1
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
tWL(INT)
tWH(INT)
INT0–INT3
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
tW(RESET)
RESET
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
tC(XIN)
tWL(XIN)
tWH(X IN)
0.8VCC
XIN
tf
SCLK1
SCLK2
0.2VCC
tWL(SCLK1),tWL(S CLK2)
tC(SCLK1),tC(SCLK2)
tr
tWH(S CLK1),tWH(S CLK2)
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
tsu(RXD-SCLK1)
tsu(S IN2-SCLK2)
RXD
SIN2
th(SCLK1-RXD)
th(SCLK2-SIN2)
0.8VCC
0.2VCC
td(SCLK1-TXD),td(SCLK2-SOUT2)
tv(SCLK1-TXD),
tv(SCLK2-SOUT2)
TXD
SOUT2
Fig.48 Timing diagram
3820GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-65
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
STANDARD CHARACTERISTICS
Power Source Current Characteristic Examples
(ICC–VCC characteristics).
Figure 49, Figure 50, and Figure 51 show I CC–VCC characteristic
examples.
Measuring condition : 25°C, f(X IN) = 8MHz
Power source current I CC [mA]
10
9
8
High-speed mode
7
6
5
4
Middle-speed mode
3
2
High-speed mode in wait mode
and
Middle-speed mode in wait mode
1
0
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
Power source voltage V CC [V]
Fig. 49 ICC–VCC characteristic example (f(XIN) = 8 MHz)
Measuring condition : 25°C, f(X IN) = 4MHz
Power source current I CC [mA]
5
4
High-speed mode
3
Middle-speed mode
2
High-speed mode in wait mode
and
Middle-speed mode in wait mode
1
0
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
Power source voltage V CC [V]
Fig. 50 ICC–VCC characteristic example (f(XIN) = 4 MHz)
1-66
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
6.0
6.5
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Measuring condition : 25°C, f(X CIN) = 32 kHz oscillator used
Power source current I CC [µA]
50
40
30
in low-speed mode
20
in wait mode
10
0
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
Power source Voltage V CC [V]
Fig. 51 ICC–VCC characteristic example (f(XIN) = 32 kHz, oscillator used)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-67
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Power Source Frequency Characteristic
Examples
Figure 52 and Figure 53 show the ICC–f(XIN) characteristic examples.
Measuring condition : 25°C, V CC = 3.0 V
Power source current I CC [mA]
3
2
High-speed mode
1
Middle-speed mode
High-speed mode in wait mode
Middle-speed mode in wait mode
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
Frequency f(X IN) [MHz]
Fig. 52 ICC-f(XIN) characteristic example (VCC = 3.0 V)
Measuring condition : 25°C, V CC = 5.0 V
5
Power source current I CC [mA]
High-speed mode
4
3
Middle-speed mode
2
High-speed mode in wait mode
and
1
Middle-speed mode in wait mode
0
0
2
4
6
8
Frequency f(X IN) [MHz]
Fig. 53 ICC-f(XIN) characteristic example (VCC = 5.0 V)
1-68
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
10
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Port Standard Characteristics Examples
Figure 52, Figure 53, Figure 54, and Figure 55 show port standard
characteristic examples.
Port P00 IOH-VOH characteristic (P-channel drive)
(Pins with same characteristic : P0, P1, P3)
I OH
[mA]
–20
VCC = 5 V
Ta = 25°C
–10
VOC = 3 V
Ta = 25°C
0
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
VOH [V]
Fig. 54 IOH–VOH characteristic example of CMOS output port at P-channel drive (P0, P1, P3)
Port P0 0 IOL-VOL characteristic (N-channel drive)
(Pins with same characteristic : P0, P1, P3)
I OL
[mA]
50
40
VCC = 5 V
Ta = 25°C
30
20
VCC = 3 V
Ta = 25°C
10
0
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
VOL [V]
Fig. 55 IOL–VOL characteristic example of CMOS output port at N-channel drive (P0, P1, P3)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1-69
MITSUBISHI MICROCOMPUTERS
3820 Group
SINGLE-CHIP 8-BIT CMOS MICROCOMPUTER
Port P20 IOH-VOH characteristic (P-channel drive)
(Pins with same characteristic : P2, P5, P6, P7)
I OH
[mA]
–50
–40
VCC = 5 V
Ta = 25 °C
–30
–20
VCC = 3 V
Ta = 25 °C
–10
0
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
VOH [V]
Fig. 56 IOH–VOH characteristic example of CMOS output port at P-channel drive (P2, P5, P6, P7)
Port P20 IOL-VOL characteristic (N-channel drive)
(Pins with same characteristic : P2, P5, P6, P7)
I OL
[mA]
100
90
80
VCC = 5 V
Ta = 25 °C
70
60
50
40
30
VCC = 3 V
Ta = 25 °C
20
10
0
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
VOL [V]
Fig. 57 IOL–VOL characteristic example of CMOS output port at N-channel drive (P2, P5, P6, P7)
1-70
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
CHAPTER 2
APPLICATION
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
I/O pins
Interrupts
Timer X and timer Y
Timer 1, timer 2, and
timer 3
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.8 Watchdog timer
2.9 Standby function
2.10 Reset
2.11 Oscillation circuit
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1 I/O pins
2.1.1 I/O ports
(1) I/O port write and read
■The input-only ports and programmable I/O ports set for the input mode
The input-only ports and the programmable I/O ports set for the input mode are floating. The value
(pin state) input to the port is read by reading the port register corresponding to each port.
In writing data into the port register corresponding to each port, the data is only written to the port
register but the pin remains in the floating state.
■Output-only ports and programmable I/O ports set for the output mode
The value written to the port register corresponding to an output port or a programmable I/O port set
for the output mode is output externally through a transistor.
In reading the data of the port transistor corresponding to each port, the pin state is not read but the
value written to the port register is read. Accordingly, even if the output “H” voltage is reduced or the
output “L” voltage is increased by external load, the previous output value is correctly read.
At output : •An output value is set by writing to the
port register.
•Reading a port register is possible.
At input : •Writing to a port register is possible.
•A pin state is read by reading the
port register.
“H” level output
Port direction
register
(“1”)
Port direction
register✽
(“0”)
Port register
(at writing)
Port
register
“L” level output
Port register
(at reading)
Read the pin state
✽ : The P- and N-channel transistors are cut off.
Fig. 2.1.1 I/O port write and read
2–2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
Table 2.1.1 shows the memory allocation of
the port registers corresponding to each port.
Table 2.1.1 Memory allocation of port registers
Port
Port register address
000016
000216
000416
000616
000816
000A16
000C 16
000E16
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
(2) Input/output switching of programmable I/O ports
Input/output switching of the programmable I/O ports is performed by the port direction register corresponding to each port (Note). Figure 2.1.2 shows the structure of the port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction
register, and Table 2.1.2 shows the memory allocation of the port direction registers corresponding to
each port. Figure 2.1.4 shows a port direction register setting example.
Note: In ports P0 and P1, input/output switching is performed by a port unit. By setting bit 0 of the
corresponding direction register to “0,” the port is set for the input mode. By setting to “1,” the
port is set for the output mode. Figure 2.1.3 shows the structure of the ports P0 and P1
direction registers.
Port Pi direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port Pi direction register (PiD) (i = 2, 4 to 7)
[Address 0516, 0916, 0B16, 0D16, 0F16]
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Port Pi direction
register
Functions
0 : Port Pi0 input mode
1 : Port Pi0 output mode
At reset
0
R W
×
0 : Port Pi1 input mode
1 : Port Pi1 output mode
0 : Port Pi2 input mode
1 : Port Pi2 output mode
0 : Port Pi3 input mode
1 : Port Pi3 output mode
0 : Port Pi4 input mode
1 : Port Pi4 output mode
0 : Port Pi5 input mode
1 : Port Pi5 output mode
0 : Port Pi6 input mode
1 : Port Pi6 output mode
0 : Port Pi7 input mode
1 : Port Pi7 output mode
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
Notes 1: Nothing is allocated bit 0 of port P4 direction register and bit 2
to bit 7 of port P7 direction register. These bits cannot be written
to.
2: The contents of the port Pi direction register cannot be read out
(refer to “2.1.4 Notes on use”).
Fig. 2.1.2 Structure of port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–3
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
Port P0 direction register, port P1 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P0 direction register (P0D) [Address 0116]
Port P1 direction register (P1D) [Address 0316]
B
0
Name
Port P0 direction
register /
Port P1 direction
register
At reset R W
Functions
0 : All bits are input mode
×
0
1 : All bits are output mode
1 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written
to to and be read out.
7
0
× ×
Note: In ports P0 and P1, input/output switching is performed by a port unit.
By setting bit 0 of the corresponding port direction register to “0”, the
port is set for the input mode. By setting to “1”, the port is set for the
output mode. Nothing is allocated for bits 1 to 7 of the ports P0 and
P1 direction registers, and these bits cannot be written to.
Fig. 2.1.3 Structure of ports P0 and P1 direction registers
Table 2.1.2 Memory allocation of port direction registers
Port
P0
P1
P2
P4
P5
P6
P7
2–4
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Port direction register address
000116
000316
000516
000916
000B16
000D 16
000F16
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
Example : When setting “6B16”
b7
0 1
1 0
1
0
1
b0
1 to the port P2 direction register
Input/output direction of port P2
P27
Input
P26
P25
Output Output
P24
Input
P23
P22
Output
Input
P21
P20
Output Output
Fig. 2.1.4 Port direction register setting example
(3) Pull-up control and pull-down control
The ports shown in Table 2.1.3 are controlled for pull-up and pull-down by software. Either pull-up or
pull-down is controlled by the PULL register A (address 0016 16 ) and the PULL register B (address
001716). Figure 2.1.5 shows the structure of the PULL register A and Figure 2.1.6 shows the structure
of the PULL register B.
Table 2.1.3 I/O ports which either pull-up or pulldown is controlled by software
Control
Ports
Pull-down
Pull-up
P0, P1, P3
P2, P4 1 to P4 7, P5 to P7
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–5
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
PULL register A
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
PULL register A (PULLA) [Address 1616]
Name
0 P00–P07 pull-down
B
1 P10–P17 pull-down
2 P20–P27 pull-up
3
P30–P37 pull-down
4 P70, P71 pull-up
Functions
0 : No pull-down
1 : Pull-down
0 : No pull-down
1 : Pull-down
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-down
1 : Pull-down
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written
to to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
At reset R W
1
1
0
1
0
0
0 ×
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up or pull-down is
impossible.
Fig. 2.1.5 Structure of PULL register A
PULL register B
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
PULL register B (PULLB) [Address 1716]
B
Name
1
-P4
3
pull-up
P4
0
1 P44-P47 pull-up
2 P50-P53 pull-up
3 P54-P57 pull-up
Functions
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written
to to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
4 P60, P61 pull-up
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up is impossible.
Fig. 2.1.6 Structure of PULL register B
2–6
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0 ×
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1.2 Function pins
Each function pin except I/O ports is described below.
(1) Pins VCC and V SS
f(XIN) MHz
Power source input pins. In the high-speed mode, apply (
+ 2) V–5.5 V to the V CC pin.
4
In the middle-speed mode or the low-speed mode, apply 2.5 V–5.5 V to the V CC pin.
When Ta = –40 °C to –20 °C, use the extended operating temperature version, and apply
3.0 V–5.5 V to the V CC pin.
In all modes, apply 0 V to the V SS pin.
(2) Pins VL1 , V L2 and V L3
Power source input pins for LCD. Apply 0 ≤ V L1 ≤ V L2 ≤V L3 ≤ V CC of voltage to these pins.
(3) Pins X IN and XOUT
An input pin and an output pin for the main clock generating circuit.
(4) RESET pin
The 3820 group is reset internally by keeping the level of this pin at “L” for 2 µs or more. Reset state
is released by returning the level of this pin to “H”.
(5) Pins SEG0 to SEG 15
Segment signal output pins for LCD.
(6) Pins COM 0 to COM 3
Common signal output pins for LCD.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–7
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1.3 Application examples
The basic structure for key input without a pull-up resistor and an application examples of it are described
below.
In contrast to a method which uses a pull-up resistor, dissipating current incessantly, this method requires
only a charging current for a very small capacitance, so it is especially suitable for a battery-driven unit.
In the following description, ports A, B, C and D are only tentative names and differ from the real port
names.
(1) Basic structure for key input
Figure 2.1.7 shows a connection example 1 for
key input without a pull-up resistor and Figure
2.1.8 shows the key input control procedure 1.
Figure 2.1.9 shows a timing diagram 1 where
switch A is pressed.
CMOS I/O
port A
SW A
CMOS I/O
port B
SW B
CMOS I/O
port C
SW C
Virtual
capacitor (C)
r = 10 kΩ
Fig. 2.1.7 Connection example 1 for key input
✽1
Key input
✽1 In the case of no key input, output “L” (Noise countermeasure).
✽2
Output “H” for charging to each
port
After inputting data into the port
direction register, judge ON/OFF
of key input.
✽3
✽2 A virtual capacitor (C) is charged by outputting “H.”
(For capacitance, refer to the next page.)
✽3 Set the port direction register for input mode with an
instruction immediately after “H” is output.
(For the limit timer for ON/OFF judgment and the
discharging time at ON, refer to the next page.)
✽4 For double reading to ensure data, repeat ✽2 and ✽3.
✽4
Fig. 2.1.8 Key input control procedure 1
2–8
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
➀
➁
➂
➃
Charge time
T
➄
“L” output
t2
“H” output
“H” output
Input
Input
Read port state
CMOS I/O
port B
“L” output
CMOS I/O
port C
“L” output
“H” output
➆
Charge time
t2
CMOS I/O
port A
➅
Input
Read port state
“H” output
Input
“H” output
Input
t1
“H” output
Input
Fig. 2.1.9 Timing diagram 1 where switch A is pressed
The discharging time (➂, ➃) after completion of charge in Figure 2.1.9 is shown with the following
expression.
The discharging time (T) is obtained with T = CR.
●The capacitance of the virtual capacitor (C) is:
Capacitance of microcomputer output transistors and input transistors ... Approx. 10 pF
Capacitance of package pin ............................................................................. Several pF
+ Capacitance of each key wiring ....................................................................... Several pF
(minimum) Approx. 10 pF
●In the leak current standard at 5 V, the maximum value is 5 µA and the standard value is 0.05 µA.
Accordingly, the minimum resistance (R) is 1 MΩ and the standard resistance is 100 MΩ.
In the above condition, the discharging time (T) is obtained as follows:
T (minimum) = 10 pF ✕ 1 MΩ = 10 ✕ 10 -12 ✕ 1 ✕ 10 6 = 10 ✕ 10 -6 (s)
T (standard) = 10 pF ✕ 100 MΩ = 10 ✕ 10 -12 ✕ 100 ✕ 10 6 = 1 ✕ 10 -3 (s)
Accordingly, the discharging time (T) is 10 µ s (minimum) to 1 ms (standard).
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–9
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
✻The discharging time (t2) at ON is obtained with t = Cr in the same way as the previous page, with
the result of t = 100 ns.
✻Judge ON/OFF of key input within the time (t 1) which is obtained as follows:
After the completion of “H” output,
V t1 = V O ✕ e –t1/T
t 1 = –T ✕ 1n Vt1
VO
VO : “H” output voltage
Vt1 : Input voltage after t 1(s)
<Example> The standard time at V O = 5.0 V, V t1 = 3.5 V
t 1 = –1 ✕ 10 –3 ✕ 1n
3.5
5.0
≈ 357 µ s
(2) Key input application example
According to the key input without a pull-up
resistor described in (1), an effective application example where there are enough ports is
shown below. This method reduces both current dissipation and quantity of parts compared
with the example shown in (1).
Figure 2.1.10 shows a connection example 2
for key input using port D and Figure 2.1.11
shows the key input control procedure 2. Figure 2.1.12 shows a timing diagram 2 where
switch A is pressed.
CMOS I/O
port A
SW A
CMOS I/O
port B
SW B
CMOS I/O
port C
SW C
CMOS I/O
port D
Virtual
capacitor (C)
Fig. 2.1.10 Connection example 2 for key input
✽1
Key input
✽1 In the case of no key input, output “L” (Noise countermeasure).
✽2
Output “H” for charging to each
port
✽2 A virtual capacitor (C) is charged by outputting “H.”
(For capacitance, refer to the previous page.)
✽3
Set the port direction register
for the input mode
✽4
After outputting “L” from the port
D, judge ON/OFF of key input.
✽3 Set the port direction register for input mode with an
instruction immediately after “H” is output.
✽4 Output “L” with the next instruction (refer to “Figure
2.1.12 (A)”)
✽5 For double reading to ensure data, repeat ✽2, ✽3 and ✽4.
✽5
Fig. 2.1.11 Key input control procedure 2
2–10
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
(A)
➀
(A)
➁
➂
➃
T
Charge time
➄
“L” output
t2
“H” output
“H” output
Input
Input
Read port state
CMOS I/O
port B
“L” output
“H” output
➆
Charge time
t2
CMOS I/O
port A
➅
Input
Read port state
“H” output
Input
“H” output
Input
t1
CMOS I/O
port C
“L” output
CMOS I/O
port D
“L” output
“H” output
“H” output
Input
“L” output
“H” output
“L” output
Fig. 2.1.12 Timing diagram 2 where switch A is pressed
With the exception that “L” is output using port D for key input (refer to “Figure 2.1.12 (A)”), the basic
structure is the same as that shown in (1).
The examples shown in (1) and (2) are already put into practical use. However, be sure to evaluate
them on the user’s side.
In this example, the ports are the same structure as the equivalent circuit which a pull-up resistor of
about 1 kΩ is connected.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–11
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
2.1.4 Notes on use
When using I/O ports, note the following.
(1) Reading the port direction register
The value of the port direction register is not readable. The following cannot be used:
• the data transfer instruction (LDA, etc.)
• the operation instruction when the index X mode flag (T) is “1”
• the addressing mode which uses the value of a direction register as an index
• the bit-test instruction (BBC or BBS, etc.) to a direction register
• the read-modify-write instruction (ROR, CLB, or SEB, etc.) to a direction register
Use instructions such as LDM and STA, etc., to set the port direction registers.
(2) When the data register (port latch) of an I/O port is modified with the bit managing instruction
When the data register (port latch) of an I/O port is modified with the bit managing instruction ✽1, the
value of the unspecified bit may be changed.
REASON
The bit managing instructions are read-modify-write form instructions for reading and writing data by
a byte unit. Accordingly, when these instructions are executed on a bit of the data register of an I/O
port, the following is executed to all bits of the data register.
●As for a bit which is set for an input port:
The pin state is read in the CPU, and is written to this bit after bit managing.
●As for a bit which is set for an output port:
The bit value is read in the CPU, and is written to this bit after bit managing.
Note the following:
●Even when a port which is set as an output port is changed for an input port, its data register holds
the output data.
●As for a bit of which is set for an input port, its value may be changed even when not specified with
a bit managing instruction in case where the pin state differs from its data register contents
✽1 bit managing instructions : SEB and CLB instruction
(3) Pull-up control and pull-down control
To pull-up or pull-down ports by software, note the following.
●When ports P0, P1 and P3 are used as segment output pins for LCD, the settings of the pull-down
bits corresponding to these ports of the PULL register A are invalid (pull-down is impossible).
●When ports P0–P2, P4 1 –P4 7 and P5–P7 are set for the output mode, the settings of the bits
corresponding to these ports of the PULL register A and PULL register B are invalid (pull-up or pulldown are impossible).
2–12
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
(4) Notes in standby state
In standby state ✽2 for low-power dissipation, do not make input levels of an input port and an I/O port
“undefined”, especially for I/O ports of the P-channel and the N-channel open-drain.
Pull-up (connect the port to VCC) or pull-down (connect the port to VSS) these ports through a resistor.
When determining a resistance value, note the following points:
●External circuit
●Variation of output levels during the ordinary operation
When using built-in pull-up or pull-down resistor as an option, note on varied current values.
●When setting as an input port : Fix its input level
●When setting as an output port : Prevent current from flowing out to external
REASON
Even when setting as an output port with its direction register, in the following state:
●P-channel......when the content of the data register (port latch) is “0”
●N-channel......when the content of the data register (port latch) is “1”
the transistor becomes the OFF state, which causes the ports to be the high-impedance state. Note
that the level becomes “undefined” depending on external circuits.
Accordingly, the potential which is input to the input buffer in a microcomputer is unstable in the state
that input levels of a input port and an I/O port are “undefined”. This may cause power source current.
✽2 standby state : the stop mode by executing the STP instruction the wait mode by executing the
WIT instruction
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–13
APPLICATION
2.1 I/O pins
(5) Termination of unused pins
Table 2.1.4 shows termination of unused pins.
Table 2.1.4 Termination of unused pins
Pins
Terminations
P2 0–P27
P4 1/φ
P4 4/RxD
P4 5/TxD
P4 6/SCLK1
P4 7/SRDY1
P5 0/SIN2
➀After set for the input mode and put the built-in pull-up resistor in the ON state,
P5 1/SOUT2
open. ✽1
P5 2/SCLK2
➁Set for the output mode and open at “L” or “H.” ✽2
P5 3/SRDY2
P5 4/CNTR0
P5 5/CNTR1
P5 6/TOUT
P6 1/RTP1
P7 0/XCOUT
P7 1/XCIN
P0 0/SEG24–P07/SEG 31 ➀After set for the input mode and put the built-in pull-down resistor in the ON
P1 0/SEG32–P17/SEG 39 state, open.✽1
➁Set for the output mode and open at “L” or “H.” ✽2
P4 0
Connect each pin to V CC or V SS through each resistor of 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ.
P4 2/INT0
➀After disabling INT interrupts, set for the input mode, and put the built-in pull-up
P4 3/INT1
resistor in the ON state, open.✽1
P5 7/INT2
➁Set for the output mode and open at “L” or “H.” ✽2
P6 0/INT3/RTP0
Connect to VSS level
VL1–VL3
COM0–COM3
Open
SEG0–SEG15
P30/SEG16–P37/SEG23 Put the built-in pull-down resistor in the ON state, open. ✽1
✽1 After reset and before the built-in pull-up (pull-down) resistor is put in the ON state by software,
the built-in pull-up (pull-down) resistor is in the OFF state. Because of this, the potential at these
pins are “undefined” and the power source current may increase. Since the direction register setup
may be changed for the output mode because of a program runaway or noise, set direction
register for the input mode periodically. And make the length of wiring which is connected I/O ports
within 2 cm.
✽2 After reset and before I/O ports are switched for the output mode by software, I/O ports are set
for the input mode. Because of this, the potential at these pins are “undefined” and the power
source current may increase in the input mode. Since the direction register setup may be changed
for the input mode because of a program runaway or noise, set direction register for the output
mode periodically. And make the length of wiring which is connected I/O ports within 2 cm.
2–14
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.1 Explanation of operations
When an interrupt request is accepted, the contents immediately before acceptance of the interrupt requests of the following registers is automatically pushed onto the stack area in the order of ➀, ➁ and ➂.
➀High-order (PCH) contents of program counter
➁Low-order (PCL) contents of program counter
➂Contents of processor status register (PS)
After the contents of the above registers are pushed onto the stack area, the accepted interrupt vector
address enters the program counter and consequently the interrupt processing routine is executed.
When the RTI instruction is executed at the end of the interrupt processing routine, the contents of the
above registers pushed onto the stack area are restored to the respective registers in the order of ➂, ➁
and ➀ and the processing executed immediately before acceptance of the interrupts is continued.
Figure 2.2.1 shows an interrupt operation diagram.
Executing routine
·······
Interrupt occurs
(Accepting interrupt request)
Suspended
operation
Resume processing
Contents of program counter (high-order) are pushed onto stack
Contents of program counter (low-order) are pushed onto stack
Contents of processor status register are pushed onto stack
·······
Interrupt
processing
routine
RTI instruction
Contents of processor status register are poped from stack
Contents of program counter (low-order) are poped from stack
Contents of program counter (high-order) are poped from stack
: Operation commanded by software
: Internal operation to be performed automatically
Fig. 2.2.1 Interrupt operation diagram
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–15
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(1) Interrupt request generating conditions
Table 2.2.1 shows interrupt sources and interrupt request generating conditions.
The occurrence of an interrupt request causes the corresponding interrupt request bit to be set to “1.”
When the following conditions are satisfied in this state, the interrupt request is accepted.
For details, refer to “2.2.2 Control”.
➀Interrupt disable flag = “0” (interrupts enabled)
➁Interrupt enable bit = “1” (interrupts enabled)
Table 2.2.1 Interrupt sources and interrupt request generating conditions
Interrupt sources
Interrupt request generating conditions
Reference
At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT0 input 2.2.4 INT interrupts
INT0
(Active edge selectable)
At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT 1 input
INT1
(Active edge selectable)
At completion of serial I/O1 data reception
Serial I/O1 receive
At completion of serial I/O1 transmit shift or when transmit 2.5 Serial I/O1
Serial I/O1 transmit
buffer register is empty
At timer X underflow
Timer X
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
At timer Y underflow
Timer Y
At timer 2 underflow
Timer 2
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
At timer 3 underflow
Timer 3
At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR 0
CNTR0
input (Active edge selectable)
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
At detection of either rising or falling edge of CNTR 1
CNTR1
input (Active edge selectable)
Timer 1
At timer 1 underflow
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
INT2
At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT2 input
(Active edge selectable)
INT3
At detection of either rising or falling edge of INT 3 input 2.2.4 INT interrupts
(Active edge selectable)
At falling of conjunction of input level for port P2 (at
Key input
2.2.5 Key input interrupt
input mode)
(Key-on wake up)
At completion of serial I/O2 data transmission
Serial I/O2
2.6 Serial I/O2
or reception
BRK instruction
At BRK instruction execution
SERIES 740 <SOFTWARE>
USER’S MANUAL
2–16
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(2) Processing upon acceptance of an interrupt request
Upon acceptance of an interrupt request, the following operations are automatically performed.
➀The processing being executed is stopped.
➁The contents of the program counter and the processor status register are pushed onto the stack
area. Figure 2.2.2 shows changes of the stack pointer and the program counter upon acceptance
of an interrupt request.
➂Concurrently with the push operation, the jump destination address (the beginning address of the
interrupt processing routine) of the occurring interrupt stored in the vector address is set in the
program counter, then the interrupt processing routine is executed.
➃After the interrupt processing routine is started, the corresponding interrupt request bit is automatically cleared to “0.” The interrupt disable flag is set to “1” so that multiple interrupts are disabled.
Accordingly, for executing the interrupt processing routine, it is necessary to set the jump destination
address in the vector area corresponding to each interrupt.
Stack area
Program counter
PCL Program counter (high-order)
PCH Program counter (low-order)
Interrupt disable flag = “0”
Stack pointer
S
(S)
(S)
Interrupt
request is
accepted
Program counter
PCL
Vector address
PCH
(from Interrupt vector area)
Stack area
Interrupt disable flag = “1”
(s) – 3
Processor status register
Stack pointer
S
Program counter (low-order)
(S) – 3
(S) Program counter (high-order)
Fig. 2.2.2 Changes of stack pointer and program counter upon acceptance of interrupt request
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–17
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(3) Timing after acceptance of an interrupt request
The interrupt processing routine is started at the timing of machine cycle after completion of the
executing instruction. Figure 2.2.3 shows the processing time up to the execution of an interrupt
processing routine and Figure 2.2.4 shows timing after the acceptance of an interrupt request.
Interrupt operation starts
Interrupt request occurs
✽
Waiting time
for pipeline postprocessing
Main routine
0 to 16 cycles
✽
Push onto stack
Vector fetch
2 cycles
Interrupt processing routine
5 cycles
7 to 23 cycles
(At internal system clock φ = 3.15 MHz, 2.2 µ s to 7.3 µ s)
✽ : Refer to “Figure 2.2.4”
Fig. 2.2.3 Processing time up to execution of interrupt processing routine
Waiting time for pipeline
postprocessing
Push onto stack
Vector fetch
Interrupt operation starts
φ
SYNC
RD
WR
Address bus
Data bus
PC
Not used
S, SPS
S-1, SPS S-2, SPS
PCH PCL
BH
BL
PS
AL
AL, AH
AH
SYNC : CPU operation code fetch cycle
(This is an internal signal which cannot be observed from the external unit.)
BL, BH : Vector address of each interrupt
AL, AH : Jump destination address of each interrupt (Note)
SPS : “0016” or “0116”
Note: Refer to “Table 6 in CHAPTER 1 HARDWARE .”
Fig. 2.2.4 Timing after acceptance of interrupt request
2–18
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.2 Control
For interrupts except the BRK instruction interrupt, the acceptance of interrupt can be controlled by an
interrupt request bit, an interrupt enable bit, and an interrupt disable flag. In this section, control of interrupts except the BRK instruction interrupt is described and Figure 2.2.5 shows an interrupt control diagram.
Interrupt request bit
Interrupt enable bit
Interrupt request
Interrupt disable flag
BRK instruction
Reset
Fig. 2.2.5 Interrupt control diagram
An interrupt request bit, an interrupt enable bit and an interrupt disable flag function independently and do
not affect each other. An interrupt is accepted when all the following conditions are satisfied.
●Interrupt request bit — “1”
●Interrupt enable bit — “1”
●Interrupt disable flag — “0”
Though the interrupt priority is determined by software, a variety of priority processing can be performed
by software using the above bits and flag.
Table 2.2.2 shows a list of interrupt bits for individual interrupt sources.
(1) Interrupt request bits
The interrupt request bits are allocated to the interrupt request register 1 (address 003C16 ) and
interrupt request register 2 (address 003D 16).
The occurrence of an interrupt request causes the corresponding interrupt request bit to be set to “1.”
The interrupt request bit is held in the “1” state until the interrupt is accepted. When the interrupt is
accepted, this bit is automatically cleared to “0.”
Each interrupt request bit can be set to “0” by software, but it cannot be set to “1” by software.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–19
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(2) Interrupt enable bits
The interrupt enable bits are allocated to the interrupt control register 1 (address 003E16) and the
interrupt control register 2 (address 003F 16).
The interrupt enable bits control the acceptance of the corresponding interrupt request.
When an interrupt enable bit is “0,” the corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt
request occurs when this bit is “0,” the corresponding interrupt request bit is only set to “1” and this
interrupt is not accepted.
In this case, unless the interrupt request bit is set to “0” by software, the interrupt request bit remains
in the “1” state.
When an interrupt enable bit is “1,” the corresponding interrupt is enabled. If an interrupt request
occurs when this bit is “1,” this interrupt is accepted (at interrupt disable flag = “0”).
Each interrupt enable bit can be set to “0” or “1” by software.
(3) Interrupt disable flag
The interrupt disable flag is allocated to bit 2 of the processor status register. The interrupt disable
flag controls the acceptance of interrupt request.
When this flag is “1,” the acceptance of interrupt requests is disabled. When the flag is “0,” the
acceptance of interrupt requests is enabled. This flag is set to “1” with the SEI instruction and is set
to “0” with the CLI instruction.
When a main routine branches to an interrupt processing routine, this flag is automatically set to “1,”
so that multiple interrupts are disabled. To use multiple interrupts, set this flag to “0” with the CLI
instruction within the interrupt processing routine. Figure 2.2.6 shows an example of multiple interrupts.
Table 2.2.2 List of interrupt bits for individual interrupt sources
Interrupt request bit
Interrupt sources
Address
Bit
INT0
003C16
b0
003C16
INT1
b1
003C16
Serial I/O1 receive
b2
003C16
Serial I/O1 transmit
b3
003C16
Timer X
b4
003C16
Timer Y
b5
003C16
Timer 2
b6
003C16
Timer 3
b7
003D16
CNTR0
b0
003D16
CNTR1
b1
003D16
Timer 1
b2
003D16
b3
INT2
003D
16
b4
INT3
Key input
003D16
b5
Serial I/O2
003D16
b6
2–20
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Interrupt enable bit
Address
003E16
003E16
003E16
003E16
003E16
003E16
003E16
003E16
003F16
003F16
003F16
003F16
003F16
003F16
003F16
Bit
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
Interrupt request
Nesting
Reset
Time
Main routine
I=1
C1 = 0, C2 = 0
Interrupt
request 1
C1 = 1
I=0
Interrupt 1
I=1
Interrupt
request 2
Multipul interrupt
C2 = 1
I=0
Interrupt 2
I=1
RTI
I=0
RTI
I=0
I : Interrupt disable flag
C1 : Interrupt enable bit of interrupt 1
C2 : Interrupt enable bit of interrupt 2
: They are set automatically.
: Set by software.
Fig. 2.2.6 Example of multiple interrupts
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–21
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.3 Related registers
Figure 2.2.7 shows memory allocation of interrupt-related registers. Each of these registers is described
below.
Address
003A16
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE)
003B16
003C16
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1)
003D16
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2)
003E16
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1)
003F16
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)
Fig. 2.2.7 Memory allocation of interrupt-related registers
(1) Interrupt edge selection register (address 003A 16)
The interrupt edge selection register selects an active edge of each INT interrupt.
Bit 0 to bit 3 select active edges of INT 0 –INT 3 pins inputs. In the “0” state, the falling edge ( ) of
the corresponding pin input is active. In the “1” state, the rising edge ( ) of the corresponding pin
input is active. Figure 2.2.8 shows the structure of the interrupt edge selection register.
Interrupt edge selection register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) [Address 3A16]
B
Name
Functions
0 : Falling edge active
1 : Rising edge active
0 : Falling edge active
1 : Rising edge active
INT0 interrupt edge
selection bit
1 INT1 interrupt edge
selection bit
0 : Falling edge active
2 INT2 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
0 : Falling edge active
3 INT3 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
Nothing
is
allocated.
These
bits cannot be
4
to written to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
0
Fig. 2.2.8 Structure of interrupt edge selection register
2–22
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0 ×
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(2) Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) and interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2)
The interrupt request register 1 (address 003C16) and the interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16)
indicate whether an interrupt request has occurred or not.
Figure 2.2.9 shows the structure of the interrupt request register 1 and Figure 2.2.10 shows the
structure of the interrupt request register 2.
The occurrence of an interrupt request causes the corresponding bit to be set to “1.” This interrupt
request bit is automatically cleared to “0” by the acceptance of the interrupt request.
The interrupt request bits can be set to “0” by software, but it cannot be set to “1” by software.
The occurrence of each interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bits (refer to the next item).
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) [Address 3C16]
B
Name
Functions
0
INT0 interrupt request
bit
INT1 interrupt request
bit
Serial I/O1 receive
interrupt request bit
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Serial I/O1 transmit
interrupt request bit
Timer X interrupt
request bit
Timer Y interrupt
request bit
Timer 2 interrupt
request bit
Timer 3 interrupt
request bit
At reset R W
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
✽ : “0” can be set by software, but “1” cannot be set.
Fig. 2.2.9 Structure of interrupt request register 1
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–23
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) [Address 3D16]
B
Name
CNTR0 interrupt
request bit
1 CNTR1 interrupt
request bit
0
At reset R W
Functions
0 : No interrupt request issued
✽
0
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
Timer
1
interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
2
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
3 INT2 interrupt
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
4 INT3 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
Key
input
interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
5
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
6 Serial I/O2
interrupt request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
7 Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written
to and is fixed to “0” at reading.
✽ : “0” can be set by software, but “1” cannot be set.
Fig. 2.2.10 Structure of interrupt request register 2
2–24
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
0 ×
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(3) Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) and interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)
The interrupt control register 1 (address 003E 16) and the interrupt control register 2 (address 003F 16)
control each interrupt request source.
Figure 2.2.11 shows the structure of the interrupt control register 1 and Figure 2.2.12 shows the
structure of the interrupt control register 2.
When an interrupt enable bit is “0,” the corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt
request occurs when this bit is “0,” the corresponding interrupt request bit is only set to “1,” and the
interrupt request is not accepted.
When an interrupt enable bit is “1,” the corresponding interrupt request is enabled. If an interrupt
request occurs when this bit is “1,” the interrupt request is accepted (at interrupt disable flag = “0”).
Each interrupt enable bit can be set to “0” or “1” by software.
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) [Address 3E16]
B
0
1
2
Name
INT0 interrupt enable
bit
INT1 interrupt enable
bit
Serial I/O1 receive
interrupt enable bit
3 Serial I/O1 transmit
interrupt enable bit
4 Timer X interrupt
enable bit
5 Timer Y interrupt
enable bit
Timer
2 interrupt
6
enable bit
7
Timer 3 interrupt
enable bit
Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Fig. 2.2.11 Structure of interrupt control register 1
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–25
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) [Address 3F16]
B
Name
0 CNTR0 interrupt
enable bit
1 CNTR1 interrupt
enable bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
Timer 1 interrupt
enable bit
INT2 interrupt enable
bit
INT3 interrupt
enable bit
Key input interrupt
enable bit
Serial I/O2
interrupt enable bit
Fix this bit to “0.”
Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
Fig. 2.2.12 Structure of interrupt control register 2
2–26
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(4) Processor status register
The processor status register is an 8-bit register. Figure 2.2.13 shows the structure of the processor
status register. Bit 2 related to an interrupt is described below.
■Interrupt disable flag : bit 2
The interrupt disable flag controls the acceptance of interrupt requests except BRK instruction interrupt. When this flag is “1,” the acceptance of an interrupt request is disabled. When this flag is “0,”
the acceptance of an interrupt request is enabled. This flag is set to “1” with the SEI instruction and
is set to “0” with the CLI instruction.
When a main routine branches to an interrupt processing routine, this flag is automatically set to “1,”
so that multiple interrupts are disabled. To use multiple interrupts, set this flag to “0” with the CLI
instruction within the interrupt processing routine.
Processor status register
b7
Undefined
b2
1
b0
Undefined
Processor status register (PS)
B
b7
Flag name
0
C : Carry flag
1
Z : Zero flag
2
I : Interrupt disable flag
3
D : Decimal mode flag
4
B : Break flag
5
T : Index X mode flag
6
V : Overflow flag
7
N : Negative flag
b0
indicates initial value immediately after reset
Fig. 2.2.13 Structure of processor status register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–27
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.4 INT interrupts
The INT interrupt requests occur by detecting a level change of each INT pin (INT0 –INT 3).
(1) Active edge selection
As an active edge, falling edge ( ) detection or rising edge ( ) detection can be selected by bits
0 to 3 of the interrupt edge selection register (address 003A16 ).
In the “0” state, the falling edge of the corresponding pin is detected. In the “1” state, the rising edge
of the corresponding pin is detected.
The pins INT 0 to INT 3 are also used as I/O ports P4 2 , P43, P5 7 , and P6 0, but no register to switch
between INT pin and I/O port is available. When the port is an input port, the active edges of the port
are always detected. Accordingly, when using ports P4 2 , P4 3, P5 7 and P6 0 as input ports, put the
corresponding INT interrupt into the disabled state. If this interrupt is not disabled, an INT interrupt is
caused by pin level change, so that the program runs away.
Figure 2.2.14 shows the structure of the interrupt edge selection register.
Interrupt edge selection register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) [Address 3A16]
B
Name
Functions
0 : Falling edge active
INT0 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
0
: Falling edge active
1 INT1 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
0 : Falling edge active
2 INT2 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
0 : Falling edge active
3 INT3 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
4 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
to written to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
0
Fig. 2.2.14 Structure of interrupt edge selection register
2–28
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0 ×
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.5 Key input interrupt
The Key input interrupt request occurs when an “L” level voltage is applied to the pin set for the input mode
of the port P2.
For interrupt sources except the INT interrupts and the Key input interrupt, refer to “CHAPTER 1”.
(1) Connection example when the Key input interrupt is used
When using the Key input interrupt, after set ports P20 to P23 for the input mode, configure an “L” level
valid key-matrix.
Figure 2.2.15 shows a connection example when the key input interrupt is used, and a port P2 block
diagram. In the connection example in Figure 2.2.15, an Key input interrupt request is caused by
pressing the key corresponding to one of ports P20 to P2 3.
Port PXx “L” level output
PULL register A, b2 = “1”
✽1
✽2
Port P27
Port P2 direction register, b7 = “1”
latch
✽1
✽2
Port P26
Port P2 direction register, b6 = “1”
latch
✽1
✽2
Port P25
Port P2 direction register, b5 = “1”
latch
✽1
✽2
Port P24
Port P2 direction register, b4 = “1”
latch`
✽1
✽2
Port P23
Port P2 direction register, b3 = “0”
latch
P27
output
P26
output
P25
output
P24
output
P23
input
✽1
✽2
Port P22
Port P2 direction register, b2 = “0”
latch
✽1
✽2
Port P21
Port P2 direction register, b1 = “0”
latch
✽1
✽2
Port P20
Port P2 direction register, b0 = “0”
latch
P22
input
P21
input
P20
input
Port P2 input
reading circuit
Key input interrupt request
✽1: P-channel transistor for pull-up
✽2: CMOS output buffer
Fig. 2.2.15 Connection example when key input interrupt is used, and port P2 block diagram
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–29
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
(2) Set values of Key input interrupt-related registers
When using the Key input interrupt, set the following:
●Port P2 direction register (address 000516)
●Bit 2 of PULL register A (address 0016 16)
●Bit 5 of interrupt request register 2 (address 003D 16) = “0”
●Bit 5 of interrupt control register 2 (address 003F 16) (Note) = “1”
Figure 2.2.16 shows the setting values (corresponding to Figure 2.2.15) of the Key input interruptrelated registers.
Note: Fix bit 7 of the interrupt control register 2 (address 003F 16) to “0.”
b7
b0
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Port P2 direction register [Address 0516]
Bits corresponding to P20–P27
0 : Input port
1 : Output port
b7
b0
1
PULL register A [Address 1616]
P20–P27 pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
b7
b0
0
Interrupt request register 2 [Address 3D16]
Key input interrupt request bit
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
b7
0
b0
1
Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16]
Key input interrupt enable bit
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
: “0” or “1.”
Fig. 2.2.16 Setting values (corresponding to Figure 2.2.15) of key input interrupt-related registers
2–30
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.2 Interrupts
2.2.6 Notes on use
When using interrupts, note the following.
(1) Register setting
■Fix bit 7 of the interrupt control register 2 (address 003F16) to “0.” Nothing is allocated for this bit,
however, do not write “1” to it.
■When using I/O ports P42, P43, P57 and P60 as input ports, put the INT interrupts corresponding to
each port into the disabled state.
■When the active edges of the following interrupts are switched, the corresponding interrupt request
bit may be set to “1.” To avoid accepting an interrupt request, we recommend the register setting
example shown in Figure 2.2.17.
●INT 0 interrupt to INT 3 interrupt
●CNTR 0 interrupt and CNTR 1 interrupt
➀ Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to “0”
➁ Set the interrupt active edge
➂ Set the corresponding interrupt request bit to “0”
➃ Set the corresponding interrupt enable bit to “1”
Fig. 2.2.17 Register setting example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–31
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.1 Explanation of timer X operations
Timer X has 4 modes of operation.
Operation in each mode is described below.
(1) Timer mode
Operation in the timer mode is described below.
①Start of count operation
Immediately after reset release, the timer X stop control bit is in the “0” state. For this reason, the
count operation is automatically started after reset release.
The value of the timer X counter (referred as “the X counter”) is decremented by 1 each time a count
source is input.
The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN )/16 clock).
➁Reload operation
The X counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the X counter reaches “00 16.”
At this time, the value of the timer X latch (referred as “the X latch”) is transferred (reloaded) to the
X counter.
➂Interrupt operation
An interrupt request occurs at the X counter underflow. At the same time, the timer X interrupt
request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer X interrupt enable
bit.
An interrupt request occurs each time the counter underflows. In other words, an interrupt request
occurs every “the X counter initial value + 1” count of the rising edge of the count source.
➃Stop of count operation
By writing “1” to the timer X stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped.
The count operation is continued until “1” is set to the timer X stop control bit.
Figure 2.3.1 shows a timer mode operation example.
2–32
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period
Count period
T(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the X counter initial value + 1)
Timer mode operation example
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n : The X counter initial value
Writing “1” Writing “0”
Timer X stop
control bit
Value of timer X counter
Count
source
RL
RL Count stop
RL
RL
n16
Count restart
UF
UF
UF
UF
000016
Time
T
Timer X interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
1
Timer X interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the timer X interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the timer X interrupt request when the timer X interrupt enable
bit is “1.”
Fig. 2.3.1 Timer mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–33
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Pulse output mode
The operation in the pulse output mode is the same as that in the timer mode, besides, which is added
a pulse output operation. In this mode, a pulse whose polarity is reversed at every the X counter
underflow is output from the P54 /CNTR0 pin.
Operation in the pulse output mode is described below.
①Start of count operation
Immediately after reset release, the timer X stop control bit is in the “0” state. For this reason, the
count operation is automatically started after reset release.
The value of the X counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN )/16 clock).
➁Reload operation
The X counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the X counter reaches “00 16.”
At this time, the value of the X latch is transferred (reloaded) to the X counter.
➂Pulse output
A pulse whose polarity is reversed every the X counter underflow is output from the P54/CNTR0 pin.
As a level at a start of pulse output, a “H” or “L” is selected by the CNTR 0 active edge switch bit.
At the time when the pulse output mode is selected by the timer X operating mode bits, a pulse
output is started.
➃Interrupt operation
■Counter underflow
An interrupt request occurs at the X counter underflow. At the same time, the timer X interrupt
request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer X interrupt enable
bit.
■Edge of pulse output
At the edge of the pulse output from the P5 4/CNTR0 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same
time, the CNTR0 interrupt request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by
the CNTR0 interrupt enable bit.
As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR0 active edge
switch bit.
➄Stop of count operation
By writing “1” to the timer X stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped.
The count operation is continued until “1” is set to the timer X stop control bit.
Figure 2.3.2 shows a pulse output mode operation example.
2–34
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period
Count period
T(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the X counter initial value + 1)
Pulse output mode operation example
Value of timer X counter
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n : The X counter initial value
Timer X
stop control
bit
Count
source
RL
Writing “1” Writing “0”
RL
RL Count stop
RL
n16
Count restart
UF
UF
000016
Select pulse
output mode
UF
UF
Time
T
AAA
AAA
AAA
Programmable
P54/CNTR0 pin
I/O port
CNTR0 active
edge switch bit
CNTR0 interrupt
request bit
1
1
CNTR0 interrupt
enable bit
Timer X interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
1
Timer X interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the timer X interrupt request bit or the CNTR0 interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the timer X interrupt request and the CNTR0 interrupt request when the
respective interrupt enable bits are “1.”
✽ : When the CNTR0 active edge switch bit is “1” ;
•The reverse-polarity pulse of above pulse is output.
•The CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the output pulse.
Fig. 2.3.2 Pulse output mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–35
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(3) Event counter mode
The operation in the event counter mode is the same as that in the timer mode except that the input
signal to the P5 4 /CNTR 0 pin is used as a count source.
Operation in the event counter mode is described below.
①Start of count operation
Immediately after reset release, the timer X stop control bit is in the “0” state. For this reason, the
count operation is automatically started after reset release.
The value of the X counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR0 active edge
switch bit.
➁Reload operation
The X counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the X counter reaches “00 16.”
At this time, the value of the X latch is transferred (reloaded) to the X counter.
➂Interrupt operation
■Counter underflow
An interrupt request occurs at the X counter underflow. At the same time, the timer X interrupt
request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer X interrupt enable
bit.
■Edge of count source
At the edge of the count source input from the P54/CNTR0 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the
same time, the CNTR0 interrupt request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled
by the CNTR 0 interrupt enable bit.
As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR0 active edge
switch bit.
➃Stop of count operation
By writing “1” to the timer X stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped.
The count operation is continued until “1” is set to the timer X stop control bit.
Figure 2.3.3 shows an event counter mode operation example.
2–36
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period
Count period
T(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the X counter initial value + 1)
Event counter mode operation example
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n
: The X counter initial value
Writing “1” Writing “0”
Timer X stop
control bit
Value of timer X counter
Count source
(P54/CNTR0 pin)
RL
RL
RL Count stop
RL
n16
Count restart
UF
UF
UF
UF
000016
Time
T
CNTR0 active
edge switch bit
CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at falling edge of the count source
CNTR0 interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
1
1
CNTR0 interrupt
enable bit
Timer X interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
1
Timer X interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the timer X interrupt request bit or the CNTR0 interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the timer X interrupt request and the CNTR0 interrupt request when the
respective interrupt enable bits are “1.”
✽ : When the CNTR0 active edge switch bit is “1” ;
•Falling edge of the count source is valid.
•The CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the output pulse.
Fig. 2.3.3 Event counter mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–37
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(4) Pulse width measurement mode
In the pulse width measurement mode, the width (“H” or “L” level) of a pulse input from the P5 4/CNTR0
pin is measured.
Operation in the pulse width measurement mode is described below.
①Count operation
Immediately after reset, the timer X stop control bit is in the “0” state. In this state, a count operation
is continued in the period in which the measurement level is input to the P5 4/CNTR 0 pin.
The value of the X counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN )/16 clock).
➁Reload operation
The X counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the X counter reaches “0016.”
At this time, the value of the X latch is transferred (reloaded) to the X counter.
➂Pulse width measurement
As a pulse measurement period, a “H” or “L” is selected by the CNTR 0 active edge switch bit.
The difference between the initial value of the X counter and the X counter value at counter stop
is a measured pulse width.
A reload operation by reading the count value is not performed automatically. Accordingly, to continue the measurement, set the initial value anew by software.
When reading a value from the timer X, read both registers in order of the timer X (high–order) and
the timer X (low–order).
➃Interrupt operation
■Edge of pulse measured
At the edge of the pulse input from the P54/CNTR 0 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same
time, the CNTR0 interrupt request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by
the CNTR0 interrupt enable bit.
The CNTR0 active edge switch bit specifies an active edge. When “H” level width is measured, the
falling edge ( ) is active, when “L” level width is measured, the rising edge ( ) is active.
■Counter underflow
An interrupt request occurs at the X counter underflow. At the same time, the timer X interrupt
request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by using the timer X interrupt
enable bit.
Figure 2.3.4 shows a pulse width measurement mode operation example.
2–38
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Pulse width
Pulse width H(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the X counter initial value – the X counter value at count stop)
Pulse width measurment mode operation example
•n : The X counter initial value
•m: The X counter value at count stop
Timer X stop
coutrol bit
Count
source
P54/CNTR0 pin
Value of timer X counter
CNTR0 active
edge switch bit
Set initial value
to counter
Set initial value
to counter
2
Count start
2
Count start
n16
Count stop
m16
000016
H Time
H
CNTR0 interrupt
request bit
1
CNTR0 interrupt
enable bit
Timer X interrupt
request bit
Timer X interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the CNTR0 interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the CNTR0 interrupt request when the CNTR0 interrupt enable bit
is “1.”
2 : Set initial value to the timer X when timer X write control bit is “0.”
✽ : When the CNTR0 active edge switch bit is “1” ;
•“L” level width of the input pulse is measured.
•The CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the input pulse.
Fig. 2.3.4 Pulse width measurement mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–39
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(5) Real time port control
The real time port control is the function which
outputs preset data from the real time ports in
synchronization with an underflow of the X counter. Table 2.3.1 shows real time ports and bits
for storing data. This real time port control function is available in every mode.
A data output from the real time port is started
at setting the real time port control bit to “1”
(when setting “1” to the real time port control
bit of the timer X mode register, use the SEB
instruction).
When the data for real time port is rewritten,
the rewritten values are output at the first
underflow of the X counter after rewritting.
Figure 2.3.5 shows a timer mode operation
example with the real time port function.
The real time port is also used as port P60 and
P6 1 . When using the real time port, set the
corresponding bit of the port P6 direction register (address 000D16) to “1” for the output mode.
2–40
Table 2.3.1 Real time ports and bits for storing data
Real time port
RTP0 (P60)
RTP1 (P61)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Bit for storing data
Bit 2 of timer X mode register
Bit 3 of timer X mode register
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Timer mode operation example with real time port function
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n : The X counter initial value
Timer X stop
control bit
Value of timer X counter
Count
source
RL
RL
RL
RL
n16
UF
UF
UF
UF
000016
Time
1
Real time port
control bit
Rewrite
Rewrite
Bit 2 of timer X
mode register
P60/INT3/RTP0 pin
Programmable
I/O port
Bit 3 of timer X
mode register
Rewrite
Rewrite
Rewrite
P61/RTP1 pin
Programmable
I/O port
1 : In the case that following are set immediately after reset release, “0” is output
from pins P60/INT3/RTP0 and P62/RTP1.
•Set ports P60 and P61 for the output mode.
•Set the real time port control bit to “1.”
Fig. 2.3.5 Timer mode operation example with real time port function
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–41
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.2 Explanation of timer Y operations
Timer Y has 4 modes of operation.
Operation in each mode is described below.
(1) Timer Mode
Operation in the timer mode is described below.
①Start of count operation
Immediately after reset release, the timer Y stop control bit is in the “0” state. For this reason, the
count operation is automatically started after reset release.
The value of the timer Y counter (referred as “the Y counter”) is decremented by 1 each time a count
source is input.
The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN )/16 clock).
➁Reload operation
The Y counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the Y counter reaches “0016.”
At this time, the value of the timer Y latch (referred as “the Y latch”) is transferred (reloaded) to the
Y counter.
➂Interrupt operation
An interrupt request occurs at the Y counter underflow. At the same time, the timer Y interrupt
request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer Y interrupt enable
bit.
An interrupt request occurs each time the counter underflows. In other words, an interrupt request
occurs every “the Y counter initial value + 1” count of the rising edge of the count source.
➃Stop of count operation
By writing “1” to the timer Y stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped.
The count operation is continued until “1” is set to the timer Y stop control bit.
Figure 2.3.6 shows a timer mode operation example.
2–42
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period
Count period
T(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the Y counter initial value + 1)
Timer mode operation example
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n : The Y counter initial value
Writing “1” Writing “0”
Timer Y stop
control bit
Value of timer Y counter
Count
source
RL
RL Count stop
RL
RL
n16
Count restart
UF
UF
UF
UF
000016
Time
T
Timer Y interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
1
Timer Y interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the timer Y interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the timer Y interrupt request when the timer Y interrupt enable
bit is “1.”
Fig. 2.3.6 Timer mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–43
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Period measurement mode
In the period measurement mode, the period of a pulse input from the P5 5/CNTR 1 pin is measured.
Operation in the period measurement mode is described below.
①Start of count operation
Immediately after reset release, the timer Y stop control bit is in the “0” state. For this reason, the
count operation is automatically started after reset release.
The value of the Y counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
The count source is f(XIN)/16 clock (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN )/16 clock).
➁Reload operation
At the edge of the pulse input from the P5 5 /CNTR 1 pin, the value of the Y latch is transferred
(reloaded) to the Y counter. The count value immediately before reload is held until it is read out
once after reload.
As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR1 active edge
switch bit.
The value of the Y latch is also reloaded at the Y counter underflow.
➂Period measurement
As a period measurement duration, the following is selected by the CNTR1 active edge switch
bit (bit 6) : Duration from the falling edge to the falling edge (bit 6 = “0”)
Duration from the rising edge to the rising edge (bit 6 = “1”)
The difference between the count value at an active edge input and that immediately before reload
is a measured period.
➃Interrupt operation
■Edge of input pulse
At the edge of the pulse input from the P5 5/CNTR 1 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same
time, the CNTR1 interrupt request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by
the CNTR1 interrupt enable bit.
As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR1 active edge
switch bit.
■Counter underflow
An interrupt request occurs at the Y counter underflow. At the same time, the timer Y interrupt
request bit is set to “1.”
The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer Y interrupt enable bit.
Figure 2.3.7 shows a period measurement mode operation example.
2–44
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Pulse period
T(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the Y counter initial value – the Y counter value immediately before reload )
Pulse period
Period measurement mode operation example
•RL : Reload
•n
: The Y counter initial value
•m : The Y counter value immediately before reload
Timer Y stop
control bit
Count
source
P55/CNTR1 pin
Value of timer Y counter
CNTR1 active
edge switch bit
RL
RL
RL
n16
m16
000016
T
T
Time
CNTR1 interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
CNTR1 interrupt
enable bit
Timer Y interrupt
request bit
Timer Y interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the CNTR1 interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the CNTR1 interrupt request when the CNTR1 interrupt enable
bit is “1.”
✽ : When the CNTR1 active edge switch bit is “1” ;
•From the rising edge to the rising edge of the input pulse is measured.
•The CNTR1 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the input pulse.
Fig. 2.3.7 Period measurement mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–45
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(3) Event counter mode
The operation in the event counter mode is the same as that in the timer mode except that the input
signal to the P5 5 /CNTR 1 pin is used as a count source.
Operation in the event counter mode is described below.
①Start of count operation
Immediately after reset release, the timer Y stop control bit is in the “0” state. For this reason, the
count operation is automatically started after reset release.
The value of the Y counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR1 active edge
switch bit.
➁Reload operation
The Y counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the Y counter reaches “00 16.”
At this time, the value of the Y latch is transferred (reloaded) to the Y counter.
➂Interrupt operation
■Counter underflow
An interrupt request occurs at the Y counter underflow. At the same time, the timer Y interrupt
request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer Y interrupt enable
bit.
■Edge of count source
At the edge of the count source input from the P55/CNTR1 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the
same time, the CNTR1 interrupt request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled
by the CNTR 1 interrupt enable bit.
As an active edge, the falling edge ( ) or rising edge ( ) is specified by the CNTR1 active edge
switch bit.
➃Stop of count operation
By writing “1” in the timer Y stop control bit by software, the count operation is stopped.
The count operation is continued until “1” is set in the timer Y stop control bit.
Figure 2.3.8 shows an event counter mode operation example.
2–46
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Count period
Count period
T(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the Y counter initial value + 1)
Event counter mode operation example
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n
: The Y counter initial value
Writing “1” Writing “0”
Timer Y stop
control bit
Value of timer Y counter
Count source
(P55/CNTR1 pin)
RL
RL Count stop
RL
RL
n16
Count restart
UF
UF
UF
UF
000016
Time
T
CNTR1 active
edge switch bit
CNTR0 interrupt request occurs at falling edge of the count source
CNTR1 interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
1
1
CNTR1 interrupt
enable bit
Timer Y interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
1
Timer Y interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the timer Y interrupt request bit or the CNTR1 interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the timer Y interrupt request and the CNTR1 interrupt request when the
respective interrupt enable bits are “1.”
✽ : When the CNTR1 active edge switch bit is “1” ;
•Falling edge of the count source is valid.
•The CNTR1 interrupt request occurs at the rising edge of the output pulse.
Fig. 2.3.8 Event counter mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–47
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(4) Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
In the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, the width (“H” and “L” level) of pulses input
from the P5 5/CNTR 1 pin are continuously measured.
With the exception that reload and an interrupt request occur at both edges of pulses input from the
P55/CNTR1 pin, the operation in the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode is the same as
that in the period measurement mode.
The pulse width HL continuously measurement mode of operation is described below.
①Start of count operation
Immediately after reset release, the timer Y stop control bit is in the “0” state. For this reason, the
count operation is automatically started after reset release.
The value of the Y counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
The count source is f(XIN)/16 (low-speed mode ; f(XCIN)/16).
➁Reload operation
At both edges of the pulse input from the P55 /CNTR 1 pin, the value of the timer Y is transferred
(reloaded) to the Y counter. The count value immediately before reload is held until it is read out
once after reload.
The value of the Y latch is also reloaded at the Y counter underflow.
➂Pulse width measurement
The difference between the count value at an active edge input and that immediately before reload
is a measured pulse width.
When reading a value from the timer Y, read both registers in order of the timer Y (high–order) and
the timer Y (low–order).
➃Interrupt operation
■Edge of input pulse
At both edges of pulses input from the P55 /CNTR 1 pin, an interrupt request occurs. At the same
time, the CNTR1 interrupt request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by
the CNTR1 interrupt enable bit.
■Counter underflow
An interrupt request occurs at the Y counter underflow. At the same time, the timer Y interrupt
request bit is set to “1.”
The occurrence of an interrupt is controlled by the timer Y interrupt enable bit.
Figure 2.3.9 shows a pulse width HL continuously measurement mode operation example.
2–48
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Pulse width
Pulse width
H(s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the Y counter initial value – the Y counter value immediately
before reload)
Operation example in pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
•RL : Reload
•n : The Y counter initial value
•m : The Y counter value immediately before reload
Timer Y stop
control bit
Count
source
P55/CNTR1 pin
Value of timer Y counter
CNTR1 active
edge switch bit
RL
RL
RL
n16
m16
000016
H
H
Time
CNTR1 interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
CNTR1 interrupt
enable bit
Timer Y interrupt
request bit
Timer Y interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the CNTR1 interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the CNTR1 interrupt request when the CNTR1 interrupt enable
bit is “1.”
Fig. 2.3.9 Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode operation example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–49
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.3 Related registers
Figure 2.3.10 shows the memory allocation of the timer X- and timer Y-related registers. Each of these
registers is described below.
Address
000B16
Port P5 direction register (P5D)
000D16
Port P6 direction register (P6D)
002016
Timer X (low-order) (TXL)
002116
Timer X (high-order) (TXH)
002216
Timer Y (low-order) (TYL)
002316
Timer Y (high-order) (TYH)
002716
Timer X mode register (TXM)
002816
Timer Y mode register(TYM)
003C16
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1)
003D16
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2)
003E16
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1)
003F16
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)
Fig. 2.3.10 Memory allocation of timer X- and timer Y-related registers
2–50
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(1) Port P5 direction register (P5D)
The port P5 direction register (address 000B 16) selects the I/O direction of port P5. Figure 2.3.11
shows the structure of the port P5 direction register.
The CNTR 0 pin is also used as P5 4, while the CNTR 1 pin is also used as P5 5.
■Timer X
In the pulse output mode, set bit 4 to “1” for the output mode.
In the event counter mode or the pulse width measurement mode, set bit 4 to “0” for the input mode.
■Timer Y
In the period measurement mode or the event counter mode or the pulse width HL continuously
measurement mode, set bit 5 to “0” to set it for the input mode.
Port P5 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P5 direction register (P5D) [Address 0B16]
B
Name
0 Port P5 direction
register
1
Functions
0 : Port P50 input mode
1 : Port P50 output mode
0 : Port P51 input mode
1 : Port P51 output mode
0 : Port P52 input mode
1 : Port P52 output mode
0 : Port P53 input mode
1 : Port P53 output mode
0 : Port P54 input mode
1 : Port P54 output mode
0 : Port P55 input mode
1 : Port P55 output mode
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
0 : Port P56 input mode
1 : Port P56 output mode
0 : Port P57 input mode
0
7
1 : Port P57 output mode
Note : Port P5 direction register cannot be read out.
×
2
3
4
5
6
P57
INT2
P56
TOUT
At reset R W
×
0
P55
P54
P53
CNTR1 CNTR0 SRDY2
P52
SCLK2
P51
SOUT2
×
P50
SIN2
Fig. 2.3.11 Structure of port P5 direction register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–51
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Port P6 direction register (P6D)
The port P6 direction register (address 000D 16) selects the I/O direction of port P6. Figure 2.3.12
shows the structure of the port P6 direction register.
■Timer X
The real time port RTP 0 pin is also used as P6 0 , while the RTP1 pin is also used as P6 1.
To use as the RTP 0 pin, set bit 0 to “1” for the output mode. To use as the RTP1 pin, set bit 1 to “1”
for the output mode.
Port P6 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P6 direction register (P6D) [Address 0D16]
B
Name
Functions
0 Port P6 direction
register
1
0 : Port P60 input mode
1 : Port P60 output mode
0 : Port P61 input mode
1 : Port P61 output mode
2 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
to written to and be read out.
7
At reset R W
×
0
Note : Port P6 direction register cannot be read out.
P61
RTP1
P60
RTP0
INT3
Fig. 2.3.12 Structure of port P6 direction register
2–52
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
×
0
× ×
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(3) Timer X latch and timer X counter (TXL and TXH)
The timer X latch (referred as “the X latch”) and the timer X counter (referred as “the X counter”)
consist of 16 bits in a combination of high-order (address 002116) and low-order (address 002016 ).
The X latch and the X counter are allocated at the same address. To access the X latch and the X
counter, access both the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order).
■Read
When the timer X (high-order) and the timer X (low-order) are read out, the value of the X counter
(count value) are read out. Read both registers in the order of the timer X (high-order) and the timer
X (low-order).
Do not write any value to the timer X (high-order) and the timer X (low-order) before the timer X (loworder) has been read out. In this case, timer X will not operate normally.
■Write
When a value is written to the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order), the value is set in the
X latch and the X counter at the same time. Writing to the X latch only can be selected by the timer
X write control bit (refer to “2.3.3 Related registers, (5) Timer X mode register”). Write the values
to both registers in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order).
Do not read timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order) before the timer X (high-order) has been
written. In this case, timer X will not operate normally.
●Timer X latch
The X latch is a register which holds the value to be transferred (reloaded) automatically to the X
counter as the initial value of the X counter at the X counter underflow. Figure 2.3.13 shows the
structure of the timer X latch.
The contents of the X latch cannot be read out.
●Timer X latch
Timer X (high-order, low-order)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer X (high-order, low-order) (TXH, TXL) [Address 2116, 2016]
B
Functions
0 •Set “000016 to FFFF16” as timer X count value.
to •Write high-order byte of setting value to TXH,
7 and low-order byte to TXL, respectively.
•The values of TXH and TXL are set to the
respective X latches and transferred automatically to the respective X counters at the
X counter underflow.
At reset R W
1
×
Note : Write both registers in the order of TXL and TXH.
Fig. 2.3.13 Structure of timer X latch
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–53
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
●Timer X counter
The X counter counts the count source. Figure 2.3.14 shows the structure of the timer X counter.
The contents of the X counter are decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
The division ratio of the counter is represented by the following expression.
Division ratio of the X counter =
1
the X counter initial value + 1
●Timer X counter
Timer X (high-order, low-order)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer X (high-order, low-order) (TXH, TXL) [Address 2116, 2016]
B
Functions
0 •Set “000016 to FFFF16” as timer X count value.
to •The value of the X counter is decremented by
7 1 each time a count source is input.
•When the timer X write control bit is “0,” the
values of TXH and TXL are set to the respective X latches at the same time.
•The values of each X counter are read out by
reading the respective timer Xs.
At reset R W
1
Notes 1 : Write both registers in the order of TXL and TXH.
2 : Read both registers in the order of TXH and TXL.
Fig. 2.3.14 Structure of timer X counter
2–54
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(4) Timer Y latch and timer Y counter (TYL and TYH)
The timer Y latch (referred as “the Y latch”) and the timer Y counter (referred as “the Y counter”)
consist of 16 bits in a combination of high-order (address 002316) and low-order (address 002216 ).
The Y latch and Y counter are allocated at the same address. To access the Y latch and the Y
counter, access both the timer Y (low-order) and the timer Y (high-order).
■Read
When the timer Y (high-order and low-order) are read out, the value of the Y counter (count value)
are read out. Read both registers in the order of the timer Y (high-order) and the timer Y (low-order).
Do not write any value to the timer Y (high-order and low-order) before the timer Y (low-order) has
been read out. In this case, timer Y will not operate normally.
■Write
When a value is written to the timer Y (low-order and high-order), the value is set in the Y latch and
the Y counter at the same time. Write the values to both registers in the order of the timer Y (loworder) and the timer Y (high-order).
Do not read the timer Y (low-order and high-order) before the timer Y (high-order) has been written.
In this case, timer Y will not operate normally.
●Timer Y latch
The Y latch is a register which holds the value to be transferred (reloaded) automatically to the Y
latch as the initial value of the Y counter at the Y counter underflow. Figure 2.3.15 shows the
structure of the timer Y latch.
Reload is performed at the following :
•At the Y counter underflow
•At the edge of the input pulse from the P5 5 /CNTR 1 pin
(period measurement mode/pulse width HL coutinuously measurement mode)
The contents of the Y latch cannot be read out.
●Timer Y latch
Timer Y (high-order, low-order)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer Y (high-order, low-order) (TYH, TYL) [Address 2316, 2216]
B
Functions
At reset R W
×
1
0 •Set “000016 to FFFF16” as timer Y count value.
to •Write high-order byte of setting value to TYH,
7 and low-order byte to TYL, respectively.
•The values of TYH and TYL are set to the
respective Y latches and transferred automatically to the respective Y counters at the
Y counter underflow.
Note : Write both registers in the order of TYL and TYH.
Fig. 2.3.15 Structure of timer Y latch
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–55
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
●Timer Y counter
The Y counter counts the count source. Figure 2.3.16 shows the structure of the timer Y counter.
The contents of the Y counter are decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
The division ratio of the counter is represented by the following expression.
1
the Y counter initial value + 1
Division ratio of the Y counter =
In the period measurement mode or the pulse width HL coutinuously measurement mode, the value
immediately before reload is held until it is read out once after reload. The count operation is coutinued.
●Timer Y counter
Timer Y (high-order, low-order)
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer Y (high-order, low-order) (TYH, TYL) [Address 2316, 2216]
B
Functions
At reset R W
1
0 •Set “000016 to FFFF16” as timer Y count value.
to •The value of the Y counter is decremented
7 by 1 each time a count source is input.
•The values of each Y counter are read out
by reading the respective timer Ys.
•The Y counter value immediately before
reload is held until it is read out once after
reload.
(period measurement mode/pulse width HL
continuously measurement mode)
Notes 1 : Write both registers in the order of TYL and TYH.
2 : Read both registers in the order of TYH and TYL.
Fig. 2.3.16 Structure of timer Y counter
2–56
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(5) Timer X mode register (TXM)
The timer X mode register (address 002716) consists of bits which select operation or control counting.
Figure 2.3.17 shows a structure of the timer X mode register. Each bit is described below.
Timer X mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer X mode register (TXM) [Address 2716]
B
Name
0
Timer X write
control bit
1
Real time port
control bit
2
3
4
5
6
Functions
0 : Write value in latch and
counter
1 : Write value in latch only
0 : Real time port function
invalid
1 : Real time port function
valid
P60 data for real time 0 : “L” level output
port
1 : “H” level output
P61 data for real time 0 : “L” level output
1 : “H” level output
port
b5b4
Timer X operating
0 0 : Timer mode
mode bits
0 1 : Pulse output mode
1 0 : Event counter mode
1 1 : Pulse width measurement
mode
CNTR0 active edge
•CNTR0 interrupt
switch bit
0 : Falling edge active
1 : Rising edge active
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•Pulse output mode
0 : Start at initial level “H” output
1 : Start at initial level “L” output
•Event counter mode
0 : Rising edge active
1 : Falling edge active
7
Timer X stop control
bit
•Pulse width measurement mode
0 : Measure “H” level width
1 : Measure “L” level width
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
0
Fig. 2.3.17 Structure of timer X mode register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–57
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Timer X write control bit (bit 0)
The timer X write control bit controls writing to the timer X (low-order and high-order).
When bit 0 is “0,” the value written in the timer X (low-order and high-order) are set into both the X
latch and the X counter at the same time.
When bit 0 is “1,” the value written in the timer X (low-order and high-order) is set into the X latch
only.
When a value is written into the X latch only, this rewritten value is transferred to the X counter at
the first X counter underflow after rewriting.
■Real time port control bit (bit 1)
The real time port control bit selects a function to output data from the real time port. When bit 1 is
“0,” this function is invalid. When the bit is “1,” this function is valid.
For an explanation of operations, refer to “2.3.1 Explanation of timer X operations, (5) Real time
port control.”
■Data for real time port (bit 2 and bit 3)
The data for real time port is the data to be output from the real time port.
■Timer X operating mode bits (bit 4 and bit 5)
The timer X operating mode bits select a operating mode of the timer X.
Table 2.3.2 shows the relation between the timer X operating mode bits and the operating modes.
For an explanation of each mode operation, refer to the section pertaining to the explanation of each
operation.
Table 2.3.2 Relation between timer X operating mode bits
and operating modes
b5
0
0
1
1
2–58
b4
0
1
0
1
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Operation mode
Timer mode
Pulse output mode
Event counter mode
Pulse width measurement mode
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■CNTR 0 active edge switch bit (bit 6)
The CNTR0 active edge switch bit has a function which selects an active edge of the CNTR0 interrupt,
and functions for each mode.
●CNTR0 interrupt
When bit 6 is “0,” the falling edge ( ) is active.
When bit 6 is “1,” the rising edge ( ) is active.
●Pulse output mode
In the pulse output mode, the initial level at the start of pulse output is selected.
When bit 6 is “0,” the initial level is “H.”
When bit 6 is “1,” the initial level is “L.”
●Event counter mode
An active edge of the count source is selected.
When bit 6 is “0,” the rising edge ( ) is active.
When bit 6 is “1,” the falling edge ( ) is active.
●Pulse width measurement mode
A duration of pulse width measured is selected.
When bit 6 is “0,” the “H” level width is measured.
When bit 6 is “1,” the “L” level width is measured.
■Timer X stop control bit (bit 7)
The timer X stop control bit controls the count operation of the timer X.
By writing “0” to bit 7, a count source is input to the X counter, so that a count operation is started.
As bit 7 is in the “0” state immediately after reset release, the count operation is automatically started
after reset release.
By writing “1” to bit 7, the input of count source to the X counter is stopped, so that the count operation
stops.
In the pulse width measurement mode, however, a count operation is performed only in the period in
which the measurement level is input to the P54/CNTR 0 pin when bit 7 is in the “0” state.
At read, this bit functions as a status bit to indicate the operating state (counting or stop) of the X
counter. When bit 7 is “0,” the counter is in the operating state. When bit 7 is “1,” the counter is in
the stop state.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–59
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(6) Timer Y Mode Register (TYM)
The timer Y mode register (address 002816) consists of bits which select operation or control counting.
Figure 2.3.18 shows a structure of the timer Y mode register. Each bit is described below.
Timer Y mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer Y mode register (TYM) [Address 2816]
B
Name
Functions
At reset R W
0 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written
0 ×
0
to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
3
4 Timer Y operating
mode bits
5
6 CNTR1 active edge
switch bit
b5b4
0 0 : Timer mode
0 1 : Period measurement mode
1 0 : Event counter mode
1 1 : Pulse width HL continuously
measurement mode
•CNTR1 interrupt
0 : Falling edge active
1 : Rising edge active
0
0
0
•Period measurement mode
0 : Measure falling edge to
falling edge
1 : Measure rising edge to
rising edge
•Event counter mode
0 : Rising edge active
1 : Falling edge active
7 Timer Y stop control 0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
bit
Fig. 2.3.18 Structure of timer Y mode register
2–60
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Timer Y operating mode bits (bit 4 and bit 5)
The timer Y operating mode bits select a operating mode of the timer Y.
Table 2.3.3 shows the relation between the timer
Y operating mode bits and the operating modes.
For an explanation of each mode operation,
refer to the section pertaining to the explanation of each operation.
Table 2.3.3 Relation between timer Y operating mode bits
and operating modes
b5
0
0
1
1
b4
0
1
0
1
Operation mode
Timer mode
Period measurement mode
Event counter mode
Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
■CNTR 1 active edge switch bit (bit 6)
The CNTR 1 active edge switch bit has a function which selects an active edge of the CNTR 1 interrupt
and functions for each mode.
In the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, this bit is invalid.
●CNTR1 interrupt
When bit 6 is “0,” the falling edge ( ) is active.
When bit 6 is “1,” the rising edge ( ) is active.
In the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, an interrupt request occurs at the both
edges regardless of the value of this bit.
●Period measurement mode
This bit selects the duration which is measured.
When bit 6 is “0,” the falling edge to the falling edge duration is measured.
When bit 6 is “1,” the rising edge to the rising edge duration is measured.
●Event counter mode
An active edge of the count source is selected.
When bit 6 is “0,” the rising edge ( ) is active.
When bit 6 is “1,” the falling edge ( ) is active.
■Timer Y stop control bit (bit 7)
The timer Y stop control bit controls the count operation of the timer Y.
By writing “0” to bit 7, a count source is input to the Y counter, so that a count operation is started.
As bit 7 is in the “0” state immediately after reset release, the count operation is automatically started
after reset release.
By writing “1” to bit 7, the input of count source to the Y counter is stopped, so that the count operation
stops.
At read, this bit functions as a status bit to indicate the operating state (counting or stop) of the
counter. When bit 7 is “0,” the counter is in the operating state. When bit 7 is “1,” the counter is in
the stop state.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–61
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(7) Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) and interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2)
The interrupt request register 1 (address 003C16) and the interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16)
indicate whether an interrupt request has occured or not.
Figure 2.3.19 shows the structure of the interrupt request register 1 and Figure 2.3.20 shows the
structure of the interrupt request register 2.
The occurrence of an interrupt request (timer X, timer Y, CNTR 0 , and CNTR 1 interrupt requests)
causes the corresponding bit to be set to “1.” This interrupt request bit is automatically cleared to “0”
by the acceptance of the interrupt request.
The interrupt request bits can be set to “0” by software, but it cannot be set to “1” by software.
The occurrence of each interrupt is controlled by the corresponding interrupt enable bit (refer to the
next item).
For details of interrupts, refer to “2.2 Interrupts.”
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) [Address 3C16]
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Functions
INT0 interrupt request
bit
INT1 interrupt request
bit
Serial I/O1 receive
interrupt request bit
Serial I/O1 transmit
interrupt request bit
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
Timer X interrupt
request bit
Timer Y interrupt
request bit
Timer 2 interrupt
request bit
Timer 3 interrupt
request bit
✽ : “0” can be set by software, but “1” cannot be set.
Fig. 2.3.19 Structure of interrupt request register 1
2–62
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset R W
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) [Address 3D16]
B
Name
0 CNTR0 interrupt
request bit
1 CNTR1 interrupt
request bit
At reset R W
Functions
0 : No interrupt request issued
✽
0
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
2 Timer 1 interrupt
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
INT
2
interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
3
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
4 INT3 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
5 Key input interrupt
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
Serial
I/O2
0 : No interrupt request issued
6
interrupt request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued
7 Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written
to and is fixed to “0” at reading.
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
0 ×
✽ : “0” can be set by software, but “1” cannot be set.
Fig. 2.3.20 Structure of interrupt request register 2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–63
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(8) Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) and interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)
The interrupt control register 1 (address 003E16) and the interrupt control register 2 (address 003F 16)
control each interrupt request source.
Figure 2.3.21 shows the structure of the interrupt control register 1 and Figure 2.3.22 shows the
structure of the interrupt control register 2.
When an interrupt enable bit (timer X, timer Y, CNTR0, and CNTR1 interrupt enable bits) is “0,” the
corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt request occurs when this bit is “0,” the
corresponding interrupt request bit only is set to “1,” and the interrupt request is not accepted.
When the interrupt enable bit is “1,” the corresponding interrupt request is enabled. If an interrupt
request occurs when this bit is “1,” the interrupt request is accepted (interrupt disable flag = “0”).
Each interrupt enable bit can be set to “0” or “1” by software.
For details of interrupts, refer to “2.2 Interrupts.”
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) [Address 3E16]
B
Name
INT0 interrupt enable
bit
1 INT1 interrupt enable
bit
2 Serial I/O1 receive
interrupt enable bit
3 Serial I/O1 transmit
interrupt enable bit
0
4 Timer X interrupt
enable bit
5 Timer Y interrupt
enable bit
6 Timer 2 interrupt
enable bit
7 Timer 3 interrupt
enable bit
Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
Fig. 2.3.21 Structure of interrupt control register 1
2–64
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) [Address 3F16]
B
Name
CNTR
0
interrupt
0
enable bit
1 CNTR1 interrupt
enable bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
Timer 1 interrupt
enable bit
INT2 interrupt enable
bit
INT3 interrupt
enable bit
Key input interrupt
enable bit
Serial I/O2
interrupt enable bit
Fixed this bit to “0.”
Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
Fig. 2.3.22 Structure of interrupt control register 2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–65
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.4 Register setting example
In the following, an example of setting registers for using each mode of the timer X and timer Y is
described.
(1) Timer X
■Timer mode
Figure 2.3.23 shows an example of setting registers for using the timer mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following :
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the timer X interrupt enable bit and the timer X
interrupt request bit to “0.”
•After setting ➃ below, set the timer X interrupt enable bit to “1” (interrupts enabled).
2: Write values in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order).
➀Setting of timer X mode register
Select timer mode or others
b7
b0
1 0 0
TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716]
b0 : Timer X write control bit
0 : Write value in latch and counter
1 : Write value in latch only
b1 : Real time port control bit
0 : Real time port function invalid
1 : Real time port function valid
b2 : P60 data for real time port
b3 : P61 data for for real time port
b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits
0 0 : Timer mode
b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit
b7 : Timer X stop control bit
1 : Count stop
➁Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016]
➂Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116]
➃Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to “0” to start counting
Fig. 2.3.23 Example of setting registers for using timer mode
2–66
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Pulse output mode
Figure 2.3.24 shows an example of setting registers for using the pulse output mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following :
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) and the
interrupt request bits (timer X or CNTR0) to “0.”
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) to “1”
(interrupts enabled).
2: Write values in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order).
➀Port P5 direction register
b7
b0
1
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16]
b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54
1 : Output mode
➁Setting of timer X mode register
Select pulse output mode or others
b7
b0
1 0 1
TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716]
b0 : Timer X write control bit
0 : Write value in latch and counter
1 : Write value in latch only
b1 : Real time port control bit
0 : Real time port function invalid
1 : Real time port function valid
b2 : P60 data for real time port
b3 : P61 data for real time port
b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits
0 1 : Pulse output mode
b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit
0 : Start at initial level “H” level output
1 : Start at initial level “L” level output
b7 : Timer X stop control bit
1 : Count stop
➂Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016]
➃Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116]
➄Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to “0” to start counting
Fig. 2.3.24 Example of setting registers for using pulse output mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–67
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Event counter output mode
Figure 2.3.25 shows an example of setting registers for using the event counter mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following :
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) and the
interrupt request bits (timer X or CNTR0) to “0.”
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) to “1”
(interrupts enabled).
2: Write values in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order).
➀Port P5 direction register
b7
b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16]
b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54
0 : Input mode
➁Setting of timer X mode register
Select event counter mode or others
b7
b0
1 1 0
TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716]
b0 : Timer X write control bit
0 : Write value in latch and counter
1 : Write value in latch only
b1 : Real time port control bit
0 : Real time port function invalid
1 : Real time port function valid
b2 : P60 data for real time port
b3 : P61 data for real time port
b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits
1 0 : Event counter mode
b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit
0 : Rising edge active
1 : Falling edge active
b7 : Timer X stop control bit
1 : Count stop
➂Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016]
➃Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116]
➄Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to “0” to start counting
Fig. 2.3.25 Example of setting registers for using event counter mode
2–68
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Pulse width measurement mode
Figure 2.3.26 shows an example of setting registers for using the pulse width measurement mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following :
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) and the
interrupt request bits (timer X or CNTR0) to “0.”
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer X or CNTR0) to “1”
(interrupts enabled).
2: Write values in the order of the timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order).
➀Port P5 direction register
b7
b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16]
b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54
0 : Input mode
➁Setting of timer X mode register
Select pulse width measurement mode or others
b7
b0
1 1 1
TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716]
b0 : Timer X write control bit
0 : Write value in latch and counter
1 : Write value in latch only
b1 : Real time port control bit
0 : Real time port function invalid
1 : Real time port function valid
b2 : P60 data for real time port
b3 : P61 data for real time port
b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits
1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode
b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit
0 : Measure “H” level width
1 : Measure “L” level width
b7 : Timer X stop control bit
1 : Count stop
➂Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016]
➃Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116]
➄Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to “0” to start counting
Fig. 2.3.26 Example of setting registers for using pulse width measurement mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–69
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Real time port function
Figure 2.3.27 shows an example of setting registers for using the real time port (referred as RTP)
function.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: After reset release, port P6 direction register is set for the input mode, so pins P60/INT3/RTP0
and P61/RTP1 operate as ordinary input ports. For using as RTP, be sure to set the
corresponding bits of the port P6 direction register for the output mode.
2: Change RTP output data as required, for example, by using an interrupt.
3: Do not change ports P60 and P61 selected as RTP into input pins during RTP operation.
➀Port P6 direction register
b7
b0
P6D : Port P6 direction register [Address 0D16]
b0, b1 : Bits corresponding to ports P60 (RTP0) and P61 (RTP1)
0 : Input mode
1 : Output mode
: Nothing is allocated
➁Setting of timer X mode register
Select RTP or others
b7
b0
1
1
TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716]
b0 : Timer X write control bit
0 : Write value in latch and counter
1 : Write value in latch only
b1 : Real time port control bit
1 : Real time port function valid
b2 : P60 data for real time port
b3 : P61 data for real time port
b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits
0 0 : Timer mode
0 1 : Pulse output mode
1 0 : Event counter mode
1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode
b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit
•CNTR0 interrupt
0 : Falling edge active
1 : Rising edge active
•Pulse output mode
0 : Start at initial level “H” output
0 : Start at initial level “L” output
•Event counter mode
0 : Rising edge active
1 : Falling edge active
•Pulse width measurement mode
0 : Measure “H” level width
1 : Measure “L” level width
b7 : Timer X stop control bit
1 : Count stop
➂Set count value (low-order) to timer X (low-order) (TXL) [Address 2016]
➃Set count value (high-order) to timer X (high-order) (TXH) [Address 2116]
➄Set timer X stop control bit of timer X mode register to “0” to start counting
Fig. 2.3.27 Example of setting registers for using RTP
2–70
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Timer Y
■Timer mode
Figure 2.3.28 shows an example of setting registers for using the timer mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following :
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the timer Y interrupt enable bit and the timer Y
interrupt request bit to “0.”
•After setting ➃ below, set the timer Y interrupt enable bit to “1” (interrupts enabled) .
2: Write values in the order of the timer Y (low-order) and the timer Y (high-order).
➀Setting of timer Y mode register
Select timer mode or others
b7
b0
1 0 0
TYM : Timer Y mode register [Address 2816]
b5, b4 : Timer Y operating mode bits
0 0 : Timer mode
b6 : CNTR1 active edge switch bit
b7 : Timer Y stop control bit
1 : Count stop
: Nothing is allocated
➁Set count value (low-order) to timer Y (low-order) (TYL) [Address 2216]
➂Set count value (high-order) to timer Y (high-order) (TYH) [Address 2316]
➃Set timer Y stop control bit of timer Y mode register to “0” to start counting
Fig. 2.3.28 Example of setting registers for using timer mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–71
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Period measurement mode
Figure 2.3.29 shows an example of setting registers for using the period measurement mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following :
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) and the
interrupt request bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to “0.”
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to “1”
(interrupts enabled).
2: Write values in the order of the timer Y (low-order) ant the timer Y (high-order).
➀Port P5 direction register
b7
b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16]
b5 : Bit corresponding to port P55
0 : Input mode
➁Setting of timer Y mode register
Select period measurement mode or others
b7
b0
1 0 1
TYM : Timer Y mode register [Address 2816]
b5, b4 : Timer Y operating mode bits
0 1 : Period measurement mode
b6 : CNTR1 active edge switch bit
0 : Measure falling edge to falling edge
1 : Measure rising edge to rising edge
b7 : Timer Y stop control bit
1 : Count stop
: Nothing is allocated
➂Set count value (low-order) to timer Y (low-order) (TYL) [Address 2216]
➃Set count value (high-order) to timer Y (high-order) (TYH) [Address 2316]
➄Set timer Y stop control bit of timer Y mode register to “0” to start counting
Fig. 2.3.29 Example of setting registers for using period measurement mode
2–72
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Event counter mode
Figure 2.3.30 shows an example of setting registers for using the event counter mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following :
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) and the
interrupt request bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to “0.”
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to “1”
(interrupts enabled).
2: Write values in the order of the timer Y (low-order) ant the timer Y (high-order).
➀Port P5 direction register
b7
b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16]
b5 : Bit corresponding to port P55
0 : Input mode
➁Setting of timer Y mode register
Select event counter mode or others
b7
b0
1 1 0
TYM : Timer Y mode register [Address 2816]
b5, b4 : Timer Y operating mode bits
1 0 : Event counter mode
b6 : CNTR1 active edge switch bit
0 : Rising edge active
1 : Falling edge active
b7 : Timer Y stop control bit
1 : Count stop
: Nothing is allocated
➂Set count value (low-order) to timer Y (low-order) (TYL) [Address 2216]
➃Set count value (high-order) to timer Y (high-order) (TYH) [Address 2316]
➄Set timer Y stop control bit of timer Y mode register to “0” to start counting
Fig. 2.3.30 Example of setting registers for using event counter mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–73
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Pulse width HL countinuously measurement mode
Figure 2.3.31 shows an example of setting registers for using the pulse width HL countinuously
measurement mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following :
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) and the
interrupt request bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to “0.”
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to “1”
(interrupts enabled).
2: Write values in the order of the timer Y (low-order) ant the timer Y (high-order).
➀Port P5 direction register
b7
b0
0
P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16]
b5 : Bit corresponding to port P55
0 : Input mode
➁Setting of timer Y mode register
Select pulse width HL continuously measurement mode or others
b7
b0
1 11
TYM : Timer Y mode register [Address 2816]
b5, b4 : Timer Y operating mode bits
1 1 : Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
b6 : CNTR1 active edge switch bit
Invalid in pulse width HL continuously measurement
mode
b7 : Timer Y stop control bit
1 : Count stop
: Nothing is allocated
➂Set count value (low-order) to timer Y (low-order) (TYL) [Address 2216]
➃Set count value (high-order) to timer Y (high-order) (TYH) [Address 2316]
➄Set timer Y stop control bit of timer Y mode register to “0” to start counting
Fig. 2.3.31 Example of setting registers for using pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
2–74
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.5 Application examples
(1) Pulse output mode : Piezoelectric buzzer output
Outline : The rectangular waveform output function of a timer is applied for a piezoelectric buzzer
output.
Specifications : •The rectangular waveform which is divided clock f(XIN) = 8 MHz up to about 2 kHz
is output from the P54 /CNTR0 pin.
•The level of the P54/CNTR 0 pin fixes to “H” while a piezoelectric buzzer output is
stopped.
Figure 2.3.32 shows an example of a peripheral circuit, Figure 2.3.33, a connection of the timer and
a setting of the division ratio, Figure 2.3.34, the setting of the related registers, and Figure 2.3.35, the
control procedure.
The “H” level is output while a piezoelectric buzzer output is stopped.
3820 group
P54/CNTR0
PiPiPi....
250 µ s 250 µ s
Set a division ratio so that the
underflow cycle of the timer X
is this value.
Fig. 2.3.32 Example of peripheral circuit
f(XIN) = 8 MHz
Fix
Timer X
1/16
1/125
CNTR0
Fig. 2.3.33 Connection of timer and setting of division ratio
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–75
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
b7
b0
X X X 1 X X X X P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16]
b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54
1 : Output mode
b7
b0
1 X 0 1 X X X X TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716]
b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits
0 1 : Pulse output mode
b7 : Timer X stop control bit
1 : Count stop
7C16
TXL : Timer X (low-order) [Address 2016]
Note : Write values in the order of
the low-order byte and the
TXH : Timer X (high-order) [Address 2116]
0016
high-order byte.
Set “division ratio – 1 (124 : 007C16)” in the timer X register
b7
b0
X X X 1 X X X X ICON1 : Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b4 : Timer X interrupt enable bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
Fig. 2.3.34 Setting of related registers
RESET
Initialization
CLT
CLD
SEI
All interrupts; Disabled
← XXX0XXXX2
ICON1 (Address 3E16)
← 1X01XXXX2
TXM (Address 2716)
P5D (Address 0B16), bit 4 ← 1
P5 (Address 0A16), bit 4 ← 1
← 7C16
TXL (Address 2016)
← 0016 (125 – 1)
TXH (Address 2116)
Timer X interrupt; Disabled
CNTR0 output stops at this point (A piezoelectric buzzer output stops)
Set port conditions at stop of a piezoelectric buzzer output
(“H” level output)
ICON1 (Address 3E16)
← XXX1XXXX2
Interrupts; Enabled
CLI
A piezoelectric buzzer request generated during the
main processing is processed at the output unit
Main processing
Output unit
Timer X interrupt; Enabled
A piezoelectric buzzer
request has occurred?
Y (= ON)
N (= Request)
Immediately after no request?
N (= OFF)
TXM (Address 2716), bit 7
P5 (Address 0A16), bit 4
Switch bit 7 of TXM
Count (ON)↔ Stop (OFF)
←1
←1
Y (= No request)
TXL (Address 2016)
TXH (Address 2116)
TXM (Address 2716), bit 7
Fig. 2.3.35 Control procedure
2–76
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
← 7C16
← 0016 (125 – 1)
←0
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(2) Pulse width measurement mode: Ringer signal detection
Outline : A telephone ringing pulse✽ is detected by applying the timer X interrupt and the pulse width
measurement mode.
Specifications : •Whether a telephone call exists or not is judged by measuring a pulse width output
from the “H” active ringing pulse detection circuit.
•f(X IN) = 8 MHz is used as the count source.
•When the following condition is satisfied, it is regard as normal.
200 ms ≤ pulse width of a ringing pulse < 1.2 s
Figure 2.3.36 shows an example of a peripheral circuit, Figure 2.3.37, the setting of the related
registers, Figure 2.3.38, a ringing pulse waveform, Figure 2.3.39, an operation timing when a ringing
pulse is input, and Figure 2.3.40, the control procedure.
3820 group
Ringing pulse
detection
circuit
CNTR0
Telephone circuit
✽ Ringing pulse : Signal which is sent by turning on/off (make/break) the telephone line.
Each country has a different standard. In this case, Japanese domestic
standard is adopted as an example.
Fig. 2.3.36 Example of peripheral circuit
b7
b0
X X X 0 X X X X P5D : Port P5 direction register [Address 0B16]
b4 : Bit corresponding to port P54
0 : Input mode
b7
b0
1 0 1 1 X X X X TXM : Timer X mode register [Address 2716]
b5, b4 : Timer X operating mode bits
1 1 : Pulse width measurement mode
b6 : CNTR0 active edge switch bit
0 : •Pulse width measurement mode (Measure “H” level width)
•CNTR0 interrupt (Falling edge active)
b7 : Timer X stop control bit
1 : Count stop
A716
TXL : Timer X (low-order) [Address 2016]
6116
TXH : Timer X (high-order) [Address 2116]
Note : Write values in the order of
the low-order byte and the
high-order byte.
Set “division ratio – 1 (24999 : 61A716) ” in the timer X register
b7
b0
X X X 1 X X X X ICON1 : Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b4 : Timer X interrupt enable bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
b7
b0
0 X X X X X X 1 ICON2 : Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16]
b0 : CNTR0 interrupt enable bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
Fig. 2.3.37 Setting of related registers
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–77
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
16 Hz
OFF ON
Ringing pulse from
telephone line
Approx. 2 second
No ringing duration
Approx. 1 second
Ringing duration
Waveform-shaped signal
input to microcomputer
Fig. 2.3.38 Ringer signal waveform
<When a normal-range ringing pulse is input>
Ringing
duration
Approx.
1 second
No ringing duration
Ringing duration
Approx. 2 second
Approx.
1.2 second or more
Signal input to
microcomputer
Timer X
value
<When abnormal ringing pulse is input>
Signal input to
microcomputer
Reload
Timer X
interrupt
Timer X
value
24 or more interrupts occur
CNTR0
interrupt
Fig. 2.3.39 Operation timing when ringing pulse is input
2–78
Reload
Timer X
interrupt
4 to 23 interrupts occur
CNTR0
interrupt
No ringing
duration
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
RESET
Initialization
CLT
CLD
SEI
All interrupts; Disabled
ICON1 (Address 3E16) ← XXX0XXXX2
ICON2 (Address 3F16) ← 0XXXXXX02
P5D (Address 0B16), bit 4 ← 0
← 1011XXXX2
TXM (Address 2716)
← A716
TXL (Address 2016)
← 6116 (25000 – 1)
TXH (Address 2116)
Timer X interrupt; Disabled
CNTR0 interrupt; Disabled
Set P54/CNTR0 pin for input mode
Connect timer X
Set “division ratio – 1” to timer X (low-order) and timer X (high-order)
(Set values in the order of low-order byte and high-order byte)
TXM (Address 2716), bit 7← 0
Timer count start
← XXX1XXXX2
← 0XXXXXX12
ICON1 (Address 3E16)
ICON2 (Address 3F16)
Timer X interrupt; Enabled
CNTR0 interrupt; Enabled
Interrupts; Enabled
CLI
CNTR0 interrupt processing routine
The number of
underflows is within
the range ?
CNTR0 interrupt occurs at
transition from “H” to “L” of
waveform which is input to
P54/CNTR0 pin
N
Check the number of underflows
counted by timer X interrupt
→ If the number is 4 or less and 24
or more, the pulse is abnormal
N
Check pulse width
→ When pulse width is within
range, the pulse is normal
Y
Timer X value is within
the range ?
Y
Judged as presence of ringing
pulse (Set ringer flag)
Timer X interrupt occurs
at timer X underflow
(at every 50 ms)
TXL (Address 2016)← A716
TXH (Address 2116)← 6116
(25000 – 1)
Reload to timer X register
RTI
N
A ringing pulse exists ?
(Ringer flag = “H”)
Y
Timer X interrupt processing routine
Count the number of
underflows
Processing when a
ringing pulse exists
If 24 underflows or more are
counted, regard the ringing pulse
as out of standard, and execute
error processing
RTI
Fig. 2.3.40 Control procedure
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–79
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
(3) Real time port function : Stepping motor drive
Outline : A stepping motor is driven by applying a timer X interrupt and the real time port (referred
as “RTP”) function.
Specifications : • The RTP output time is controlled by changing a timer X setting value in a timer
X interrupt processing.
• The RTP output pattern to the motor driver by changing data for RTP.
Figure 2.3.41 shows an application connection example when the RTP is used. Figure 2.3.42 shows
an RTP output example. Table 2.3.4 and Table 2.3.5 show table examples for it. Figure 2.3.40 shows
a timer X interrupt processing procedure example when the RTP is used.
3820 group
RTP setting
value table
Stepping motor
TXM
Data
for RTP
RTP0 (P60)
Motor
driver
RTP1 (P61)
Timer X setting
value table
Timer X
Fig. 2.3.41 Application connection example when RTP is used
RTP output
time
Timer X
setting value
(T1)
Timer X
setting value
(T2)
Timer X
Timer X
setting value setting value
(T3)
(T4)
(T5)
RTP0 output
RTP1 output
RTP output pattern ➀
RTP output pattern ➁
RTP output
pattern ➂
Fig. 2.3.42 RTP output example
2–80
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
RTP output
pattern ➃
➀
(T6)
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
Table 2.3.4 Table example for timer X setting value
Table 2.3.5 Table example for RTP setting value
RTP output time
Timer X setting value
RTP output pattern
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
2FD016
2B7116
208116
186916
13C916
13A916
122116
11C116
➀
➁
➂
➃
RTP setting values
TXM, b2
TXM, b3
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
[Notes on use]
Notes 1 : When there is no necessity for changing the timer X underflow time
in ➁, omit it.
2 : When writing to the latch only is selected as the timer X write control,
the timer X value (TXL, TXH) is rewritten at the first underflow
after ➁.
3 : Execute another timer X interrupt processing in ➀ to ➃.
Interrupt processing routine
➀
Push to stack area
➁
Transfer the next timer X underflow time from internal
ROM table and store it in TXL (address 2016) and
TXH (address 2116).
➂
Transfer RTP output data at the next timer X underflow
from internal ROM table and store it in bits 2 and 3 of
TXM (address 2716) .
➃
Pop from stack area
RTI
Fig. 2.3.43 Timer X interrupt processing procedure example when RTP is used
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–81
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
2.3.6 Notes on use
Notes on using each mode of the timer X and timer Y are described below.
(1) Timer X
■Common to all modes
●When reading or writing for timer X, be sure to execute for both the timer X (high-order) and the
timer X (low-order). When reading a value from the timer X, read it in the order of the timer X (highorder) and the timer X (low-order). When writing a value to the timer X, execute in the order of the
timer X (low-order) and the timer X (high-order). If the following operations are performed for the
timer X, abnormal operation will occur.
•Write operation before execution of timer X (low-order) reading
•Read operation before execution of timer X (high-order) writing
•In writing for the latch only (timer X write control bit = “1”), if writing timing for the high-order latch
is almost same as the underflow timing, a normal value may not be set in the high-order counter.
■Pulse output mode
●In the pulse output mode, set the bit 4 (corresponding to the P5 4/CNTR0 ) of the port P5 direction
register (address 000B16) to “1” (output mode).
●When the bit 4 (corresponding to the P5 4/CNTR 0 ) of the port P5 register (address 000A16) in the
pulse output mode is read, the value of the port register are not read out but the output value of
the pin is read out.
■Event counter mode
●When using the event counter mode, set the bit 4 (corresponding to the P5 4/CNTR0) of the port P5
direction register (address 000B16 ) to “0” (input mode).
●The maximum input frequency in the event counter mode is:
4 MHz (250 ns) .................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
500
(2 ✕ V CC ) – 4 MHz
(
ns) .......... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
The minimum “H” pulse width is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
The minimum “L” pulse is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
■Pulse width measurement mode
●In the pulse width measurement mode, set the bit 4 (corresponding to P54/CNTR0 ) of the port P5
direction register (address 000B16 ) to “0” (input mode).
●In reading the value of the P54/CNTR0 pin as an input pin, the value is “1” at “H” level input or “0”
at “L” level input regardless of the value of the CNTR0 active edge switch bit.
●Setting the CNTR0 active edge switch bit effects on the active edge of an interrupt. Consequently,
a CNTR0 interrupt request may be caused by setting the CNTR 0 active edge switch bit.
As a countermeasure against the above, switch the active edge after disabling the CNTR0 interrupt,
then set the CNTR 0 interrupt request bit to “0.”
●The minimum “H” pulse width in the pulse width measurement mode is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
The minimum “L” pulse is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
2–82
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
■Real time port function
●After reset release, the port P6 direction register is set for the input mode, so the pins P6 0 and P61
function as ordinary I/O ports. For the pin to be used as RTP, be sure to set the corresponding bits
of the port P6 direction register for the output mode.
●For a pin used as RTP, do not change this port for the input mode during real time port operation.
●Change RTP output data as required, for example, by using a timer X interrupt.
(2) Timer Y
■Common to all modes
●When reading or writing for timer Y, be sure to execute for both the timer Y (high-order) and the
timer Y (low-order). When reading a value from the timer Y, read it in the order of the timer Y (highorder) and the timer Y (low-order). When writing a value to the timer Y, execute in the order of the
timer Y (low-order) and the timer Y (high-order). If the following operations are performed for the
timer Y, abnormal operation will occur.
•Write operation before execution of timer Y (low-order) reading
•Read operation before execution of timer Y (high-order) writing
■Period measurement mode
●In the period measurement mode, set the bit 5 (corresponding to the P55/CNTR 1 ) of the port P5
direction register (address 000B 16) to “0” (input mode).
●Setting the CNTR1 active edge switch bit effects on the active edge of an interrupt. Consequently,
the CNTR 1 interrupt request may be caused by setting the CNTR1 active edge switch bit.
As a countermeasure, switch the active edge after disabling the CNTR1 interrupt, then set the
CNTR 1 interrupt request bit to “0.”
●The maximum input frequency in the period measurement mode is:
4 MHz (250 ns) .................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
500
(2 ✕ V CC ) – 4 MHz
(
ns) .......... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
The minimum “H” pulse width is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
The minimum “L” pulse is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
■Event counter mode
●In the event counter mode, set the bit 5 (corresponding to the P55/CNTR 1) of the port P5 direction
register (address 000B 16) to “0” (input mode).
●Setting the CNTR 1 active edge switch bit, the active edge of an interrupt is also affected. Consequently, a CNTR 1 interrupt request may be caused by setting the CNTR1 active edge switch bit.
●The maximum input frequency in the event counter mode is:
4 MHz (250 ns) .................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
( 500
ns) .......... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
(2 ✕ V CC ) – 4 MHz
V CC – 2
The minimum “H” pulse width is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–83
APPLICATION
2.3 Timer X and timer Y
The minimum “L” pulse is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
■Pulse width HL continuously measurement mode
●In the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode, set the bit 5 (corresponding to P55/CNTR1)
of the port P5 direction register (address 000B16 ) to “0” (input mode).
●The CNTR 1 interrupt request occurs at both edges of input pulses regardless of the value of the
CNTR1 active edge switch bit.
●The minimum “H” pulse width in the pulse width HL continuously measurement mode is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
The minimum “L” pulse is:
105 ns .................................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
250
(
– 20 ns) ........................................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
V CC – 2
2–84
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.1 Explanation of operations
Timer 1 to timer 3 are 8-bit timers that operate in the timer mode. The timer mode is a count-down system,
so the value of the counter is decremented each time a count source is input. When the counter underflows,
an interrupt request occurs.
The timer 2 can also output a pulse whose polarity is reversed at each underflow.
(1) Timer mode
Operation of the timers 1 to 3 in the timer mode are described below.
①Start of count operation
A count operation is automatically started after reset release.
The value of the counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
➁Reload operation
The counter underflows at the first count pulse after the value of the counter reaches “0016.” At this
time, the value of the corresponding timer latch is transferred (reloaded) to the counter.
➂Interrupt operation
An interrupt request occurs at the counter underflow. At the same time, the corresponding interrupt
request bit is set to “1.” The occurrence of each interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bit.
The acceptance of the interrupt request causes the interrupt request bit which has been set to “1”
to be automatically cleared to “0.” It can also be cleared to “0” by software. An interrupt request
occurs each time the counter underflows. In other words, an interrupt request occurs every “the
counter initial value + 1” count of the rising edge of the count source.
Figure 2.4.1 shows a timer mode operation example.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–85
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
Count period
Count period
T (s) = 1 ÷ count source frequency ✕ (the counter initial value + 1)
Operation example in timer mode
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n : The counter initial value
Count
source
Value of counter
RL
RL
RL
RL
n16
UF
UF
UF
UF
0016
T
Time
Interrupt
request bit
Interrupt
enable bit
1
1
1
1
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the corresponding interrupt request bit of the timers 1 to 3.
•Clearing by accepting the corresponding interrupt request of the timers 1 to 3 when
the corresponding interrupt enable bit is “1.”
Fig. 2.4.1 Timer mode operation example
2–86
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(2) Rewriting the value of the counter and the latch
When data is written to the timer, the values of the counter and the latch are rewritten. For rewriting
the values of the counters and the latches corresponding to each timer is described below.
■Timer 1 and timer 3
By writing a value to the timer, the value is set simultaneously in both the counter and the latch.
Accordingly, the counter period, when a value is written to the timer during counting, becomes inaccurate.
Figure 2.4.2 shows an rewriting example of the counter and the latch corresponding to the timers 1
or 3.
Rewriting example of counter
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n : The counter initial value before rewriting
•m : The counter initial value after rewriting
Write “m16” to timer
RL
Value of counter
m16
RL
RL
n16
UF
UF
UF
0016
Time
Inaccurate count period
Interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
Interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the interrupt request bit corresponding to the timers 1 or 3.
•Clearing by accepting the interrupt request corresponding to the timers 1 or 3 when
the corresponding interrupt enable bit is “1.”
Fig. 2.4.2 Rewriting example of counter and latch corresponding to timers 1 or 3
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–87
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
■Timer 2
The write operation to the timer 2 counter is controlled by the timer 2 write control bit (bit 2 at address
002916).
(bit 2 = “0”)
As the write operation is the same as that to the timer 1 and the timer 3, refer to the previous
section, “■Timer 1 and timer 3.”
(bit 2 = “1”)
When a value is written to the timer 2, the value is set in the timer 2 latch only. The rewritten value
is reloaded onto the timer 2 counter at the first underflow after rewriting.
Figure 2.4.3 shows an rewriting example of the timer 2 counter and the timer 2 latch.
Rewriting example of timer 2 counter
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n : The counter initial value before rewriting
•m : The counter initial value after rewriting
Write “m16” to timer
RL
RL
Value of counter
m16
RL
RL
n16
UF
UF
UF
UF
0016
Time
Timer 2 write
control bit
Interrupt
request bit
1
1
1
1
Interrupt
enable bit
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the timer 2 interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the timer 2 interrupt request when the timer 2 interrupt request
bit is “1.”
Fig. 2.4.3 Rewriting example of timer 2 counter and timer 2 latch (Writing in timer 2 latch only)
2–88
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(3) Pulse output by timer 2
The timer 2 can output a pulse whose polarity is reversed at each the timer 2 counter underflow.
Figure 2.4.4 shows a pulse output example.
From the moment that the TOUT output control bit is set to “1,” pulses are output from the P56/TOUT
output pin. The polarity is reversed every the timer 2 counter underflow.
To output pulses, set bit 6 of the port P5 direction register for the output mode by setting it to “1.”
Pulse output example by timer 2
•UF : Underflow
•RL : Reload
•n : The timer 2 counter initial value
Value of timer 2 counter
FF16
n16
RL
UF
0016
Timer
Timer 2 interrupt
request bit
Timer 2 interrupt
enable bit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Write “1”
TOUT output
control bit
AAA
TOUT output active
edge switch bit
P56/TOUT pin
Programmable I/O port
1 : •Clearing by writing “0” to the timer 2 interrupt request bit.
•Clearing by accepting the timer 2 interrupt request when the timer 2 interrupt
enable bit is “1.”
Fig. 2.4.4 Pulse output example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–89
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.2 Related registers
Figure 2.4.5 shows memory allocation of timer-related registers. Each of these registers is described
below.
Address
002416
Timer 1 (T1)
002516
Timer 2 (T2)
002616
Timer 3 (T3)
002916
Timer 123 mode register (T123M)
003C16
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1)
003D16
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2)
003E16
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1)
003F16
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)
Fig. 2.4.5 Memory allocation of timer-related registers
2–90
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(1) Timer latches and timer counters (corresponding to timers 1 to 3)
The latches and the counters each consist of 8 bits and are allocated at the same address for each
timer.
To access a latch and a counter, access the corresponding timer. When the timer is read out, the
value of the counter (count value) is read out.
■Latch
The latch is a register which holds the value to be transferred (reloaded) automatically to the counter
as the initial value of the counter at the counter underflow. It is impossible to read out the value of
the latch. Figure 2.4.6 the structure of the latches.
For the rewrite operation of the value of the latch, refer to “2.4.1 Explanation of operations, (2)
Rewriting the value of the counter and the latch.”
●Timer 1 latch and timer 3 latch
Timer 1 and timer 3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 1 and timer 3 (T1,T3) [Address 2416, 2616]
B
Functions
At reset R W
×
1
0 •Set “0016 to FF16” as timers 1 or 3 count value.
to •The values of each timer are set to the
7 respective latches and transferred automatically to the respective counters at the
counter underflow.
●Timer 2 latch
Timer 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 2 (T2) [Address 2516]
B
0
1
to
7
Functions
•Set “0016 to FF16” as timer 2 count value.
•The value of timer 2 is set to the timer 2
latch and transferred automatically to the
timer 2 counter at the timer 2 counter
underflow.
At reset R W
×
1
0
×
Fig. 2.4.6 Structure of latches
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–91
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
■Counters
The counters count the count source ✽1. Figure 2.4.7 shows the structure of the timer counters.
The value of the counter is decremented by 1 each time a count source is input.
The division ratio of the counters is represented by the following expression.
1
the counter initial value + 1
Division ratio of the counter =
When the timer is read out, the value of the counter (count value) is read out.
For the rewriting operation for the value of the counter, refer to “2.4.1 Explanation of operations,
(2) Rewriting the value of the counter and the latch.”
✽1: For count source selection, refer to “2.4.2 Related registers, (2) Timer 123 mode register.”
●Timer 1 counter and timer 3 counter
Timer 1 and timer 3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 1 and timer 3 (T1, T3) [Address 2416, 2616]
B
Functions
0 •Set “0016 to FF16” as timers 1 or 3 count value.
to •The value of the counter is decremented by
7 1 each time a count source is input.
•The values of each timer are set to the
respective counters.
•The respective count values are read out by
reading each timer.
At reset R W
1
●Timer 2 counter
Timer 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 2 (T2) [Address 2516]
B
Functions
At reset R W
1
0 •Set “0016 to FF16” as timer 2 count value.
•The value of the counter is decremented by
1 each time a count source is input.
•When timer 2 write control bit is “0,” the value
1 of the timer 2 is set to the timer 2 counter.
0
to •The timer 2 count value is read out by reading
7 the timer 2.
Fig. 2.4.7 Structure of timer counters
2–92
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(2) Timer 123 mode register (T123M)
The timer 123 mode register (address 002916 ) consists of TOUT output control bit, the count source
selection bits, and others. Figure 2.4.8 shows the structure of the timer 123 mode register. Each bit
is described below.
Timer 123 mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 123 mode register (T123M) [Address 2916]
B
0
1
Name
TOUT output active
edge switch bit
Functions
At reset R W
0 : Start at “H” output
1 : Start at “L” output
0
TOUT output control
bit
0 : TOUT output disabled
1 : TOUT output enabled
0
0 : Write value in latch and
counter
1 : Write value in latch only
3 Timer 2 count source 0 : Timer 1 underflow
1 : f(XIN)/16
selection bit
(Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16
(Low-speed mode) (Note)
4 Timer 3 count source 0 : Timer 1 underflow
selection bit
1 : f(XIN)/16
(Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16
(Low-speed mode) (Note)
5 Timer 1 count source 0 : f(XIN)/16
(Middle-/high-speed mode)
selection bit
f(XCIN)/16
(Low-speed mode) (Note)
1 : f(XCIN)
6, 7 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
written to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
2
Timer 2 write control
bit
0
0
0
0
0
0 ×
Note: Internal clock φ is f(XCIN)/2 in the low-speed mode.
Fig. 2.4.8 Structure of timer 123 mode register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–93
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
■T OUT output active edge switch bit (bit 0)
The TOUT output active edge switch bit selects an initial level of the T OUT output.
When bit 0 is “0,” the output pulse from the P5 6/T OUT pin is started at the “H” level.
When bit 0 is “1,” the output pulse from the P5 6/T OUT pin is started at the “L” level.
■T OUT output control bit (bit 1)
The T OUT output control bit controls the T OUT output.
When bit 1 is “0,” the TOUT output is disabled.
When bit 1 is “1,” the TOUT output is enabled.
■Timer 2 write control bit (bit 2)
The timer 2 write control bit controls writing to the timer 2.
When bit 2 is “0,” a simultaneous write operation to both the timer 2 latch and the timer 2 counter is
set.
When a value is written to the timer 2, the value is set into both the timer 2 latch and the timer 2
counter at the same time.
When bit 2 is “1,” a write operation to the latch only is set.
When a value is written into the timer 2, the value is set into the timer 2 latch only.
When a value is written into the timer 2 latch only, this rewritten value is transferred to the timer 2
counter at the first timer 2 counter underflow after rewriting.
■Timer 2 count source selection bit (bit 3)
The timer 2 count source selection bit selects a count source of the timer 2. Table 2.4.1 shows the
relation between the timer 2 count source selection bit and count sources.
Table 2.4.1 Relation between timer 2 count source selection bit and count sources
bit 3
0
1
Timer 2 count source
Timer 1 underflow
f(XIN)/16 (In low speed mode; f(XCIN)/16)
■Timer 3 count source selection bit (bit 4)
The timer 3 count source selection bit selects a count source of the timer 3. Table 2.4.2 shows the
relation between the timer 3 count source selection bit and count sources.
Table 2.4.2 Relation between timer 3 count source selection bit and count sources
bit 4
0
1
Timer 3 count source
Timer 1 underflow
f(XIN)/16 (In low speed mode; f(XCIN)/16)
■Timer 1 count source selection bit (bit 5)
The timer 1 count source selection bit selects a count source of the timer 1. Table 2.4.3 shows the
relation between the timer 1 count source selection bit and count sources.
Table 2.4.3 Relation between timer 1 count source selection bit and count sources
Count source examples
Timer 1 count source
bit 5
f(XIN) = 8 MHz
f(XCIN) = 32.768 kHz
f(XIN)/16 (In low speed mode; f(XCIN)/16)
500 kHz
2.048 kHz
0
f(XCIN)
—
32.768 kHz
1
2–94
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(3) Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) and interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2)
The interrupt request register 1 (address 003C16) and the interrupt request register 2 (address 003D16)
indicate whether an interrupt request has occured or not.
Figure 2.4.9 shows the structure of the interrupt request register 1 and Figure 2.4.10 shows the
structure of the interrupt request register 2.
The occurrence of an interrupt request causes the corresponding bit to be set to “1.” This interrupt
request bit is automatically cleared to “0” by the acceptance of the interrupt request.
The interrupt request bit can be cleared to “0” by software, but it cannot be set to “1” by software.
The occurrence of each interrupt is controlled by the interrupt enable bit (refer to the next item).
For details of interrupts, refer to “2.2 Interrupts.”
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) [Address 3C16]
B
Name
Functions
0
INT0 interrupt request
bit
INT1 interrupt request
bit
Serial I/O1 receive
interrupt request bit
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Serial I/O1 transmit
interrupt request bit
Timer X interrupt
request bit
Timer Y interrupt
request bit
Timer 2 interrupt
request bit
Timer 3 interrupt
request bit
At reset R W
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
✽ : “0” can be set by software, but “1” cannot be set.
Fig. 2.4.9 Structure of interrupt request register 1
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–95
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) [Address 3D16]
B
Name
0 CNTR0 interrupt
request bit
1 CNTR1 interrupt
request bit
At reset R W
Functions
✽
0 : No interrupt request issued
0
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
Timer
1
interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
2
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
3 INT2 interrupt
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
4 INT3 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
Key
input
interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
5
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
6 Serial I/O2
interrupt request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued
7 Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written
to and is fixed to “0” at reading.
✽ : “0” can be set by software, but “1” cannot be set.
Fig. 2.4.10 Structure of interrupt request register 2
2–96
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
0 ×
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
(4) Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) and interrupt control register 2 (ICON2)
The interrupt control register 1 (address 003E 16) and the interruot contorol register 2 (address 003F16)
control each interrupt request source.
Figure 2.4.11 shows the structure of the interrupt control register 1 and Figure 2.4.12 shows the
structure of the interrupt control register 2.
When an interrupt enable bit is “0,” the corresponding interrupt request is disabled. If an interrupt
request occurs when this bit is “0,” the corresponding interrupt request bit only is set to “1,” and the
interrupt request is not accepted.
When the interrupt enable bit is “1,” the corresponding interrupt request is enabled. If an interrupt
request occurs when this bit is “1,” the interrupt request is accepted (interrupt disable flag = “0”).
Each interrupt enable bit can be set to “0” or “1” by software.
For details of interrupts, refer to “2.2 Interrupts.”
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) [Address 3E16]
B
0
1
2
Name
INT0 interrupt enable
bit
INT1 interrupt enable
bit
Serial I/O1 receive
interrupt enable bit
3 Serial I/O1 transmit
interrupt enable bit
4 Timer X interrupt
enable bit
5 Timer Y interrupt
enable bit
Timer
2 interrupt
6
enable bit
7
Timer 3 interrupt
enable bit
Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Fig. 2.4.11 Structure of interrupt control register 1
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–97
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) [Address 3F16]
B
Name
0 CNTR0 interrupt
enable bit
1 CNTR1 interrupt
enable bit
2
3
4
5
6
7
Timer 1 interrupt
enable bit
INT2 interrupt enable
bit
INT3 interrupt
enable bit
Key input interrupt
enable bit
Serial I/O2
interrupt enable bit
Fix this bit to “0.”
Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
Fig. 2.4.12 Structure of interrupt control register 2
2–98
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.3 Register setting example
Figure 2.4.13 shows an example of setting registers for timers 1, 2, and 3.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following :
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the respective timer interrupt enable bits and the
timer respective interrupt request bits to “0.”
•After setting ➃ below, set the respective timer interrupt enable bits to “1”
(interrupts enabled).
2: The values written in the timers 1 and 3 are set into both the respective latches
and the respective counters at the same time.
3: To enable the TOUT output when the timer 2 is used, set port P56 (this port is
also used the TOUT pin) for the output mode.
4: Write values in the order of the timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3.
➀Setting of timer 123 mode register
Select count source or others
b7
b0
T123M : Timer 123 mode register [Address 2916]
b0 : TOUT output active edge switch bit
0 : Start at “H” output
1 : Start at “L” output
b1 : TOUT output control bit
0 : TOUT output disabled
1 : TOUT output enabled
b2 : Timer 2 write control bit
0 : Write value in latch and counter
1 : Write value in latch only
b3 : Timer 2 count source selection bit
0 : Timer 1 underflow
1 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode)
b4 : Timer 3 count source selection bit
0 : Timer 1 underflow
1 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode)
b5 : Timer 1 count source selection bit
0 : f(XIN)/16 (Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16 (Low-speed mode)
1 : f(XCIN)
➁Set count value to timer 1 (T1) [Address 2416]
➂Set count value to timer 2 (T2) [Address 2516]
➃Set count value to timer 3 (T3) [Address 2616]
Fig. 2.4.13 Example of setting registers for timers 1, 2, and 3
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–99
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.4 Application example
Timer mode: Clock function (measurement of one second)
Outline: The input clock is divided by timer, with a timer 1 interrupt caused every 0.4 ms, 1 second is
counted. Thus, the clock is counted up every second.
Specification: •Division of f(X CIN ) = 32 kHz by timer 1 causes an interrupt.
•The counter value counted by the timer 1 interrupt is checked in the main routine. If 1
second has elapsed, the clock counts up.
Figure 2.4.14 shows the setting of the related registers and Figure 2.4.15 shows the control procedure.
b7
b0
1 X X X X X T123M : Timer 123 mode register [Address 2916]
b5 : Timer 1 count source selection bit
1 : f(XCIN)
: Noting is allocated
7F16
T1 : Timer 1 [Address 2416]
Set “division ratio – 1 (127 : 7F16) ” in the timer 1
Notes 1 : 1 second = 1/32 kHz ✕ (127 + 1) ✕ 250
Division ratio
2 : Write values in the order of the timer 1,
timer 2, and timer 3.
Counted in interrupt
processing
b7
b0
0 X X X X 1 X X ICON2 : Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16]
b2 : Timer 1 interrupt enable bit
1 : Interrupt enabled
Fig. 2.4.14 Setting of related registers
2–100
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
RESET
Initialization
CLT
CLD
SEI
All interrupts; Disabled
ICON2 (Address 3F16) ← 0XXXX0XX2
T123M (Address 2916) ← XX1XXXXX2
Timer 1 interrupt; Disabled
Connect timer 1
T1 (Address 2416)
← 7F16 (128 – 1)
Set “division ratio – 1” to timer 1
(Set in the order of timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3)
Timer count start
ICON2 (Address 3F16) ← 0XXXX1XX2
Timer 1 interrupt; Enabled
Interrupts; Enabled
CLI
Interrupts every 0.4 ms
Timer 1 interrupt processing routine
1 second counter + 1
Y
Clock stop ?
Check if the clock has
already been set
N
RTI
N
1 second has elapsed ?
(1 second counter = 250 ?)
Check a lapse of 1 second
Y
Clear the counter counted by interrupt processing
Clear 1 second counter
✽
Count up clock
(Second—Year)
Specify so that all processing within the loop marked✽
is repeated in a cycle of 1 second or less
Main processing
<Processing for completion of setting clock >
(Note)
T1 (Address 2416)
← 7F16
IREQ2 (Address 3D16), bit 2 ← 0
1 second counter
←0
When restarting the clock from zero second after
completing to set the clock, set timers again.
Note : This processing is performed only
at completing to set the clock
Fig. 2.4.15 Control procedure
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–101
APPLICATION
2.4 Timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3
2.4.5 Notes on use
(1) Notes on using timer 1 to timer 3
■When the count sources of timers 1 to 3 are switched, a short pulse occurs in counted input signals,
so the timer count value may change greatly.
■When the timer 1 output is selected as a count source of timer 2 or timer 3, a short pulse occurs in
the output signal at writing value into the timer 1, so the count value of the timer 2 or timer 3 may
change greatly.
■For the above reasons, set values in the order of timer 1, timer 2, and timer 3 after setting their count
sources.
(2) Timer 2 write control
When writing to the latch only is selected, the value written into the timer 2 (address 002516) is written
only in the latch for reloading. This rewritten value is transferred to the timer 2 counter at the first
underflow after rewriting.
Usually, a value is written in both the latch and the counter at the same time. That is, when a value
is written to timer, it is set in both the latch and the counter.
(3) Timer 2 output control
In the timer 2 (TOUT) output enable state, a signal whose polarity is reversed each time the timer 2
counter underflows is output from the TOUT pin. In this case, set the port P56 (this is used as the TOUT
pin) for the output mode.
2–102
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.1 Explanation of operations
As a serial I/O1, it is possible to select either the clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode or the clock
asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode. This section describes operations in both the clock synchronous
mode and the clock asynchronous (UART) mode. When serial I/O1 is actually used, refer to “2.5.4 Register setting example.”
(1) Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode
In the clock synchronous mode, 8 shift clocks generated in the clock control circuit are used as
synchronizing clocks for transfer. In synchronization with these shift clocks, the transmit operation on
the transmitter and the receive operation on the receiver are simultaneously executed.
The transmitter transmits each 1-bit data from the P45/TxD pin in synchronization with the falling of
the shift clocks.
The receiver receives each 1-bit data from the P4 4/RxD pin in synchronization with the rising of the
shift clocks.
Figure 2.5.1 shows an external connection example in the clock synchronous mode.
3820 group ➀
XIN
3820 group ➁
8
Receive buffer register
Receive shift register
1/4
RxD
TxD
SCLK
Clock control circuit
BRG
1/(n+1) 1/4
8
Transmit buffer register
Transmit shift register
Clock control circuit
SCLK
TxD
Transmit shift register
Transmit buffer register
8
RxD
Receive shift register
Receive buffer register
8
Internal clock is selected
External clock is selected
Fig. 2.5.1 External connection example in clock synchronous mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–103
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Shift clock
Ordinarily, when clock synchronous transfer is performed between microcomputers, an internal clock
is selected for one of them, and it outputs 8 shift clocks generated by a start of transmit operation from
the P46 /SCLK1 pin. An external clock is selected for the other microcomputer, and it uses the clock
input from the P46 /SCLK1 pin as a shift clock. Figure 2.5.2 shows a shift clock.
3820 group ➀
XIN
8
Receive buffer register
Receive shift register
1/4
3820 group ➁
RxD
Clock control circuit
BRG
1/(n+1)
TxD
Shift clock
SCLK1
Clock control circuit
SCLK1
1/4
Transmit shift register
Transmit buffer register
8
TxD
RxD
Receive shift register
Receive buffer register
8
External clock is selected
Internal clock is selected
Fig. 2.5.2 Shift clock
2–104
8
Transmit buffer register
Transmit shift register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Data transfer rate (baud rate)
When an internal clock is used, the data transfer rate (baud rate), which is a shift clock frequency in
the clock synchronous mode, is determined by baud rate generator (BRG). When the BRG count
source selection bit (bit 0) of the serial I/O1 control register (address 001A 16 ) is “0,” X IN pin input
clock is input to the BRG, when this bit is “1,” X IN pin input clock divided by 4 is input to the BRG.
The expression for baud rate is shown below.
●When selecting an internal clock (Using BRG)
Baud rate =
Division ratio
[bps]
XIN pin input
✽1
✕ (BRG setting value
✽2
+ 1) ✕ 4
✽1 Division ratio; Select “1,” or “4”
✽2 BRG setting value; 0 to 255 (0016 to FF 16)
●When selecting an external clock
Baud rate = Frequency of input clock to P4 6/SCLK1 pin
[bps]
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–105
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Transmit operation in the clock synchronous mode
Transmit operation in the clock synchronous mode is described below.
●Start of transmit operation
A transmit operation is started by writing transmit data into the transmit buffer register (address
0018 16) in the transmit enable state. ✽1
●Transmit operation
➀By writing transmit data into the transmit buffer
register, the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0)
of the serial I/O1 status register (address
001916 ) is cleared to “0.”
Data bus
[Address 1816]
Write transmit data
Transmit buffer register
b0
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
➁The transmit data written in the transmit buffer
register is transferred to the transmit shift
register.✽2
➂When a data transfer from the transmit buffer
register to the transmit shift register is completed, the transmit buffer empty flag is
set to “1.”✽3
1
0
Transmit buffer register
Transfer transmit data
Transmit shift register
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
➃The transmit data transferred to the transmit
shift register is output from the P45 /TxD pin
in synchronization with the falling of the shift
clocks.
➄The data is output from the least significant
bit of the transmit shift register. Each time 1bit data is output, the data of the transmit
shift register is shifted by 1 bit toward the
least significant bit.
b0
D7 D 6 D5 D 4 D 3 D2 D 1
0
1
b0
D0
Transmit shift register
b0
D 7 D6 D 5 D 4 D3 D 2
Transmit shift register
P45/TxD
D1
P45/TxD
✽1: Initialization of register or others for a transmit operation. Refer to “2.5.4 Register setting example.”
✽2: When the transmit interrupt source selection bit (bit 3) of the serial I/O1 control
register (address 001A16 ) is set to “0,” a
serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs
immediately after transfer in ➁. When this
bit is set to “1,” a transmit interrupt request occurs at the time of ➆.
✽3: While the transmit buffer empty flag is “1,” it is possible to write the next transmit data into the
transmit/receive buffer register.
2–106
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
➅At the time when a transmit shift operation
starts, the transmit shift register shift completion flag (bit 2) of the serial I/O1 status
register is cleared to “0.” ✽4
b0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
D0
P45/TxD
Transmit shift register
1
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
➆At the time when the transmit shift operation
completes, the transmit shift register shift completion flag is set to “1.” ✽2 ✽4
0
b2
b0
D7
P45/TxD
Transmit shift register
0
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
1
b2
✽4: When an internal clock is used as a synchronizing clock, supplying the shift clock
to the transmit shift register stops automatically at the completion of 8-bit transmission. However, when the next transmit
data is written to the transmit buffer register while the transmit shift register shift completion flag is “0,” supplying the shift clock
is continued.
Shift clock
Transmit shift register
b7
b0
D 7 D 6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
D 7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1
D0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2
D1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3
D2
D7
Fig. 2.5.3 Transmit operation in clock synchronous mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–107
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Write “1”
Transmit enable bit
Write transmit data to transmit buffer register
Write next transmit data
Transmit buffer
empty flag
Transmit shift
register shift
completion flag
Shift clock
TxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
Fig. 2.5.4 Transmit timing example in clock synchronous mode
2–108
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Receive operation in the clock synchronous mode
Receive operation in the clock synchronous mode is described below.
●Start of receive operation
A receive operation is started by writing the following data into the receive buffer register (address
001816 ) in the receive enable state.✽1
•Transmit data in the full duplex data transfer mode
•Arbitrary dummy data in the half duplex data transfer mode
●Receive operation
➀Each 1-bit data is read into the receive shift
register from the P44 /RxD pin in synchronization with the rising of the shift clocks.
➁The data enters first into the most significant
bit of the receive shift register. Each time 1bit data is received, the data of the receive
shift register is shifted by 1 bit toward the
least significant bit.
➂When 1-byte data has been input into the
receive shift register, the data of the receive
shift register is transferred to the receive buffer
register (address 001816 ).✽2
➃When a data transfer to the receive buffer
register is completed, the receive buffer full
flag (bit 1) of the serial I/O1 status register
(address 001916) is set to “1,”✽3 a serial I/O1
receive interrupt request occurs.
b0
D1
P44/RxD
D0
Receive shift register
b0
D4
P44/RxD
D 3 D 2 D1 D0
Receive shift register
Receive shift register D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Transfer receive data
[Address 1816] Receive buffer register
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
0
1
b1
✽1: Initialization of register or others for a receive operation. Refer to “2.5.4 Register
setting example.”
✽2: When data remains without reading out the data of the receive buffer register (the receive buffer
full flag is “1”) and yet all the receive data has been input to the receive shift register, the overrun
error flag of the serial I/O1 status register is set to “1.” At this time, the data of the receive shift
register is not transferred to the receive buffer register, but the former data of the receive buffer
register is held.
✽3: The receive buffer full flag is cleared to “0” by reading out the receive buffer register.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–109
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Shift clock
Receive shift register
b7
b0
D0
D1 D0
D2 D1 D0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Fig. 2.5.5 Receive operation in clock synchronous mode
Write “1”
Receive enable bit
Read out receive buffer register
Receive buffer full
flag
Write data to receive buffer register
Shift clock
RxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
Fig. 2.5.6 Receive timing example in clock synchronous mode
2–110
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Transmit/receive timing example in the clock synchronous mode
Figure 2.5.7 shows a data transmit/receive timing example in the clock synchronous mode.
3820 group ➀
3820 group ➁
TXD
TXD
RXD
RXD
SCLK1
SCLK1
Write “1”
Transmit enable bit
Write transmit data to transmit buffer register
Write next transmit data
Transmit buffer
empty flag
Transmit shift
register shift
completion flag
Shift clock
D0
TXD
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
Write “1”
Receive enable bit
Read out receive buffer register
Receive buffer full
flag
RXD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D0
D1
Fig. 2.5.7 Transmit/receive timing example in clock synchronous mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–111
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(2) Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode
As the clock asynchronous mode (UART mode), data is transmitted and received in asynchronous
form unifying the data transfer rate and the transfer data format between the transmitter and the
receiver.
Figure 2.5.8 shows an external connection example in the UART mode.
3820 group ➀
XIN
8
Receive buffer register
Receive shift register
1/4
3820 group ➁
RxD
TxD
Clock control circuit
Clock control circuit
BRG
1/16 1/(n+1)
BRG
1/(n+1) 1/16
Transmit shift register
Transmit buffer register
8
8
Transmit buffer register
Transmit shift register
TxD
RxD
XIN
1/4
Receive shift register
Receive buffer register
8
3820 group ➂
TxD
RxD
Fig. 2.5.8 External connection example in UART mode
2–112
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
8
Transmit buffer register
Transmit shift register
XIN
Clock control circuit
BRG
1/(n+1)
1/16
1/4
Receive shift register
Receive buffer register
8
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Data transfer rate (baud rate)
When an internal clock is used, the data transfer rate (baud rate), which is a shift clock frequency in
the UART mode, is determined by baud rate generator (BRG). When the BRG count source selection
bit (bit 0) of the serial I/O1 control register (address 001A 16) is “0,” XIN pin input clock is input to the
BRG, when this bit is “0,” XIN pin input clock divided by 4 is input to the BRG. The expression for baud
rate is shown below.
●When selecting an internal clock (Using BRG)
Baud rate =
Division ratio
[bps]
XIN pin input
✽1
✕ (BRG setting value
✽2
+ 1) ✕ 16
✽1 Division ratio; Select “1,” or “4”
✽2 BRG setting value; 0 to 255 (0016 to FF 16)
●When selecting an external clock
Baud rate =
[bps]
Frequency of input clock to P4 6/S CLK1 pin
16
Table 2.5.1 Baud rate selection table (reference values)
Baud rates [bps]
At X IN input = 4.9152 MHz
BRG count source
BRG setting value
At X IN input = 8 MHz
300
488.28125
XIN input/4
255 (FF 16)
600
976.5625
XIN input/4
127 (7F16 )
1200
1953.125
XIN input/4
63 (3F 16)
2400
3906.25
XIN input/4
31 (1F 16)
4800
7812.5
XIN input/4
15 (0F 16)
9600
15625
XIN input/4
7 (07 16 )
19200
31250
XIN input/4
3 (03 16 )
38400
62500
XIN input/4
1 (01 16 )
76800
125000
XIN input/4
0 (00 16 )
153600
250000
XIN input
1 (01 16 )
307200
500000
XIN input
0 (00 16 )
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–113
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Transfer data format
Data transfer format is set by the UART control register (address 001B16). Figure 2.5.9 shows a
transfer data format in the UART mode, Table 2.5.2, the each bit function of UART transmit data,
Figure 2.5.10, all transfer data formats in the UART mode.
●For 1ST–8DATA–1PA–2SP
Next transmit data
(at continuous output)
Transmit data
Data bit (8 bits)
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D6
MSB
D7 PA
SP SP
ST
D0
D1
Fig. 2.5.9 Transfer data format in UART mode
Table 2.5.2 Each bit function of UART transmit data
Bit
ST
(Start bit)
DATA
(Data bit)
PA
(Parity bit)
SP
(Stop bit)
2–114
Functions
Indicates a start of data transmission. A “L” signal for one bit is added just before transmit
data.
Indicates the transmit data written in the transmit buffer register, “0 2” data is a “L” signal
and “1 2 ” data is a “H” signal. These bits are called as character bits.
To improve the reliability of data, this bit is added just after the last data bit. The value
of this bit changes in accordance with the value of the parity selection bit so that the
number of “1” in the transmit/receive data (including the parity bit) can always be an even
or an odd number.
Indicates an completion of data transmission. This bit is added just after the last data bit
(or just after a parity bit in the parity checking enabled). As a stop bit, a “H” signal for 1
bit or 2 bits is output.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
ST
Di
PA
SP
: Start bit
: Data bit
: Parity bit
: Stop bit
●For 7-bit UART mode
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
MSB
D6
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
MSB
D6
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
MSB
D6
PA
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
MSB
D6
PA
SP SP
SP
●For 8-bit UART mode
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
MSB
D7
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
MSB
D7
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D6
MSB
D7
PA
SP
ST
LSB
D0
D6
MSB
D7
PA
SP SP
D1
D1
D2
D2
D3
D3
D4
D4
D5
D5
SP
Fig. 2.5.10 All transfer data formats in UART mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–115
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Transmit operation in the UART mode
Transmit operation in the UART mode is described below.
●Start of transmit operation
A transmit operation is started by writing transmit data into the transmit buffer register (address
0018 16) in the transmit enable state. ✽1
●Transmit operation
➀By writing transmit data into the transmit buffer
register, the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0)
of the serial I/O1 status register (address
001916 ) is cleared to “0.”
Data bus
[Address 1816]
Write transmit data
Transmit buffer register
b0
1
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
➁The transmit data written in the transmit buffer
register is transferred to the transmit shift
register.✽2
0
Transmit buffer register
Transfer transmit data
Transmit shift register
➂When a data transfer from the transmit buffer
register to the transmit shift register is completed, the transmit buffer empty flag is
set to “1.”✽3
➃The transmit data transferred to the transmit
shift register is output from the P45 /TxD pin
in synchronization with the falling of the shift
clock, beginning with the start bit. A start bit,
a parity bit and a stop bit are automatically
generated and output in accordance with the
contents set in the UART control register.
0
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
b0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Transmit shift register
➄The data is output from the least significant
bit of the transmit shift register. Each time 1bit data is output, the data of the transmit
shift register is shifted by 1 bit toward the
least significant bit.
b0
D7 D6 D 5 D 4 D 3 D2 D1
Transmit shift register
1
b0
ST
P45/TxD
D0
P45/TxD
✽1: Initialization of register or others for a transmit operation. Refer to “2.5.4 Register setting example.”
✽2: When the transmit interrupt source selection bit (bit 3) of the serial I/O1 control register (address
001A16 ) is set to “0,” a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs immediately after transfer in
➁. When this bit is set to “1,” a transmit interrupt request occurs at the time of ➆.
✽3: While the transmit buffer empty flag is “1,” it is possible to write the next transmit data into the
transmit/receive buffer register.
2–116
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
➅At the time when a transmit shift operation
starts, the transmit shift register shift completion flag (bit 2) of the serial I/O1 status
register is cleared to “0.” ✽4
b0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Transmit shift register
P45/TxD
1
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
➆After the lapse of a 1/2 period ✽5 of the shift
clock from a transmission start of stop bit,
the transmit shift register shift completion flag
is set to “1.” ✽2 ✽4
ST
0
b2
SP
P45/TxD
0
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
1
b2
✽4: When an internal clock is used as a synchronizing clock, supplying the shift clock
to the transmit shift register stops automatically at the completion of 8-bit transmission. However, when the next transmit data is written
to the transmit buffer register while the transmit shift register shift completion flag is “0,” supplying
the shift clock is continued.
✽5: In the case of 2 stop bits, after the lapse of a 1/2 period of the shift clock from a start of the
second stop bit transmission.
Shift clock
Write transmit data to transmit buffer register
Write next transmit data
Transmit buffer
empty flag
Transmit shift
register shift
completion flag
TXD
ST
D0
D1
D2
D6
PAR
SP SP
ST
D0
Fig. 2.5.11 Transmit timing example in UART mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–117
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Receive operation in the UART mode
Receive operation in the UART mode is described below.
●Start of receive operation
In the receive enable state, ✽1 set the receive enable bit (bit 5) of the serial I/O1 control register
(address 001A 16 ) into the enabled state (“1”). With this operation, a start bit is detected and a
receive operation of serial data is started.
●Receive operation
➀With the lapse of a 1/2 period of the shift
clock from detection of the falling of the P44/
RxD pin input, the P4 4 /RxD pin level is
checked. When it is “L” level, the bit is judged
as a start bit.
When it is “H” level, the bit is judged as noise,
so the receive operation is stopped, being
put into wait status for a start bit again.
Shift clock
RXD (Noise)
RXD (ST)
➁Each 1-bit data is read into the receive shift
register from the P44/RxD pin in synchronization with the rising of the shift clocks.
b0
D1
D0
Receive shift register
D4
D 3 D2 D 1 D 0
P44/RXD
➂The data after the detection of the start bit
enters first into the most significant bit of the
receive shift register. Each time 1-bit data is
received, the data of the receive shift register is shifted by 1 bit toward the least significant bit.
➃When a specified number of bits has been
input into the receive shift register, the data
of the receive shift register are transferred to
the receive buffer register (address
001816). ✽2✽3
b0
P44/RXD
Receive shift register
Receive shift register D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Transfer receive data
[Address 1816] Receive buffer register
✽1: Initialization of register or others for a receive operation. Refer to “2.5.4 Register setting example.”
✽2: When the data bit length is 7 bits, bits 0 to 6 of the receive buffer register are receive data, and
bit 7 (MSB) is cleared to “0.”
✽3: When data remains without reading out the data of the receive buffer register (the receive buffer
full flag is “1”) and yet all the receive data has been input to the receive shift register, the overrun
error flag of the serial I/O1 status register is set to “1.” At this time, the data of the receive shift
register is not transferred to the receive buffer register, but the former data of the receive buffer
register is held.
2–118
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
➄After the lapse of a 1/2 period of the shift
clock from a reception start of stop bit, the
receive buffer full flag (bit 1) of the serial
I/O1 status register is set to “1.” And a serial
I/O1 receive interrupt request occurs.
➅Error flag detection is performed concurrently
with the occurrence of a serial I/O1 receive
interrupt request.
Shift clock
RXD (SP)
0
Serial I/O1 status
register
[Address 1916]
1
b1
✽4: The receive buffer full flag is cleared to “0”
by reading out the receive buffer register.
Write “1”
Receive enable bit
Start receiving at falling of ST
Check that ST is “L” level
RXD
ST
D0
D1
D2
D6
PAR
SP
SP
ST D0
Shift clock
Fig. 2.5.12 Receive timing example in UART mode
(3) Processing upon occurrence of errors
■Parity error, framing error, or summing error
When a parity error, a framing error, or a summing error occurs, the flag corresponding to each error
in the serial I/O1 status register is set to “1.” These flags are not cleared to “0” automatically, so set
them to “0” by software.
These flags are set to “0” by one of the following operations.
•Set the receive enable bit to “0”
•Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register
■Overrun error
An overrun error occurs when data is already input in the receive buffer register and yet all data is
input in the receive shift register.
If an overrun error occurs, the data of the receive shift register is not transferred and the data of the
receive buffer register is held. At this time, even if the data of the receive buffer register is read out,
the data of the receive shift register is not transferred.
Consequently, the data of the receive shift register becomes unreadable, so that the receive data
becomes invalid.
If an overrun error occurs, after set the overrun error flag of the serial I/O1 status register to “0,”
perform a receive operation again.
The overrun error flag is set to “0” by one of the following operations.
•Set the serial I/O1 enable bit to “0”
•Set the receive enable bit to “0”
•Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–119
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.2 Pins
The serial I/O1 uses 4 pins, namely, pins for data transmit, data receive, shift clock transmit/receive, and
receive enable signal output. All these pins are also used as port P4 and switched their functions by the
serial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7) and S RDY1 output enable bit (bit 2) of the serial I/O1 control register (address
001A16).
The function of each pin is described below.
(1) Data transmit pin [TxD]
This pin outputs each bit of transmit data and is used as port P45 .
When the serial I/O1 enable bit of the serial I/O1 control register is set to “1,” this pin functions as
a serial I/O1 data output pin.
(2) Data receive pin [RxD]
This pin inputs each bit of receive data and is used as port P44.
When the serial I/O1 enable bit of the serial I/O1 control register is set to “1,” this pin functions as
a serial I/O1 data input pin.
(3) Shift clock transmit/receive pin [SCLK1 ]
■Clock synchronous mode
This pin inputs (receives from the outside) or outputs (supplies to the outside) a shift clock used for
transmission and reception.
When the serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (bit 1) of the serial I/O1 control register is set
to “0” (use of internal clock), a shift clock is output to the outside. When this bit is set to “1” (use of
external clock), a shift clock is input from the outside.
■UART mode
When the serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (bit 1) of the serial I/O1 control register is set
to “1” (use of external clock), a shift clock is supplied from the outside. When this bit is set to “0” (use
of internal clock), this pin does not function.
(4) Receive enable signal output pin [S RDY1]
This pin notifies the outside of the receive enable state in the clock synchronous mode. This pin does
not function in the UART mode.
•The S RDY1 output enable bit (bit 2) of the serial I/O1 control register is set to “1.”
•The transmit enable bit (bit 4) of the serial I/O1 control register is set to “1.”
When the above two conditions are satisfied, the pin level changes from “H” to “L” at the timing which
data is written into the receive buffer register, notifying the outside of the receive enable state.
2–120
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.3 Related registers
Figure 2.5.13 shows the memory allocation of serial
I/O1-related registers. They are the transmit/receive
buffer register, serial I/O1 status register, serial
I/O1 control register, and UART control register.
Address
001816
(1) Transmit/receive buffer register (TB/RB)
This register (address 0018 16) is used to write
serial I/O1 transmit data or to read receive data
(used for both the clock synchronous mode and
the UART mode).
For data transmission, transmit data is written
into this register.
Received data is obtained by reading out this
register.
001916
001A16
001B16
Transmit/receive buffer register
(TB/RB)
Serial I/O1 status register
(SIO1STS)
Serial I/O1 control register
(SIO1CON)
UART control register
(UARTCON)
Fig. 2.5.13 Memory allocation of serial I/O1-related
registers
Transmit/receive buffer register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Transmit/receive buffer register (TB/RB) [Address 1816]
B
Functions
At reset R W
0 At transmit
?
to •Set “0016 to FF16” as transmit data.
7 •The transmit data is transferred automatically
to transmit shift register by writing transmit
data.
At receive
•When all receive data has been input into the
receive shift register, the receive data is automatically transferred to this register.
Fig. 2.5.14 Structure of transmit/receive buffer register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–121
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(2) Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS)
This register (address 0019 16) consists of the following flags:
•flags representing the states of the registers used for transmission/reception
•error flags.
This is a read-only register.
Bit 7 is unused and set to “1” at reading.
Serial I/O1 status register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS) [Address 1916]
B
Name
0
Transmit buffer
empty flag (TBE)
1 Receive buffer full flag
(RBF)
2 Transmit shift register shift
completion flag (TSC)
3 Overrun error flag
(OE)
4 Parity error flag
(PE)
5 Framing error flag
(FE)
6 Summing error flag
(SE)
7
Functions
0: Buffer full
1: Buffer empty
0: Buffer empty
1: Buffer full
0: Transmit shift in progress
1: Transmit shift completed
0: No error
1: Overrun error
0: No error
1: Parity error
0: No error
1: Framing error
0: (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 0
1: (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 1
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to
and is fixed to “1” at reading.
At reset R W
×
0
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
1
1 ×
Fig. 2.5.15 Structure of serial I/O1 status register
■Transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0)
This flag is automatically cleared to “0” by writing transmit data into the transmit buffer register.
After the transmit data is written in the transmit buffer register, it is transferred to the transmit shift
register. When this transfer is completed and the transmit buffer register becomes empty, this flag is
automatically is set to “1.”
It is possible to write transmit data into the transmit buffer register only while the transmit buffer empty
flag is “1.”
This flag is valid in both the clock synchronous mode and the UART mode.
■Receive buffer full flag (bit 1)
When all receive data has been input to the receive shift register and then this receive data is
transferred to the receive buffer register, this flag is automatically is set to “1.”
When the transferred receive data is read out from the receive buffer register, the flag is automatically
is cleared to “0.”
If all the next receive data is input to the receive shift register when the receive buffer flag is “1” (the
receive buffer register is not yet read out), the overrun error flag is set to “1.”
This flag is valid in both the clock synchronous mode and the UART mode.
2–122
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Transmit shift register shift completion flag (bit 2)
When a shift operation (transmission of the first data bit) is started by shift clock after transmit data
is transferred to the transmit shift register, this flag is cleared to “0.” When the shift operation is
completed (completion of transmission of the last data bit), the flag is set to “1.”
This flag is valid in both the clock synchronous mode and the UART mode.
■Overrun error flag (bit 3)
If all the next receive data is input to the receive shift register when data has been input (not read
out) in the receive buffer register, this flag is set to “1” (occurrence of an overrun error). This flag is
set to “0” by one of the following operations.
•Set the serial I/O1 enable bit to “0”
•Set the receive enable bit to “0”
•Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register
This flag is valid in both the synchronous mode and the UART mode.
■Parity error flag (bit 4)
In the UART mode, this flag checks an even parity or odd parity by hardware.
When the parity of received data is different from the set parity, this flag is set to “1.”
This flag is set to “0” by one of the following operations.
•Set the receive enable bit to “0”
•Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register
This flag is valid only in the parity enable state in the UART mode.
■Framing error flag (bit 5)
In the UART mode, this flag judges whether frame synchronization is abnormal.
When the stop bit of receive data cannot be received at the set timing, this flag is set to “1.”
This flag is set to “0” by one of the following operations.
•Set the receive enable bit to “0”
•Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register
This flag is valid only in the UART mode.
■Summing error flag (bit 6)
This flag is set to “1” when an overrun error, parity error, or framing error occurs.
This flag is set to “0” by one of the following operations.
•Set the receive enable bit to “0”
•Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register
This flag is valid in both the clock synchronous mode and the UART mode.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–123
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(3) Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON)
This register (address 001A16) controls various functions related to the serial I/O1, such as transmit/
receive modes, clocks, and pin functions. All the bits of this register are read and written by software.
Serial I/O1 control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) [Address 1A16]
B
0
Name
BRG count source
selection bit (CSS)
Functions
0: f(XIN)
1: f(XIN)/4
0
1
•In clock synchronous mode
Serial I/O1
synchronization clock 0: BRG output/4
1: External clock input
selection bit
(SCS)
•In UART mode
0: BRG output/16
1: External clock input/16
0
2
SRDY1 output enable 0: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47
1: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as signal output
bit (SRDY)
pin SRDY1
(SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state)
0
3
Transmit interrupt
source selection
bit (TIC)
0: When transmit buffer has emptied
1: When transmit shift operation is
completed
0
4
Transmit enable bit
(TE)
0: Transmit disabled
1: Transmit enabled
0
5
Receive enable bit
(RE)
0: Receive disabled
1: Receive enabled
0
6
Serial I/O1 mode
selection bit (SIOM)
0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART)
mode
1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode
0
7
Serial I/O1 enable bit 0: Serial I/O1 disabled
(pins P44–P47 operate as I/O pins)
(SIOE)
1: Serial I/O1 enabled
(pins P44–P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Fig. 2.5.16 Structure of serial I/O1 control register
2–124
At reset R W
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■BRG count source selection bit (bit 0)
This bit selects a count source to be input to the BRG. In the “0” state, an undivided XIN input signal
is input to the BRG. In the “1” state, an X IN input signal divided by 4 is input to the BRG.
■Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit (bit 1)
This bit selects a synchronizing clock to be used in the serial I/O1.
●Clock synchronous mode
When this bit is set to “0,” a BRG output divided by 4 becomes a shift clock.
In the “1” state, an external clock (P46 /SCLK1 pin input) becomes a shift clock as it is.
●UART mode
In the “0” state, a BRG output divided by 16 becomes a shift clock. In the “1” state, an external clock
(P4 6 /SCLK1 pin input) divided by 16 becomes a shift clock.
■SRDY1 output enable bit (bit 2)
When the S RDY1 function is used in the clock synchronous mode, set this bit to “1.” In the “0” state,
the P4 7 /SRDY1 pin functions as an I/O port P47.
In the UART mode, the value of this bit is invalid, so that the P4 7/S RDY1 pin functions as an I/O port
P4 7.
■Transmit interrupt source selection bit (bit 3)
This bit determines a source which generates a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request. In the “0” state,
a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs at the time when the values of the transmit buffer
register are transferred to the transmit shift register.
In the “1” state, a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs at the time when the shift operation of
the transmit shift register is completed.
■Transmit enable bit (bit 4)
This bit controls a transmit operation. This bit controls as shown in Table 2.5.3 only when the serial
I/O1 enable bit is “1” (serial I/O1 enabled). When the serial I/O1 enable bit is “0” (serial I/O1 disabled),
this bit is invalid.
Table 2.5.3 Control contents of transmit enable bit
Transmit enable bit
P45/T XD pin function
0
Port P45
1
Data transmit pin T XD
Transmit buffer empty flag
✽1
Transmit shift register
shift completion flag ✽2
Set to “0”
Flag function is valid
✽1: Bit 0 of serial I/O1 status register
✽2: Bit 2 of serial I/O1 status register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–125
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
■Receive enable bit (bit 5)
This bit controls receive operation. This bit controls as shown in Table 2.5.4 only when the serial
I/O1 enable bit (bit 7) is “1” (serial I/O1 enabled). When the serial I/O1 enable bit is “0” (serial I/O1
disabled), this bit is invalid.
Table 2.5.4 Control contents of receive enable bit
Receive enable bit
P44/RX D pin function
0
Port P4 4
1
Data receive pin R XD
Receive buffer full flag
✽1
Each error flag✽2
Set to “0”
Flag function is valid
✽1: Bit 1 of serial I/O1 status register
✽2: Bits 3, 4, 5, and 6 of serial I/O1 status register
■Serial I/O1 mode selection bit (bit 6)
This bit selects a transmit/receive mode of the serial I/O1. In the UART mode, set this bit to “0.” In
the clock synchronous mode, set it to “1.”
■Serial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7)
When the serial I/O1 function is used, set this bit to “1.”
When the bit is set to “1,” the pins P44/RxD, P45/TxD, and P46/SCLK1 function as RxD, TxD, and SCLK1
respectively (Furthermore, when the SRDY1 output enable bit is set to “1,” the P47/SRDY1 pin functions
as an S RDY1 pin).
In the “0” state, they function as ports P44 –P47 respectively.
2–126
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(4) UART control register (UARTCON)
This register (address 001B 16 ) controls the transfer data format in the UART mode and the output
format of the P4 5/TxD pin.
UART control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
UART control register (UARTCON) [Address 1B16]
B
Name
0 Character length
selection bit (CHAS)
1
2
3
4
5
to
7
Functions
0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
0: Parity checking disabled
1: Parity checking enabled
Parity enable bit
(PARE)
Parity selection bit
0: Even parity
(PARS)
1: Odd parity
0: 1 stop bit
Stop bit length
selection bit (STPS) 1: 2 stop bits
0: CMOS output (in output mode)
P45/TxD P-channel
1: N-channel open-drain output
output disable bit
(in output mode)
(POFF)
Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written
to and are fixed to “1” at reading.
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
1
1 ×
Fig. 2.5.17 Structure of UART control register
■Character length selection bit (bit 0)
This bit selects data bit length of the UART transfer data format.
In the “0” state, the data bit length is 8 bits. In the “1” state, the data bit length is 7 bits.
■Parity enable bit (bit 1)
This bit is set to “1” to make a parity check and to “0” to make no parity check.
In the “1” state, the parity error flag becomes valid.
■Parity selection bit (bit 2)
This bit selects a parity type of the UART transfer data format.
In the “0” state, the parity type is an even parity. In the “1” state, it is an odd parity.
■Stop bit length selection bit (bit 3)
This bit selects a stop bit length of the UART transfer data format.
In the “0” state, the stop bit length is 1 stop bit.
In the “1” state, the stop bit length is 2 stop bits.
■P45/TxD P-channel output disable bit (bit 4)
This bit controls the output type of the P4 5/TxD pin.
In the “0” state, the output type is CMOS output in the output mode. In the “1” state, the output type
is N-channel open-drain output in the output mode.
The 5 low-order bits of the UART control register can be read and written. The 3 high-order bits are
unused and read-only bits. At reading, all the bits are set to “1.”
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–127
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Table 2.5.5 Relation between UART control register and transfer data formats
UART control register
Transfer data format
b3 b2 b1 b0
0
0
0
0
1
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
X
X
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ST–8
ST–7
ST–8
ST–7
ST–8
ST–7
ST–8
ST–7
DATA–1
DATA–1
DATA–1
DATA–1
DATA–2
DATA–2
DATA–1
DATA–1
SP
SP
PA–1
PA–1
SP
SP
PA–2
PA–2
SP
SP
SP
SP
X: “0” or “1”
ST: Start bit
DATA: Data bit
PA: Parity bit
SP: Stop bit
2–128
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.4 Register setting example
(1) Clock synchronous serial I/O mode
Figure 2.5.18 and Figure 2.5.19 show a transmitting method in the clock synchronous mode. Figure
2.5.20 and Figure 2.5.21 show a receiving method in the clock synchronous mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: To use an INT pin or input port for watching SRDY1, set as required.
2: When an external clock is selected in setting ➂ below, BRG setting is not required in
setting ➁ below.
3: In the full duplex data transfer mode, set the receive enable bit (bit 5) to “1” (receive
enabled) in setting ➂ below.
4: To use a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, set in the following sequence.
5: When no serial I/O1 transmit interrupt is used, omit settings ➀, ➃, ➄, ➅ and ➇ below.
➀Disable Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
b7
b0
0
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit
0: Interrupts disabled
➁Set the value to baud rate generator (BRG) [Address 1C16]
➂Setting of serial I/O1 control register
Selection of clock synchronous, transmit, or others
b7
1 1
b0
1
SIO1CON: Serial I/O1 control register [Address 1A16]
b0: BRG count source selection bit
0: f(XIN)
1: f(XIN)/4
b1: Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit
(In clock synchronous mode)
0: BRG output/4
1: External clock input
b2: SRDY1 output enable bit
0: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47
1: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as signal output pin SRDY1
(SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state)
b3: Transmit interrupt source selection bit
0: When transmit buffer has emptied
1: When transmit shift operation is completed
b4: Transmit enable bit
1: Transmit enabled
b5: Receive enable bit
0: Receive disabled
1: Receive enabled
b6: Serial I/O1 mode selection bit
1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode
b7: Serial I/O1 enable bit
1: Serial I/O1 enabled
(pins P44–P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Continued to Figure 2.5.19
Fig. 2.5.18 Transmitting method in clock synchronous mode (1)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–129
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Continued from Figure 2.5.18
➃One or more instructions (e.g., NOP) after ➂
➄Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request to “0”
b7
b0
IREQ1: Interrupt request register 1 [Address 3C16]
0
b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit
0: No interrupts request issued
➅Enable serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
b7
b0
1
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit
1: Interrupts enabled
➆Set transmit data to transmit buffer register (TB) [Address 1816]
➇Processing of serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
Fig. 2.5.19 Transmitting method in clock synchronous mode (2)
2–130
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: To use an INT pin or input port for watching SRDY1, set as required.
2: When an external clock is selected in setting ➂ below, BRG setting is not required in
setting ➁ below.
3: In the full duplex data transfer mode, set the receive enable bit (bit 4) to “1” (receive
enabled) in setting ➂ below.
4: To use a serial I/O1 receive interrupt, set in the following sequence.
5: When no serial I/O1 receive interrupt is used, omit setting ➀, ➃, ➄, ➅ and ➇ below.
➀Disable Serial I/O1 receive interrupt
b7
b0
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit
0: Interrupts disabled
0
➁Set the value to baud rate generator (BRG) [Address 1C16]
➂Setting of serial I/O1 control register
Selection of clock synchronous, receive, or others
b7
1 1 1
b0
SIO1CON: Serial I/O1 control register [Address 1A16]
b0: BRG count source selection bit
0: f(XIN)
1: f(XIN)/4
b1: Serial I/O synchronization clock selection bit
(In clock synchronous mode)
0: BRG output/4
1: External clock input
b2: SRDY1 output enable bit
0: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47
1: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as signal output pin SRDY1
(SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state)
b3: Transmit interrupt source selection bit
0: When transmit buffer has emptied
1: When transmit shift operation is completed
b4: Transmit enable bit
0: Transmit disabled
1: Transmit enabled
b5: Receive enable bit
1: Receive enabled
b6: Serial I/O1 mode selection bit
1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode
b7: Serial I/O1 enable bit
1: Serial I/O1 enabled
(pins P44–P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Continued to Figure 2.5.21
Fig. 2.5.20 Receiving method in clock synchronous mode (1)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–131
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Continued from Figure 2.5.20
➃One or more instructions (e.g., NOP) after ➂
➄Set the serial I/O1 receive interrupt request to “0”
b7
b0
IREQ1: Interrupt request register 1 [Address 3C16]
0
b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit
0: No interrupt request issued
➅Enable serial I/O1 receive interrupt
b7
b0
1
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit
1: Interrupts enabled
➆Set transmit data to receive buffer register (RB) [Address 1816]
In full duplex data transfer mode, set transmit data.
In half duplex data transfer mode, set arbitrary dummy data.
➇Processing of serial I/O1 receive interrupt
Fig. 2.5.21 Receiving method in clock synchronous mode (2)
2–132
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(2) Clock asynchronous serial I/O (UART) mode
Figure 2.5.22 and Figure 2.5.23 show a transmitting method in the UART mode. Figure 2.5.24 and
Figure 2.5.25 show a receiving method in the UART mode.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: When an external clock is selected in setting ➂ below, BRG setting is not required in
setting ➁ below.
2: In the full duplex data transfer mode, set the receive enable bit (bit 5) to “1” (receive
enabled) in setting ➂ below.
3: To use a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, set in the following sequence.
4: When no serial I/O1 transmit interrupt is used, omit setting ➀, ➄, ➅ and ➇ below.
➀Disable Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
b7
b0
0
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit
0: Interrupts disabled
➁Set the value to baud rate generator (BRG) [Address 1C16]
➂Setting of serial I/O1 control register
Selection of clock asynchronous mode, transmit, or others
b7
1 0
b0
1
SIO1CON: Serial I/O1 control register [Address 1A16]
b0: BRG count source selection bit
0: f(XIN)
1: f(XIN)/4
b1: Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit
(In UART mode)
0: BRG output/16
1: External clock input/16
b2: SRDY1 output enable bit
Invalied in UART mode
b3: Transmit interrupt source selection bit
0: When transmit buffer has emptied
1: When transmit shift operation is completed
b4: Transmit enable bit
1: Transmit enabled
b5: Receive enable bit
0: Receive disabled
1: Receive enabled
b6: Serial I/O1 mode selection bit
0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode
b7: Serial I/O1 enable bit
1: Serial I/O1 enabled
(pins P44–P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Continued to Figure 2.5.23
Fig. 2.5.22 Transmitting method in UART mode (1)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–133
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Continued from Figure 2.5.22
➃Setting of UART control register
b7
b0
UARTCON: UART control register [Address 1B16]
b0: Character length selection bit
0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
b1: Parity enable bit
0: Parity checking disabled
1: Parity checking enabled
b2: Parity selection bit
0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
b3: Stop bit length selection bit
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
b4: P45/TxD P-channel output disable bit
0: CMOS output (in output mode)
1: N-channel open-drain output (in output mode)
: Nothing is allocated
➄Set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request to “0”
b7
(Allow an interval of one or more instructions after ➂)
b0
IREQ1: Interrupt request register 1 [Address 3C16]
0
b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit
0: No interrupt request issued
➅Enable serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
b7
b0
1
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b3: Serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit
1: Interrupts enabled
➆Set transmit data to transmit buffer register (TB) [Address 1816]
➇Processing of serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
Fig. 2.5.23 Transmitting method in UART mode (2)
2–134
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: When an external clock is selected in setting ➂ below, BRG setting is not required in
setting ➁ below.
2: In the full duplex data transfer mode, set the receive enable bit (bit 4) to “1” (receive
enabled) in setting ➂ below.
3: To use a serial I/O1 receive interrupt, set in the following sequence.
4: When no serial I/O1 receive interrupt is used, omit setting ➀, ➄, ➅ and ➆ below.
➀Disable Serial I/O1 receive interrupt
b7
b0
0
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit
0: Interrupts disabled
➁Set the value to baud rate generator (BRG) [Address 1C16]
➂Setting of serial I/O1 control register
Selection of clock asynchronous, receive, or others
b7
1 0 1
b0
SIO1CON: Serial I/O1 control register [Address 1A16]
b0: BRG count source selection bit
0: f(XIN)
1: f(XIN)/4
b1: Serial I/O1 synchronization clock selection bit
(In UART mode)
0: BRG output/16
1: External clock input/16
b2: SRDY1 output enable bit
Invalied in UART mode
b3: Transmit interrupt source selection bit
0: When transmit buffer has emptied
1: When transmit shift operation is completed
b4: Transmit enable bit
0: Transmit disabled
1: Transmit enabled
b5: Receive enable bit
1: Receive enabled
b6: Serial I/O1 mode selection bit
0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART) mode
b7: Serial I/O1 enable bit
1: Serial I/O1 enabled
(pins P44–P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
Continued to Figure 2.5.25
Fig. 2.5.24 Receiving method in UART mode (1)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–135
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
Continued from Figure 2.5.24
➃Setting of UART control register
b7
b0
UARTCON: UART control register [Address 1B16]
b0: Character length selection bit
0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
b1: Parity enable bit
0: Parity checking disabled
1: Parity checking enabled
b2: Parity selection bit
0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
b3: Stop bit length selection bit
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
b4: P45/TxD P-channel output disable bit
0: CMOS output (in output mode)
1: N-channel open-drain output (in output mode)
: Nothing is allocated
➄Clear the serial I/O1 receive interrupt request
(Allow an interval of one or more instruction after ➂)
b0
b7
IREQ1: Interrupt request register 1 [Address 3C16]
0
b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt request bit
0: No interrupt issued
➅Enable serial I/O1 receive interrupt
b7
b0
1
ICON1: Interrupt control register 1 [Address 3E16]
b2: Serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit
1: Interrupts enabled
➆Processing of serial I/O1 receive interrupt
Fig. 2.5.25 Receiving method in UART mode (2)
2–136
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(3) Initialization of serial I/O1 operation
The operating procedure of the serial I/O1 control register for initialization of the serial I/O1 operation
is described below.
■Initialization of receive operation
By setting the receive enable bit (bit 5 of SIO1CON) to “0” or setting the serial I/O1 enable bit (bit 7
of SIO1CON) to “0,” the receive operation is stopped and initialized as shown below. The initialization
items of receive operation are as follows.
•Stopping and initializing the shift clock to the receive shift register.
•Setting the receive shift register to “0.”
•Setting each error flag (overrun error flag, parity error flag, framing error flag, summing error flag) to
“0.”
•Setting the receive buffer full flag (RBF) to “0.”
■Initialization of transmit operation
Basically, the transmit operation is stopped and initialized by setting the transmit enable bit (bit 4 of
SIO1CON) to “0.” The initialization items of transmit operation are as follows.
•Stopping and initializing the shift clock to the transmit shift register.
•Setting the receive shift register to “0.” (However, when an external clock is used in the clock
synchronous mode, the receive shift register is not set to “0” unless the input clock of the SCLK1 pin
is “H.”)
•Setting the transmit buffer empty flag (bit 0 of SIO1STS) and the transmit shift register shift completion flag (bit 2 of SIO1STS) to “0.”
(When bit 4 is set to “0,” bits 0 and 2 are cleared to “0” forcibly. After that, when bit 4 is set to “1,”
bits 0 and 2 are set to “1.”)
When all conditions below are satisfied, initialization is not performed only by setting bit 4 of SIO1CON
to “0.” It is also necessary to set bit 5 of SIO1CON to “0.”
•In the full duplex data transfer
•In the clock synchronous mode
•When an internal clock is used
•When bit 5 of SIO1CON is “1” (receive enabled)
In the clock synchronous mode of the full duplex data transfer, the same clock is used for transmission
and reception.
When an internal clock is used, the shift clock is started by writing data into the transmit buffer at both
transmission and reception, so both transmit and receive operations use a clock generating circuit of
the transmitter.
Because of this, the serial I/O1 is designed so that even if only a receive operation is performed, the
transmit circuit may be operated internally to generate a shift clock when an internal clock is used in
the clock synchronous mode. Accordingly, note that the transmitter may operate even when bit 4 of
SIO1CON is “0.” The transmit operation cannot be initialized only by setting the serial I/O1 enable bit
(bit 7 of SIO1CON) to “0.”
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–137
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(4) Processing upon occurrence of an errors
■Parity error, framing error, or summing error
If a parity error, a framing error, or a summing error occurs, the flag corresponding to each error in
the serial I/O1 status register is set to “1.” These flags cannot be cleared to “0” automatically, so set
them to “0” by software.
The parity error flag, framing error flag, and summing error flag is set to “0” by setting the receive
enable bit to “0” or writing dummy data into the serial I/O1 status register.
■Overrun error
An overrun error occurs when data is already input in the receive buffer register and yet all data is
input in the receive shift register.
If an overrun error occurs, the data of the receive shift register is not transferred and the data of the
receive buffer register is held. At this time, even if the data of the receive buffer register is read out,
the data of the receive shift register is not transferred.
Consequently, the data of the receive shift register becomes unreadable, so that the receive data
becomes invalid.
If an overrun error occurs, after set the overrun error flag of the serial I/O1 status register to “0,”
perform a receive operation again.
The overrun error flag is set to “0” by one of the following operations.
•Set the serial I/O1 enable bit to “0”
•Set the receive enable bit to “0”
•Write data (arbitrary) into the serial I/O1 status register
2–138
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
2.5.5 Notes on use
(1) Notes on clock selection
The 3820 group can select either internal clock or external clock as a synchronizing clock. When an
external clock is selected as an synchronizing clock in the clock synchronous mode, note the following.
■In the clock synchronous mode
➀For an external clock source, when the duty cycle is 50%, use the following clock.
1.25 MHz or less....... at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
500 kHz or less.........at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
To change the duty cycle, set the both “H” and “L” widths as follows.
370 ns min. ............. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
950 ns min. ............. at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
➁The shift operation of the transmit shift register or the receive shift register is continued while
synchronizing clocks are input to the serial I/O1 circuit. Accordingly, stop a synchronizing clock input
after 8 clocks are input.
When the internal clock is selected, the synchronizing clock input is automatically stopped.
➂To select an external clock as a synchronizing clock at data transmission, set the transmit enable
bit to “1” and write data into the transmit buffer register while the SCLK1 signal is “H.”
When an external clock is selected as a synchronizing clock in the UART mode, note the following.
■In the UART mode
For an external clock source, when the duty ratio is 50%, use the following clock.
5 MHz or less..... at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
2 MHz or less..... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
To change the duty cycle, set the “H” and “L” widths as follows.
93 ns min. ........at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
238 ns min. ........at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
(2) For serial I/O1 transmit or receive interrupts
➀For a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, set a value in the serial I/O1 control register, then set the serial
I/O1 transmit interrupt request bit (bit 3 at address 003C16 ) to “0” with the CLB instruction.
➁After setting ➀, set the serial I/O1 transmit enable bit (bit 3 at address 003E16 ) to “1.”
➂For a serial I/O1 receive interrupt, set a value in the serial I/O1 control register, then set the serial
I/O1 receive interrupt request bit (bit 2 at address 003C16) to “0” with the CLB instruction.
➃After setting ➂, set the serial I/O1 receive interrupt enable bit (bit 2 at address 003E 16 ) to “1.”
(3) Transmit interrupt request when the transmit enable bit is “1”
When the transmit enable bit is set to “1,” the transmit buffer empty flag and the transmit shift register
shift completion flag are set to “1.” Accordingly, even if either timing is selected as transmit interrupt
generating timing, an serial I/O1 transmit interrupt request occurs and the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt
request bit is set to “1.”
To use a serial I/O1 transmit interrupt, set the transmit enable bit to “1,” then set the serial I/O1
transmit interrupt request bit to “0” once. After that, set the serial I/O1 transmit interrupt enable bit to
“1” (interrupts enabled).
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–139
APPLICATION
2.5 Serial I/O1
(4) For disabling transmission after completion of 1-byte data transmission
As a means to know the completion of data transmission, a reference to the transmit shift register shift
completion flag (TSC flag) is available in the 3820 group.
The TSC flag is cleared to “0” during data transmission. Upon the completion of data transmission,
this flag is set to “1.” Accordingly, after confirming that the TSC flag is set to “1,” disable transmission.
The transmission can thus be terminated after 1-byte transmission. However, the TSC flag is set to
“1” even when the serial I/O1 enable bit is set to “1” (serial I/O1 enabled). After that, it is not cleared
to “0” until transmission is started by generating a shift clock. For this reason, if transmission is
disabled by referring to the TSC flag at this time, data is not transmitted. After the transmission is
started, refer to the TSC flag.
(5) When the P4 5 /TxD pin is used as an N-channel open-drain output
Bit 4 of the UART control register (address 001B16) is the P45/TxD P-channel output disable bit. The
bit 4 is valid in an ordinary port, in the clock synchronous mode, or in the UART mode.
When this bit is “0,” the ordinary CMOS output is selected. When the bit is “1,” the N-channel opendrain output is selected.
However, do not apply to the P4 5/T X D a voltage of V CC + 0.3 V or more even when it is used as a
serial I/O1 function pin of the N-channel open-drain output.
2–140
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.1 Explanation of operations
The operations of the serial I/O2 are described below. The serial I/O2 operates only in the clock synchronous mode. When serial I/O2 is actually used, refer to “2.6.4 Register setting example.”
(1) Clock synchronous serial I/O mode
In the clock synchronous mode, 8 shift clocks generated in the synchronization circuit are used as
synchronizing clocks for transfer. In synchronization with these shift clocks, the transmit operation on
the transmitter and the receive operation on the receiver are simultaneously executed.
The transmitter transmits each 1-bit data from the P51/SOUT2 pin in synchronization with the falling of
the shift clocks.
The receiver receives each 1-bit data from the P5 0 /SIN2 pin in synchronization with the rising of the
shift clocks.
Figure 2.6.1 shows an external connection example of the serial I/O2.
3820 group ➀
3820 group ➁
Divider
XIN
1/8
1/16
1/32
1/64
1/128
1/256
Synchronization
circuit
Serial I/O2 register
SCLK2
SCLK2
SIN2
SOUT2
SIN2
SOUT2
8
Synchronization
circuit
Serial I/O2 register
8
Internal clock is selected
External clock is selected
Fig. 2.6.1 External connection example of serial I/O2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–141
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
■Shift clock
Ordinarily, when clock synchronous transfer is performed between microcomputers, an internal clock
is selected for one of them, and it outputs 8 shift clocks generated by a start of transmit operation from
the P5 2/SCLK2 pin. An external clock is selected for the other microcomputer, and it uses the clock
input from the P5 2/SCLK2 pin as a shift clock. Figure 2.6.2 shows a shift clock.
3820 group ➀
3820 group ➁
Divider
XIN
Shift clock
1/8
1/16
1/32
1/64
1/128
1/256
Synchronization
circuit
Serial I/O2 register
SCLK2
SCLK2
SIN2
SOUT2
SOUT2
SIN2
8
Serial I/O2 register
8
Internal clock is selected
External clock is selected
Fig. 2.6.2 Shift clock
2–142
Synchronization
circuit
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
■Transmit operation of the serial I/O2
Transmit operation of the serial I/O2 is described below (When LSB first is selected).
●Start of transmit operation
A transmit operation is started by writing transmit data into the serial I/O2 register (address 001F16)
in the transmit enable state.✽1
●Transmit operation
➀The transmit data written in the serial
I/O2 register is output from the P5 1 /S OUT2
pin in synchronization with the falling of the
shift clocks.
b0
D 7 D 6 D 5 D 4 D3 D 2 D 1
Serial I/O2 register
➁The data is output from the least significant
bit of the serial I/O2 register. Each time 1-bit
data is output, the data of the serial I/O2
register is shifted by 1 bit toward the least
significant bit.
➂When 8-bit transmit data has been transferred,
the serial I/O2 interrupt request bit is set to
“1” in synchronization with the rising of a shift
clock.✽2
b0
D 7 D 6 D 5 D4 D 3 D 2
D0
P51/SOUT2
D1
P51/SOUT2
Serial I/O2 register
b0
D7
Serial I/O2 register
Interrupt request
register 2
[Address 3D16]
P51/SOUT2
0
1
b6
✽1: Initialization of register or others for a transmit operation. Refer to “2.6.4 Register setting example.”
✽2: When an internal clock is used as a synchronizing clock, supplying the shift clock
to the serial I/O2 register stops automatically at the completion of 8-bit transmission.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–143
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
LSB first (when bit 5 of serial I/O2 control register is “0”) is selected
b7
b0
D 7 D 6 D5 D4 D 3 D 2 D 1 D 0
D 7 D6 D5 D 4 D 3 D 2 D 1
D0
D7 D6 D 5 D 4 D 3 D 2
D1
D7 D 6 D 5 D 4 D 3
D2
D7
Serial I/O2 register
Shift clock
Fig. 2.6.3 Transmit operation of serial I/O2
Shift clock
SOUT2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
Fig. 2.6.4 Transmit timing example of serial I/O2
2–144
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
D5
D6
D7
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
■Receive operation of the serial I/O2
Receive operation of the serial I/O2 is described below (When LSB first is selected).
●Start of receive operation
A receive operation is started by writing the following data into the serial I/O2 register (address
001F 16) in the receive enable state.✽1
•Transmit data in the full duplex data transfer mode
•Arbitrary dummy data in the half duplex data transfer mode
●Receive operation
➀Each 1-bit data is read into the serial I/O2
register from the P5 0 /SIN2 pin in synchronization with the rising of the shift clocks.
b0
D1
P50/SIN2
➁The data enters first into the most significant
bit of the serial I/O2 register. Each time 1-bit
data is received, the data of the serial I/O2
register is shifted by 1 bit toward the least
significant bit.
➂When 8-bit receive data transfer is completed,
the serial I/O2 interrupt request bit is set to
“1” in synchronization with the rising of a shift
clock.✽2
D0
Serial I/O2 register
b0
D4
P50/SIN2
D 3 D 2 D1 D 0
Serial I/O2 register
D 7 D 6 D 5 D 4 D3 D 2 D 1 D 0
P50/SIN2
Interrupt request
register 2
[Address 3D16]
Serial I/O2 register
0
1
b6
✽1: Initialization of register or others for a transmit operation. Refer to “2.6.4 Register setting example.”
✽2: When an internal clock is used as a synchronizing clock, supplying the shift clock
to the serial I/O2 register stops automatically at the completion of 8-bit transmission.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–145
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
LSB first (when bit 5 of serial I/O2 control register is “0”) is selected
b7
b0
D0
D1 D0
D2 D1 D0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Shift clock
Serial I/O2 register
Fig. 2.6.5 Receive operation of serial I/O2
Shift clock
RxD
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
Fig. 2.6.6 Receive timing example of serial I/O2
2–146
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
D5
D6
D7
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
■Transmit/receive timing example of the serial I/O2
Figure 2.6.7 shows a transmit/receive timing example of the serial I/O2 (the P53/S RDY2 pin is used).
3820 group ➀
3820 group ➁
SCLK2
SCLK2
SOUT2
SIN2
SRDY2
P53(SRDY2)
Shift clock
Serial I/O2 register
write signal
Serial I/O2 output
SOUT2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
Serial I/O2 input
SIN2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
(Note)
Receive enable signal
SRDY2
Set an interrupt request bit
Note: When an internal clock is selected, the P51/SOUT2 pin is put into the high-impedance state
after the completion of a transmit/receive.
Fig. 2.6.7 Transmit/receive timing example of serial I/O2 (P5 3/S RDY2 pin is used)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–147
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.2 Pins
The serial I/O2 uses 4 pins, namely, pins for data transmit, data receive, shift clock transmit/receive, and
receive enable signal output. All these pins are also used as port P5 and switched their functions by the
serial I/O2 port selection bit (bit 3), S RDY2 output enable bit (bit 4) and synchronization clock selection bit
(bit 6) of the serial I/O2 control register (address 001D 16).
The function of each pin is described below.
(1) Data transmit pin [S OUT2]
This pin outputs each bit of transmit data and is used as port P51. When the serial I/O2 port selection
bit (bit 3) of the serial I/O2 control register is set to “1,” this pin functions as a serial I/O2 data output
pin.
(2) Data receive pin [SIN2]
This pin inputs each bit of receive data and is used as port P50 . There is no register for selecting
between port function and data input pin function. Clear bit 5 of the port P5 direction register to “0”
(input mode).
(3) Shift clock transmit/receive pin [SCLK2 ]
This pin inputs (receives from the outside) or outputs (supplies to the outside) a shift clock used for
transmission and reception.
When the synchronization clock selection bit (bit 6) of the serial I/O2 control register is set to “0” (use
of external clock), a shift clock is input from the outside. When this bit is set to “1” (use of internal
clock), a shift clock is output to the outside.
(4) Receive enable signal output pin [S RDY2]
This pin notifies the outside of the receive enable state in the clock synchronous mode.
This pin functions as the receive enable signal output pin by setting the SRDY2 output enable bit (bit
4) of the serial I/O2 control register to “1.”
The pin level changes from “H” to “L” at the timing which data is written into the serial I/O2 register,
notifying the outside of the receive enable state.
2–148
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.3 Related registers
Figure 2.6.8 shows the memory allocation of the
serial I/O2-related registers. They are the serial
I/O2 control register and serial I/O2 register.
Address
001D16
Serial I/O2 control register
(SIO2CON)
001F16
Serial I/O2 register
(SIO2)
Fig. 2.6.8 Memory allocation of serial I/O2-related
registers
(1) Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON)
The serial I/O2 control register (address 001D 16) controls the serial I/O2 function.
Serial I/O2 control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON) [Address 1D16]
B
Name
Internal
0
synchronization
clock select bits
1
2
Functions
b2b1b0
0 0 0: f(XIN)/8
0 0 1: f(XIN)/16
0 1 0: f(XIN)/32
0 1 1: f(XIN)/64
1 0 0:
Do not set
1 0 1:
1 1 0: f(XIN)/128
1 1 1: f(XIN)/256
At reset R W
0
0
0
3 Serial I/O2 port
selection bit
0: I/O port (P51, P52)
1: SOUT2, SCLK2 signal output
0
4
SRDY2 output
enable bit
0: I/O port (P53)
1: SRDY2 signal output
0
5
Transfer direction
selection bit
0: LSB first
1: MSB first
0
0: External clock
1: Internal clock
0
6 Synchronization
clock selection bit
7
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and
is fixed to “0” at reading.
0
0 ×
Fig. 2.6.9 Structure of serial I/O2 control register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–149
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
■Internal synchronization clock select bits (bit 2–bit 0)
When an internal clock is selected as serial I/O2 synchronization clocks (bit 6 = 1), these bits select
an internal clock division ratio.
Table 2.6.1 Relation between internal synchronization clock selection bit and synchronizing clock
Synchronizing clock of serial I/O2 (when internal clock is selected)
b2
b1
b0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
XIN
XIN
XIN
XIN
1
1
1
1
0
1
XIN pin input clock/128
XIN pin input clock/256
pin
pin
pin
pin
input
input
input
input
clock/8
clock/16
clock/32
clock/64
Do not set.
■Serial I/O2 port selection bit (bit 3)
This bit is used to select the functions of the P51 /SOUT2 pin and P5 2/SCLK2 pin.
When this bit is set to “0,” the I/O port P51 and P52 functions are selected. When the bit is set to “1,”
the S OUT2 and S CLK2 pin functions for serial I/O2 are selected.
■S RDY2 output enable bit (bit 4)
This bit is used to select the P53 /S RDY2 pin function.
When this bit is set to “1,” the I/O port P53 function is selected. When the bit is set to “1,” the SRDY2
pin function for serial I/O2 is selected.
■Transfer direction selection bit (bit 5)
This bit is used to select a transfer direction for serial data of the serial I/O2.
When this bit is set to “0,” LSB first (transfer from the least significant bit) is selected. When the bit
is set to “1,” MSB first (transfer from the most significant bit) is selected.
■Synchronization clock selection bit (bit 6)
This bit is used to select a synchronizing clock of the serial I/O2.
When this bit is set to “0,” an external clock is selected. When the bit is set to “1,” an internal clock
is selected.
2–150
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
(2) Serial I/O2 register (SIO2)
A transmit/receive operation is started by writing transfer data into the serial I/O2 register (address
001F16).
Figure 2.6.10 shows the structure of the serial I/O2 register.
Serial I/O2 register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O2 register (SIO2) [Address 1F16]
B
Functions
At reset R W
0 At transmit
?
to •Set “0016 to FF16” as transmit data.
7 •The transmit data is transferred automatically
to the serial I/O shift register 2 by writing
transmit data.
At receive
•When all receive data has been input into the
serial I/O shift register 2, the receive data is
automatically transferred to this register.
Fig. 2.6.10 Structure of serial I/O2 register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–151
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.4 Register setting example
Figure 2.6.11 shows a transmitting method of the serial I/O2, Figure 2.6.12 shows a receiving method of
the serial I/O2.
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: To use an INT pin or input port for SRDY2 watchdog, set as required.
2: To use a serial I/O2 interrupt, set in the following sequence.
3: When no serial I/O2 interrupt is used, omit settings ➀, ➂, ➃, ➄ and ➆ below.
➀Disable Serial I/O2 interrupt
b7
0 0
b0
ICON2: Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16]
b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit
0: Interrupts disabled
➁Setting of serial I/O2 control register
Selection of serial I/O2, or others
b7
b0
1
SIO2CON: Serial I/O2 control register [Address 1D16]
b2–b0: Internal synchronization clock select bits
000: f(XIN)/8
011: f(XIN)/64
001: f(XIN)/16
110: f(XIN)/128
010: f(XIN)/32
111: f(XIN)/256
b3: Serial I/O2 port selection bit
1: SOUT2, SCLK2 signal output
b4: SRDY2 output enable bit
0: I/O port
1: SRDY2 signal output
b5: Transfer direction selection bit
0: LSB first
1: MSB first
b6: Synchronization clock selection bit
0: External clock
1: Internal clock
: Nothing is allocated
➂One or more instructions (e.g., NOP) after ➁
➃Set the serial I/O2 interrupt request to “0”
b7
b0
IREQ2: Interrupt request register 2 [Address 3D16]
0
b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit
0: No interrupts request issued
: Nothing is allocated
➄Enable serial I/O2 interrupt
b7
01
b0
ICON2: Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16]
b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit
1: Interrupts enabled
➅Set transmit data to serial I/O2 register SIO2 [Address 1F16]
➆Processing of serial I/O2 interrupt
Fig. 2.6.11 Transmitting method of serial I/O2
2–152
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: When SRDY2 signal output is not used, set the SRDY2 output enable bit (bit 4) to
“0” in ➁ below.
2: In the duplex data transfer mode, write transmit data in ➅ below.
3: To use a serial I/O2 interrupt, set in the following sequence.
4: When no serial I/O2 interrupt is used, omit settings ➀, ➂, ➃, ➄ and ➆ below.
➀Disable Serial I/O2 interrupt
b7
b0
0 0
ICON2: Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16]
b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit
0: Interrupts disabled
➁Setting of serial I/O2 control register
Selection of serial I/O2, or others
b7
b0
1
SIO2CON: Serial I/O2 control register [Address 1D16]
b2–b0: Internal synchronization clock select bits
000: f(XIN)/8
011: f(XIN)/64
001: f(XIN)/16
110: f(XIN)/128
010: f(XIN)/32
111: f(XIN)/256
b3: Serial I/O2 port selection bit
1: SOUT2, SCLK2 signal output
b4: SRDY2 output enable bit
0: I/O port
1: SRDY2 signal output
b5: Transfer direction selection bit
0: LSB first
1: MSB first
b6: Synchronization clock selection bit
0: External clock
1: Internal clock
: Nothing is allocated
➂One or more instructions (e.g., NOP) after ➁
➃Set the serial I/O2 interrupt request to “0”
b7
b0
IREQ2: Interrupt request register 2 [Address 3D16]
0
b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt request bit
0: No interrupts request issued
: Nothing is allocated
➄Enable serial I/O2 interrupt
b7
01
b0
ICON2: Interrupt control register 2 [Address 3F16]
b6: Serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit
1: Interrupts enabled
➅Set dummy data to serial I/O2 register SIO2 [Address 1F16]
(When SRDY2 is used, “L” is output from the P53/SRDY2 pin)
➆Processing of serial I/O2 interrupt
Fig. 2.6.12 Receiving method of serial I/O2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–153
APPLICATION
2.6 Serial I/O2
2.6.5 Notes on use
(1) Notes on synchronizing clock selection
Whether an internal clock or an external clock is selected as a serial I/O2 synchronizing clock source,
the serial I/O2 interrupt request bit is set to “1” when 8 shift clocks are input.
However, while the shift clocks are input to the serial I/O2 synchronization circuit, the contents of the
serial I/O2 register are continuously shifted. For this reason, it is necessary to stop the shift clocks
at the time when 8 shift clocks have been input. When an internal clock is selected, the shift clocks
are automatically stopped at the time when 8 shift clocks have been input.
When an external clock is selected, control shift clocks externally. As an external clock, satisfy the
following conditions when the duty cycle is 50%.
1 MHz or less (1000 ns min.) ........................ at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
500 kHz or less (2000 ns min.) ..................... at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
Furthermore, satisfy the following conditions of both “H” and “L” width when changing the duty cycle.
400 ns or more ................................................. at V CC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
950 ns or more ................................................. at V CC = 2.5 V to 4.0 V
(2) Notes on shift clock source switching
When the shift clock of the serial I/O2 has been switched, initialize the serial I/O counter 2 (i.e., write
to the serial I/O2 register).
(3) Serial I/O counter 2 initialization when an external clock is selected
When an external clock is selected, initialize the serial I/O counter 2 (i.e., write to the serial I/O2
register) at “H” level of the external clock.
(4) For serial I/O2 interrupts
To use a serial I/O2 interrupt, set according to the following procedure.
➀Set the serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit (bit 6 at address 003F 16 ) to “0” with the CLB instruction.
➁Set a value in the serial I/O2 control register (address 001D 16).
➂After executing one or more instructions (e.g., NOP instruction), set the serial I/O2 interrupt request
bit (bit 6 at address 003D16 ) to “0” with the CLB instruction.
➃Set the serial I/O2 interrupt enable bit to “1” with the SEB instruction.
(5) Restart of communication after stopping it during serial transmission or reception
To restart communication after stopping it during serial I/O2 transmission or reception, execute from
writing into the serial I/O2 control register.
2–154
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
The 3820 group includes the controller/drivers of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). This section describes an
explanation of LCD control circuit operations, pins, related registers, usage and application examples.
2.7.1 Explanation of operations
(1) LCD drive waveform example
Refer to “CHAPTER 1 Hardware, LCD drive control circuit.”
(2) LCD drive timing
The frequency of the internal signal LCDCK and the frame frequency to generate LCD drive timing are
as follows.
f (LCDCK) =
Count source frequency for LCDCK
Division ratio of LCD circuit divider
Frame frequency =
f (LCDCK)
Duty ratio number
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–155
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.2 Pins
SEG 0 –SEG 15 are used as pins for LCD display. The pins P3 0 /SEG 16–P37 /SEG 23 and P0 0/SEG 24–P0 7 /
SEG31 and P10/SEG32–P17/SEG39 are available as segment output pins (SEG16–SEG39). By switching the
corresponding registers, the segment output pin, I/O pin or input pin is selected.
Table 2.7.1 shows the pin function by setting segment output enable register and Table 2.7.2 shows the
pin functions by setting the corresponding registers when they are not used as segment output pins.
Table 2.7.1 Pin functions by setting segment output enable register
Setting
Pins
Register
P3 0/SEG 16
–P3 7/SEG23
SEG (Address 003816) b0
P0 0/SEG 24,
P0 1/SEG 25
SEG (Address 003816) b1
P0 2/SEG 26–
P0 7/SEG 31
SEG (Address 003816) b2
P1 0/SEG 32,
P1 1/SEG 33
SEG (Address 003816) b3
P1 2/SEG 34
P1 3/SEG 35–
P1 7/SEG 39
Pin function
Value
(Bit 0 of segment output enable register)
(Bit 1 of segment output enable register)
(Bit 2 of segment output enable register)
(Bit 3 of segment output enable register)
SEG (Address 003816 ) b4
(Bit 4 of segment output enable register)
SEG (Address 003816 ) b5
(Bit 5 of segment output enable register)
1
Segment output
0
Input port
1
Segment output
0
I/O port
1
Segment output
0
I/O port
1
Segment output
0
I/O port
1
Segment output
0
I/O port
1
Segment output
0
I/O port
Note: When the microcomputer is in the reset state, the I/O or segment output pins are pulled down, so
that a “L” level is output from segment-only pins.
2–156
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
Table 2.7.2 Pin functions by setting the corresponding registers when they are not used as segment output pins
Setting
Ports
P30–P37
Pin function
Value
Register
1
Pull-down pin
(Bit 3 of PULL register A)
0
No pull-down
P0D (Address 000116 ) b0
1
Output port
0
Input port
1
Pull-down pin
(When being set for the input mode)
0
No pull-down
(When being set for the input mode)
1
Output port
0
Input port
1
Pull-down pin
(When being set for the input mode)
0
No pull-down
(When being set for the input mode)
PULLA (Address 0016 16) b3
(Bit 0 of port P0 direction register)
P0 0–P07
PULLA (Address 0016 16 ) b0
(Bit 0 of PULL register A)
P1D (Address 000316 ) b0
(Bit 0 of port P1 direction register)
P1 0–P17
PULLA (Address 0016 16) b1
(Bit 1 of PULL register A)
(1) Segment output pins (SEG0–SEG39 )
Up to 40 segment outputs can be selected. Table 2.7.3 shows setting of segment output pins for LCD
display.
Table 2.7.3 Setting of segment output pins for LCD display
Pins
Setting
SEG0–SEG15
Segment output-only pin
P3 0/SEG 16–
P3 7/SEG 23
Ports P3 0 –P3 7 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG 16 –SEG 23 ) by setting
bit 0 of the segment output enable register (address 003816 ) to “1.”
P0 0/SEG 24,
P0 1/SEG 25
Ports P0 0 and P01 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG24, SEG25) by setting
bit 1 of the segment output enable register (address 0038 16) to “1.”
P0 2/SEG 26–
P0 7/SEG 31
Ports P0 2– P0 7 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG 26 –SEG 31 ) by setting
bit 2 of the segment output enable register (address 003816 ) to “1.”
P1 0/SEG 32,
P1 1/SEG 33
Ports P10 and P11 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG32, SEG33) by setting
bit 3 of the segment output enable register (address 003816 ) to “1.”
P1 2/SEG 34
Port P12 is used as segment signal output pins (SEG34) by setting bit 4 of the segment
output enable register (address 0038 16 ) to “1.”
P1 3/SEG 35–
P1 7/SEG 39
Ports P1 3– P1 7 are used as segment signal output pins (SEG 35 –SEG 39 ) by setting
bit 5 of the segment output enable register (address 0038 16) to “1.”
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–157
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(2) Ports P0, P1 and P3
When pins P3 0/SEG 16 –P37/SEG 23, P0 0/SEG 24 –P07 /SEG 31, P1 0/SEG 32 –P17 /SEG 39 are not used as
segment outputs, they can be used as input port P3 and as I/O ports P0 and P1.
Table 2.7.4 shows the setting of input port P3 and I/O ports P0, P1.
Table 2.7.4 Setting of input port P3 and I/O ports P0, P1
Setting
Ports
P3 0–P3 7
By setting bit 0 of segment output enable register (address 003816 ) to “0”
P0 0, P01
By setting bit 1 of segment output enable register (address 003816 ) to “0”
P02–P07
By setting bit 2 of segment output enable register (address 003816) to “0”
P1 0, P11
By setting bit 3 of segment output enable register (address 003816) to “0”
P1 2
By setting bit 4 of segment output enable register (address 003816 ) to “0”
P1 3–P17
By setting bit 5 of segment output enable register (address 003816 ) to “0”
(3) P3, P1 and P0 pull-down pins
When pins P30/SEG 16–P37/SEG 23, P00/SEG 24–P0 7/SEG 31, P1 0/SEG 32–P17/SEG 39 are not used as
ports, it is possible to exert pull-down control. Table 2.7.5 shows the setting of pull-down pins.
Table 2.7.5 Setting of pull-down pins
Pins
Setting
P3 0/SEG 16–
P3 7/SEG 23
By setting bit 0 of the segment output enable register (address 0038 16) to “0,” then
setting bit 3 of PULL register A (address 001616 ) to “1.”
P0 0/SEG 24–
P0 7/SEG 31
By setting bits 1 and 2 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to “0,”
next setting bit 0 of the port P0 direction register (address 000116) to “0,” then setting
bit 0 of PULL register A (address 0016 16) to “1.”
P10/SEG 32–
P17/SEG 39
By setting bits 3 to 5 of the segment output enable register (address 003816) to “0,”
next setting bit 1 of the port P1 direction register (address 000316) to “0,” then setting
bit 1 of PULL register A (address 0016 16) to “1.”
2–158
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.3 Related registers
Figure 2.7.1 shows the memory allocation of LCD display-related registers.
Address
000116
Port P0 direction register (P0D)
000316
Port P1 direction register (P1D)
001616
PULL register A (PULLA)
003816
Segment output enable register (SEG)
003916
LCD mode register (LM)
Fig. 2.7.1 Memory allocation of LCD display-related registers
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–159
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(1) Segment output enable register (address 003816)
The pins P30/SEG16–P37/SEG23, P00/SEG24–P07/SEG31, P10/SEG32–P17/SEG39 can be used as segment
output pins by setting bits 0 to 5 of the segment output enable register (address 0038 16).
The pins corresponding to the bits which are set to “1” among bits 0 to 5 of the segment output enable
register (address 003816) are used as segment output pins. The pins corresponding to the bits which
are set to “0” are used as I/O ports or input ports.
Figure 2.7.2 shows the structure of the segment output enable register.
Segment output enable register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0
Segment output enable register (SEG) [Address 3816]
B
Name
Segment
output
0
enable bit 0
1 Segment output
enable bit 1
2 Segment output
enable bit 2
3 Segment output
enable bit 3
4 Segment output
enable bit 4
5 Segment output
enable bit 5
Functions
At reset R W
0: Input ports P30–P37
0
1: Segment output SEG16–SEG23
0: I/O ports P00, P01
0
1: Segment output SEG24, SEG25
0: I/O ports P02–P07
0
1: Segment output SEG26–SEG31
0: I/O ports P10, P11
1: Segment output SEG32, SEG33
0: I/O port P12
1: Segment output SEG34
0: I/O ports P13–P17
1: Segment output SEG35–SEG39
6,7 Fix these bits to “0.”
Fig. 2.7.2 Structure of segment output enable register
2–160
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
0
0
0
0 0
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(2) LCD mode register (LM)
The LCD mode register (address 0039 16 ) controls various functions of the LCD controller/driver.
Figure 2.7.3 shows the structure of the LCD mode register.
●Bits 0, 1
: Duty ratio selection bits
Select a duty ratio number fit for the LCD panel used.
●Bit 2
: Bias control bit
Select a bias value fit for the LCD panel used.
●Bit 3
: LCD enable bit
Turns on and off the LCD. When this bit is set to “1,” the bits which are set to “1”
in the LCD display RAM are displayed on the LCD. When this bit is set to “0,” the
whole LCD display is turned off.
●Bit 4
: Unused
Always set this bit to “0.”
●Bits 5, 6
: LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits
These bits are used to select a division ratio for generating the frequency of the
LCDCK, which is the clock for the LCD timing controller. Select a division ratio so
as to generate LCDCK fit for the LCD panel used.
●Bit 7
: LCDCK count source selection bit
This bit is used to select a count source of the above LCDCK. At transition from
the high-speed, middle-speed or low-speed mode to the low-power operation, or
others, change the count source as required.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–161
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
LCD mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
LCD mode register (LM) [Address 3916]
B
0
Name
Duty ratio selection
bits
1
2 Bias control bit
3 LCD enable bit
Functions
b1b0
00: Not available
01: 2 (use COM0, COM1)
10: 3 (use COM0–COM2)
11: 4 (use COM0–COM3)
0: 1/3 bias
1: 1/2 bias
0: LCD OFF
1: LCD ON
6
7 LCDCK count source
selection bit (Note 2)
b6b5
00: LCDCK count source
01: 2 division of LCDCK count source
10: 4 division of LCDCK count source
11: 8 division of LCDCK count source
0: f(XCIN)/32
1: f(XIN)/8192
Notes 1: Reference values at f(XIN) = 8 MHz
00: 977 Hz
01: 488 Hz
10: 244 Hz
11: 122 Hz
2: LCDCK is a clock for a LCD timing controller.
Fig. 2.7.3 Structure of LCD mode register
2–162
0
0
0
0
0
4 Fix this bit to “0.”
5 LCD circuit divider division
ratio selection bits (Note 1)
At reset R W
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
0
0 0
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(3) Port P0 direction register (P0D)
When it is specified that pins P0 0/SEG 24–P0 7 /SEG 31 are used as I/O ports by bits 1 and 2 of the
segment output enable register (address 0038 16), the setting of the port P0 direction register (address
0001 16) is valid.
When bit 0 of the port P0 direction register is set to “1,” port P0 is an output port. When this bit is
set to “0,” the port is an input port, so that the setting of bit 0 of the PULL register A (address 001616)
becomes valid. At reset, bit 0 of the port P0 direction register is set to “0.”
Figure 2.7.4 shows the structure of the port P0 direction register.
Port P0 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P0 direction register (P0D) [Address 0116]
B
0
Name
Port P0 direction
register
Functions
At reset R W
×
0: All bits are input mode
0
1: All bits are output mode
× ×
0
Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
1
to written to and be read out.
7
Fig. 2.7.4 Structure of port P0 direction register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–163
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(4) Port P1 direction register (P1D)
When it is specified that pins P1 0 /SEG 32 –P1 7 /SEG 39 are used as I/O ports by bits 3 to 5 of the
segment output enable register (address 003816), the setting of the port P1 direction register (address
0003 16) is valid.
When bit 0 of the port P1 direction register (address 000316) is set to “1,” port P1 is an output port.
When this bit is set to “0,” the port is an input port, so that the setting of bit 1 of the PULL register
A (address 0016 16 ) becomes valid. At reset, bit 0 of the port P1 direction register is set to “0.”
Figure 2.7.5 shows the structure of the port P1 direction register.
Port P1 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P1 direction register (P1D) [Address 0316]
B
0
Name
Port P1 direction
register
Functions
At reset R W
×
0: All bits are input mode
0
1: All bits are output mode
× ×
0
Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
1
to written to and be read out.
7
Fig. 2.7.5 Structure of port P1 direction register
2–164
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(5) PULL register A (PULLA)
When ports P0, P1 and P3 are set for the input mode, the setting of bits 0, 1 and 3 of the PULL
register A (address 001616 ) is valid.
The pull-down function of ports P0, P1 and P3 is made effective by setting bits 0, 1 and 3 of the PULL
register A to “1.” When ports P0 and P1 are set for output mode by bit 0 of the port P0/P1 direction
registers, the setting of the PULL register A is invalid.
Figure 2.7.6 shows the structure of the PULL register A.
PULL register A
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
PULL register A (PULLA) [Address 1616]
Name
Function
B
0 Ports P00–P07 pull-down bit 0 : No pull-down
1 : Pull-down
1 Ports P10–P17 pull-down bit 0 : No pull-down
1 : Pull-down
0 : No pull-up
2 Ports P20–P27 pull-up bit
1 : Pull-up
3 Ports P30–P37 pull-down bit 0 : No pull-down
1 : Pull-down
0 : No pull-up
4 Ports P70, P71 pull-up bit
1 : Pull-up
5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
to written to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
At reset R W
1
1
0
1
0
0
0 ×
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up or pull-down is
impossible.
Fig. 2.7.6 Structure of PULL register A
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–165
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.4 Register setting example
Figure 2.7.7 and Figure 2.7.8 show an example of setting registers for LCD display.
[Note on use]
Note : For pulling down ports P0, P1 and P3, refer to “2.7.2 Pins,
(3) Ports P3, P1 and P0 pull–down pins”
➀Setting of segment output enable register
Select segment pins or others
b7
0 0
b0
SEG: Segment output enable register [Address 3816]
b0: Segment output enable bit 0
0: Input ports P30–P37
1: Segment output SEG16–SEG23
b1: Segment output enable bit 1
0: Input ports P00, P01
1: Segment output SEG24, SEG25
b2: Segment output enable bit 2
0: Input ports P02–P07
1: Segment output SEG26–SEG31
b3: Segment output enable bit 3
0: Input ports P10, P11
1: Segment output SEG32, SEG33
b4: Segment output enable bit 4
0: Input port P12
1: Segment output SEG34
b5: Segment output enable bit 5
0: Input ports P13–P17
1: Segment output SEG35–SEG39
b7, b6: Fix these bits to “0”
Continued to Figure 2.7.8
Fig. 2.7.7 Example of setting registers for LCD display (1)
2–166
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
Continued from Figure 2.7.7
➁Setting of LCD mode register
Select count source, bias, or others
b7
b0
0
LM: LCD mode register [Address 3916]
b1, b0: Duty ratio selection bits
b1b0
00: Not used
01: 2 (use COM0, COM1)
10: 3 (use COM0–COM2)
11: 4 (use COM0–COM3)
b2: Bias control bit
0: 1/3 bias
1: 1/2 bias
b3: LCD enable bit
0: LCD OFF
1: LCD ON
b4: Fix this bit to “0”
b6, b5: LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits
b6b5
00: LCDCK count source
01: 2 division of LCDCK count source
10: 4 division of LCDCK count source
11: 8 division of LCDCK count source
b7: LCDCK count source selection bit
0: f(XCIN)/32
1: f(XIN)/8192
➂Setting display data into the RAM (Address 4016 to 5316) for
LCD display
By writing “1” to bits in the RAM for LCD display, the corresponding
segments of the LCD panel becomes ready for lighting
Fig. 2.7.8 Example of setting registers for LCD display (2)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–167
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.5 Application examples
(1) LCD panel display pattern example
Figure 2.7.9 shows an 8-segment LCD panel display pattern example when the duty ratio number is
4.
AA
AA
AAAAA
A
F
B
G
C
E
D
D
E
G
F
H
SEGa
COM1
COM0
SEGb
COM3
COM2
AA
H
C
B
A
Display RAM map high-order
Display RAM map low-order
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
5316 5216 5116 5016 4F16 4E16 4D16 4C16 4B16 4A16 4916 4816 4716 4616 4516 4416 4316 4216 4116 4016
(Address)
Fig. 2.7.9 8-segment LCD panel display pattern example when duty ratio number is 4
2–168
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
b7
1
0
0
LCD display RAM
COM0
0
b0
COM3
COM2
COM1
SEG0
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
SEG8
SEG9
SEG10
SEG11
SEG12
SEG13
SEG14
SEG15
SEG16
SEG17
SEG18
SEG19
SEG20
SEG21
SEG22
SEG23
SEG24
SEG25
SEG26
SEG27
SEG28
SEG29
SEG30
SEG31
SEG32
SEG33
SEG34
SEG35
SEG36
SEG37
SEG38
SEG39
AA
A
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(2) LCD panel example
Figure 2.7.10 to Figure 2.7.12 show an LCD panel example and a segment allocation example for it,
and an LCD display RAM setting example.
’
AUTO
SLOW
PRINT
Fig. 2.7.10 LCD panel example
2
1
3
4
6
5
’
AUTO
SLOW
PRINT
7
Fig. 2.7.11 Segment allocation example
a
Bit
Address
004016
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
f
COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0 COM3 COM2 COM1 COM0
g
f
e
d
c
b
a
1
g
f
e
d
c
b
a
2
004216
g
f
e
d
c
b
a
3
004316
g
f
e
d
c
b
a
4
004416
g
f
e
d
c
b
a
5
004516
g
f
e
d
c
b
a
6
7
004116
004616
’
PRINT
SLOW AUTO
g
b
c
e
d
Fig. 2.7.12 LCD display RAM setting example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–169
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
(3) Control procedure
Figure 2.7.13 shows the setting of related registers to turn on all the LCD display in Figure 2.7.10,
and Figure 2.7.14 shows the control procedure.
Specifications: •Frame frequency = 122 Hz
•Duty ratio number = 4, Bias value = 1/3
•Segment output; SEG0 to SEG 13 are used.
•Ports P0 and P1 are set as I/O ports, port P3 is set as input port.
b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SEG: Segment output enable register [Address 3816]
b0: Segment output enable bit 0
0: Input ports P30–P37
b1: Segment output enable bit 1
0: I/O ports P00, P01
b2: Segment output enable bit 2
0: I/O ports P02–P07
b3: Segment output enable bit 3
0: I/O ports P10, P11
b4: Segment output enable bit 4
0: I/O port P12
b5: Segment output enable bit 5
0: I/O ports P13–P17
b7, b6: Fix these bits to “0”
b7
b0
1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 LM: LCD mode register [Address 3916]
b1, b0: Duty ratio selection bits
b1b0
11: 4 (use COM0–COM3)
b2: Bias control bit
0: 1/3 bias
b3: LCD enable bit
0: LCD OFF (after setting data into
the RAM for LCD display, turn on)
b4: Fix this bit to “0”
b6, b5: LCD circuit divider division ratio selection bits
b6b5
01: 2 division of LCDCK count source ✽
b7: LCDCK count source selection bit
1: f(XIN)/8192 ✽
✽: •f(LCDCK) = Count source frequency for LCDCK/LCD circuit division ratio
•Frame frequency = f(LCDCK)/duty ratio number
From the above, the frame frequency at f(XIN) = 8 MHz is as follows:
6
Frame frequency f =
8 ✕ 10
8192
1
✕ 2
1
✕ 4 ≈ 122.070 Hz
Fig. 2.7.13 Setting of related registers
2–170
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
RESET
Initialization
CLT
CLD
SEI
SEG (Address 3816)
LM (Address 3916)
P0D (Address 0116)
P1D (Address 0316)
PULLA (Address 1616)
All interrupts; Disabled
←000000012
←101000112
←XXXXXXXX2
←XXXXXXXX2
←XXXXXXXX2
LCDRAM0 (Address 4016) ←111111112
LCDRAM1 (Address 4116) ←111111112
LCDRAM2 (Address 4216) ←111111112
LCDRAM3 (Address 4316) ←111111112
LCDRAM4 (Address 4416) ←011111112
LCDRAM5 (Address 4516) ←011111112
LCDRAM6 (Address 4616) ←111111112
Set ports/segments
Set LCD mode register
Set port P0 I/O direction
Set port P1 I/O direction
Set pull-up, pull-down
✽Set in the order of ports P0/P1 direction
registers and PULL register A
Set values in LCDRAMX
(Set it to “1” to turn on or to “0” to turn it off)
LM (Address 3916), bit 3 ←1
Turn on LCD
CLI
Interrupts; Enabled
When switching LCD ON (OFF)
segments
LCDRAMX (Address XX16) ←XXXXXXXX2 Rewrite bits corresponding to LCD ON (OFF) segments
Fig. 2.7.14 Control procedure
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–171
APPLICATION
2.7 LCD drive control circuit
2.7.6 Notes on use
(1) For transition from the high-speed or the middle-speed mode to the low-power operation of the lowspeed mode:
➀ Select oscillation at 32 kHz (CM 4 = 1)
➁ Count source for LCDCK; select f(XCIN )/32 (LM7 = 0)
➂ Internal system clock; select XCIN–X COUT (CM7 = 1)
➃ Stop main clock X IN–X OUT (CM 5 = 1)
In the above order, execute transition. Execute the setting ➁ after the oscillation at 32 kHz
(setting ➀) becomes completely stable.
(2) If the STP instruction is executed while the LCD is turned on by setting bit 3 of the LCD mode register
to “1,” a DC voltage is applied to the LCD. For this reason, do not execute the STP instruction while
the LCD is lighting.
(3) When the LCD is not used, open the segment and the common pins.
Connect VL1 –VL3 to V SS.
2–172
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.8 Watchdog timer
2.8 Watchdog timer
2.8.1 Explanation of operations
The watchdog timer is a down-count timer consisting of 14 bits (6 high-order bits and 8 low-order bits).
Each time a count source is input, a count value is decremented by 1.
The watchdog timer is also available as a 6-bit timer.
(1) Basic operations
➀By executing a write instruction to the watchdog timer control register (address 0037 16), “3F16” and
“FF 16” are automatically set in the watchdog timer H and watchdog timer L respectively, with the
result that a count operation starts.
A count source can be selected by the watchdog timer H count source selection bit (bit 7 at address
0037 16 ) (Refer to “(2) and (3)” on the next page).
➁When a specified count value is counted and the watchdog timer H underflows, an internal reset
signal is generated, so that a microcomputer is put into the reset status. Table 2.8.1 shows the
program runaway detection time ✽1 (maximum) and Figure 2.8.1 shows an internal reset signal
output timing diagram.
➂The program starts from the contents of the vector address at reset.
✽1: The time from start of count operation until
output of internal reset signal.
Table 2.8.1 Program runaway detection time (maximum)
Detection time (maximum)
f(X IN ) = 8 MHz
f(X CIN) = 32 kHz
32.768 ms
8.19 s
When the watchdog timer H count source selection bit is “0.”
XIN input signal
XCIN input signal
Approximately 1 ms at f(XIN) = 8 MHz
Internal reset signal
Detection of program runaway
(Underflow of watchdog timer H)
Fig. 2.8.1 Internal reset signal output timing
When using the watchdog timer, set by software so that data is written into the watchdog timer control
register before the watchdog timer H underflows (within the program runaway detection time shown
in Table 2.8.1). If a write instruction has not been executed to the watchdog timer control register
because of a program runaway, internal reset occurs, so that the program restores to a normal routine.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–173
APPLICATION
2.8 Watchdog timer
(2) Operations when the 14-bit timer is used (bit 7 of watchdog timer control register = “0”)
➀By executing a write instruction to the watchdog timer control register, a count operation is started.
➁The underflow of the watchdog timer L becomes a count source of the watchdog timer H. When the
watchdog timer H underflows, a microcomputer is put into reset status.
➂The program starts from the contents of the vector address at reset.
(3) Operations when the 6-bit timer is used (bit 7 of watchdog timer control register = “1”)
➀By executing a write instruction to the watchdog timer control register, a count operation is started.
➁f(X IN)/16 or f(XCIN )/16 becomes a count source of the watchdog timer H. When watchdog timer H
underflows, a microcomputer is put into the reset status.
➂The program starts from the contents of the vector address at reset.
(4) Operations in the stop mode or the wait mode
■When the stop mode is provided by executing the STP instruction, the watchdog timer stops its count
operation. When the stop mode is released by an interrupt request, the oscillation of a count source
is restarted and the watchdog timer restarts its count operation at the same time.
Because the count operation is continued even in the wait time for stop release (about 8000 cycles
of f(XIN ) or f(XCIN )), be careful not to cause watchdog timer H to underflow.
■When the wait mode is provided by executing the WIT instruction, the CPU operation stops but the
watchdog timer continues to count down.
2–174
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.8 Watchdog timer
2.8.2 Related register
The related register is only the watchdog timer control register (address 003716 ).
The operation of the watchdog timer is started by executing a write instruction to the watchdog timer control
register after reset. The watchdog timer being operated is made ineffective by reset.
When the watchdog timer is not used, do not execute a write instruction to the watchdog timer control
register after reset.
Figure 2.8.2 shows the structure of the watchdog timer control register.
Watchdog timer control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON) [Address 3716]
B
Name
0 Watchdog timer H
to bits
5
6
Functions
At reading, the count value of
watchdog timer H is read.
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and
is fixed to “1” at reading.
7 Watchdog timer H
count source
selection bit
0: Underflow from watchdog
timer L
(WDT is used as 14-bit timer)
1: f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16
(WDT is used as 6-bit timer)
At reset R W
×
1
(Note)
1
1 ×
0
Note: When a value is written to address 3716, the following values are set,
so that the watchdog timer starts a count operation.
Watchdog timer H = “3F16”
Watchdog timer L = “FF16”
Fig. 2.8.2 Structure of watchdog timer control register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–175
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
2.9 Standby function
The 3820 group is provided with a standby function to stop the CPU by software and put the CPU into the
low-power operation.
The following two types of standby function are available.
•Stop mode by the STP instruction
•Wait mode by the WIT instruction
2.9.1 Stop mode
The stop mode is set by executing the STP instruction. In the stop mode, the oscillation of both XIN
and XCIN stops and the internal clock φ stops at the
“H” level.
The CPU stops and peripheral units stop operating.
As a result, power dissipation is reduced.
(1) State in the stop mode
The stop mode is set by executing the STP
instruction.✽1
In the stop mode, the oscillation of both X IN
and X CIN stops, so that all the functions stop,
providing a low-power operation.
Table 2.9.1 shows the state in the stop mode.
Table 2.9.1 State in stop mode
Item
Oscillation
CPU
Stop
Stop
Internal clock φ
Stop at “H” level
I/O ports P0–P7
The state where STP instruction is executed is held
Timer, serial I/O,
Stop
LCD display functions,
watchdog timer
✽1: After setting the LCD enable bit (bit 3) of
the LCD mode register to “0,” execute the
STP instruction.
2–176
State in stop mode
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
(2) Release of stop mode
The stop mode is released by reset input or by the occurrence of an interrupt request.
There is a difference in restore processing from the stop mode by reset input and by an interrupt
request.
■Restoration by reset input
By holding the “L” input level of the RESET pin in the stop mode for 2 µ s or more, the reset state
is set, so that the stop mode is released.
At the time when the stop mode is released, oscillation is started. At this time, the inside of the
microcomputer is in the reset state. After the input level of the RESET pin is returned to the “H,” the
reset state is released in approximately 8,000 cycles of the XIN input.
The oscillation is unstable at start of oscillation. For this reason, time for stabilizing of oscillation
(oscillation stabilizing time) is required. The time to hold the internal reset state is reserved as the
oscillation stabilizing time.
Figure 2.9.1 shows the oscillation stabilizing time at restoration by reset input.
At release of the stop mode, the contents of the internal RAM previous to the reset are held.
However, the contents of the CPU register and SFR are not held.
For resetting, refer to “2.10 Reset.”
Time to hold internal reset state =
approximately 8000 cycles of XIN
input
Stop mode
VCC
Oscillation stabilizing time
2 µ s or more
RESET
XIN
(Note)
Execute STP instruction Restored by reset input
Note: No waveform may be input to XIN (in low-speed mode)
Fig. 2.9.1 Oscillation stabilizing time at restoration by reset input
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–177
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
■Restoration by an interrupt request
The occurrence of an interrupt request in the stop mode releases the stop mode. As a result, oscillation is resumed. The interrupt requests available for restoration are:
•INT0–INT3
•Serial I/O1 transmit/receive and serial I/O2 using an external clock
•Timer X/Y using an external clock
•Key input (key-on wake up)
However, to use the above interrupt requests for restoration from the stop mode, after setting the
following, execute the STP instruction in order to enable the interrupt request to be used.
[Necessary register setting]
➀ Interrupt disable flag I = “0” (interrupts enabled)
➁ Both timers 1 and 2 interrupt enable bits = “0” (interrupts disabled)
➂ Interrupt request bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = “0” (no interrupt request
issued)
➃ Interrupt enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = “1” (interrupts enabled)
For interrupts, refer to “2.2 Interrupts.”
The oscillation is unstable at start of oscillation. For this reason, time for stabilizing of oscillation
(oscillation stabilizing time) is required. At restoration by an interrupt request, the time to wait for
supplying the internal clock φ to the CPU is automatically generated✽1 by timers 1✽2 and 2.✽2 This wait
time is reserved as the oscillation stabilizing time on the system clock side.
Figure 2.9.2 shows an execution sequence example at restoration by the occurrence of an INT 0
interrupt request.
✽1: At restoration from the stop mode, all bits except bit 4 of the timer 123 mode register (address
0029 16 ) are set to “0.”
As a count source of the timer 1, an f(X IN)/16 or f(X CIN)/16 clock is selected. As a count source
of the timer 2, the timer 1 underflow is selected.
Immediately after the oscillation is started, the count source is supplied to the timer 1 counter, so
that a count operation is started. The supplying the internal clock φ to the CPU is started at the
timer 2 underflow.
✽2: When the STP instruction is executed, “FF 16” and “01 16” are automatically set in the timer 1
counter/latch and timer 2 counter/latch respectively.
2–178
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
●When restoring from stop mode by using INT0 interrupt (rising edge selected)
Stop mode Oscillation stabilizing time
(approximately 8000 cycles)
XIN or XCIN
(System clock)
XIN; “H”
XCIN; in high-impedance state
INT0 pin
512 counts
“FF16”
Timer 1
counter
Timer 2
counter
“0116”
INT0 interrupt
request bit
Peripheral device
Operating
CPU
Operating
Stopping
Operating
Stopping
•Execute STP
instruction
Operating
•512 counts down by timer 1
•INT0 interrupt
•Start supplying internal clock φ
signal input
(INT0 interrupt
to CPU
request occurs) •Accept INT0 interrupt request
•Oscillation start
•Timer 1 count start
Note: As a count source, f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16 is input. Either f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16
is selected by bit 7 of CPU mode register.
Fig. 2.9.2 Execution sequence example at restoration by occurrence of INT 0 interrupt request
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–179
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
(3) Notes on using the stop mode
■Release sources
The release sources of the stop mode are shown below.
•Reset input
•INT0–INT3 interrupts
•Serial I/O1 transmit/receive and serial I/O2 interrupts using an external clock
•Timers X/Y interrupts using an external clock
•Key input interrupt (key-on wake up)
Each INT pin (INT0, INT1, INT2, INT3) is also used as ports P4 2, P43, P57 or P60 and each key input
pin is also used as port P2. To use INT0 to INT3 interrupts, after setting the corresponding bits of the
following direction registers to “0” to set them for the input mode, execute the STP instruction.
•Port P2 direction register (address 000516)
•Port P4 direction register (address 000916)
•Port P5 direction register (address 000B16 )
•Port P6 direction register (address 000D16)
■Register setting
To use the above interrupt requests for restoration from the stop mode, after setting the following,
execute the STP instruction in order to enable the interrupt request to be used.
[Necessary register setting]
➀ Interrupt disable flag I = “0” (interrupts enabled)
➁ Both timers 1 and 2 interrupt enable bits = “0” (interrupts disabled)
➂ Interrupt request bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = “0” (no interrupt request
issued)
➃ Interrupt enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = “1” (interrupts enabled)
•At restoration from the stop mode, the values of the timers 1, 2 and 123 mode registers are automatically rewritten. Accordingly, set each of them again.
•To prevent a DC voltage from being applied to the LCD, after setting the LCD enable bit (bit 3) of
the LCD mode register to “0,” execute the STP instruction.
•Write to the watchdog timer control register (address 003716) before the STP instruction execution.
If the STP instruction is executed without writing, an internal reset may occures.
■Clock after restoration
After restoration from the stop mode by an interrupt request, the contents of the CPU mode register
previous to the STP instruction execution are held. Accordingly, when both XIN and XCIN were oscillating before execution of the STP instruction, the oscillation of both X IN and XCIN is resumed at
restoration from the stop mode by an interrupt request.
In the above case, when the X IN side is set as a system clock, the oscillation stabilizing time for
approximately 8,000 cycles of the XIN input is reserved at restoration from the stop mode.
At this time, note that the oscillation on the X CIN side may not be stabilized even after the lapse of
the oscillation stabilizing time (of the XIN side).
2–180
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
2.9.2 Wait mode
The wait mode is set by execution of the WIT instruction. In the wait mode, the oscillation is continued,
but the internal clock φ stops at the “H” level.
Since the oscillation is continued regardless of the CPU stop, the peripheral units operate.
(1) States in the wait mode
By executing the WIT instruction, the wait mode
is set.
In the wait mode, the internal clock φ which is
supplied to the CPU stops at the “H” level. The
continuation of oscillation permits clock supply
to the peripheral units.
Table 2.9.2 shows the state in the wait mode.
Table 2.9.2 State in wait mode
Item
State in wait mode
Oscillation
CPU
Internal clock φ
Operating
Stop
Stop at “H” level
I/O ports P0–P7
The state where WIT instruction is executed is held.
Operating
Timer, serial I/O,
LCD display functions,
watchdog timer
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–181
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
(2) Release of wait mode
The wait mode is released by reset input or by the occurrence of an interrupt request.
There is a difference in restore processing from the wait mode by use of reset input and by use of
an interrupt request.
In the wait mode, oscillation is continued, so an instruction can be executed immediately after the wait
mode is released.
■Restoration by reset input
The reset state is provided by holding the input level of the RESET pin at “L” for 2 µs or more in the
wait mode. As a result, the wait mode is released.
At the time when the wait mode is released, the supplying the internal clock φ to the CPU is started.
The reset state is released in approximately 8,000 cycles of the XIN input after the input of the RESET
pin is returned to the “H” level.
At release of the wait mode, the contents of the internal RAM previous to the reset are held. However,
the contents of the CPU mode register and SFR are not held.
Figure 2.9.3 shows the reset input time.
For reset, refer to “2.10 Reset.”
Time to hole internal reset state =
approximately 8000 cycles of XIN
input
Wait mode
VCC
Oscillation stabilizing time
2 µs or more
RESET
XIN
(Note)
Execute WIT instruction
Restored by reset input
Note: No waveform may be input to XIN (in low-speed mode)
Fig. 2.9.3 Reset input time
2–182
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
■Restoration by an interrupt request
In the wait mode, the occurrence of an interrupt request releases the wait mode and the supplying the
internal clock φ to the CPU is started. At the same time, the interrupt request used for restoration is
accepted, so the interrupt processing routine is executed.
However, to use an interrupt for restoration from the wait mode, after setting the following, execute
the WIT instruction in order to enable the interrupt to be used.
[Necessary
➀ Interrupt
➁ Interrupt
issued)
➂ Interrupt
register setting]
disable flag I = “0” (interrupts enabled)
request bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = “0” (no interrupt request
enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = “1” (interrupts enabled)
For interrupts, refer to “2.2 Interrupts.”
(3) Notes on the wait mode
■Restoration by INT0 to INT 3 interrupt requests
Each INT pin (INT0, INT1, INT2, INT3) is also used as ports P42, P43 , P57 or P60 and each key input
pin is also used as port P2. To use INT0 to INT3 interrupts, set the corresponding bits of the following
direction registers to “0” for setting the input mode. And then, execute the WIT instruction.
•Port P2 direction register (address 000516)
•Port P4 direction register (address 000916)
•Port P5 direction register (address 000B16)
•Port P6 direction register (address 000D16)
■Restoration by key input interrupt request
The pins for a key input interrupt is also used as port P2. To use a key input interrupt, set the
corresponding bits of the port P2 direction register (address 000516) to “0” for setting the input mode.
And then, execute the WIT instruction.
■Register setting
To use the above interrupt requests for restoration from the stop mode, after setting the following,
execute the WIT instruction in order to enable the interrupt request to be used.
[Necessary
➀ Interrupt
➁ Interrupt
issued)
➂ Interrupt
register setting]
disable flag I = “0” (interrupts enabled)
request bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = “0” (no interrupts request
enable bit of the interrupt source to be used for restoration = “1” (interrupts enabled)
■Operation of the watchdog timer
The watchdog timer continues to count down in the wait mode. The CPU stops in the wait mode,
however, the watchdog timer cannot be written by software.
As a result, an internal reset occurs at an underflow of the watchdog timer, the wait mode is released
automatically.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–183
APPLICATION
2.9 Standby function
2.9.3 State transitions of internal clock φ
Figure 2.9.4 shows the state transitions of the internal clock φ when the standby function is used.
RESET
“1 CM
”↔ 4
“1 CM “0
”↔ 6 ”
“0
”
CM6
“1”↔“0”
High-speed mode
(f (φ) = 4 MHz)
CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected)
CM6 = 0 (High-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM7
“1”↔“0”
CM7
“1”↔“0”
Middle-speed mode
(f (φ) = 1 MHz)
CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected)
CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
High-speed mode
(f (φ) = 4 MHz)
CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected)
CM6 = 0 (High-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 0 (32 kHz stopped)
Low-speed mode
(f (φ) = 16 kHz)
CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected)
CM6 = 0 (High-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM6
“1”↔“0”
5
M 1”
C “
”↔ 6 ”
“0 CM “0
”↔
“1
Low-speed mode
(f (φ) = 16 kHz)
CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected)
CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed)
CM5 = 1 (8 MHz stopped)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
b7
CM5
“1”↔“0”
CM6
“1”↔“0”
“1 CM
”↔ 5
C
“1 M “0
”↔ 6 ”
“0
”
Low-speed mode
(f (φ) = 16 kHz)
CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected)
CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM5
“1”↔“0”
CM4
“1”↔“0”
CM6
“1”↔“0”
4
M 1”
C “
”↔ 6 ”
“0 CM “0
”↔
“1
CM4
“1”↔“0”
Middle-speed mode
(f (φ) = 1 MHz)
CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected)
CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 0 (32 kHz stopped)
Low-speed mode
(f (φ) = 16 kHz)
CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected)
CM6 = 0 (High-speed)
CM5 = 1 (8 MHz stopped)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
b4
CPU mode register (CPUM)
[Address 3B16]
CM4: Port Xc switch bit
0: I/O port
1: XCIN, XCOUT
CM5: Main clock (XIN–XOUT) stop bit
0: Oscillating
1: Stopped
CM6: Main clock division ratio selection bit
0: f(XIN)/2 (high-speed mode)
1: f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode)
CM7: Internal system clock selection bit
0: XIN–XOUT selected
(middle-/high-speed mode)
1: XCIN–XCOUT selected
(low-speed mode)
Notes 1: Switch the mode by the allows shown between the mode blocks.( Do not switch between the mode
directly without an allow.)
2: The all modes can be switched to the stop mode or the wait mode and returned to the source mode when
the stop mode or the wait mode is released.
3: Timer and LCD operate in the wait mode.
4: In middle-/high-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 1 ms occurs
automatically by timer 1 and timer 2.
5: In low-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 0.25 s occurs automatically
by timer 1 and timer 2.
6: Wait until oscillation stabilizes after oscillating the main clock XIN before the switching from the low-speed
mode to the middle-/high-speed mode.
7: The example assumes that 8 MHz is being applied to the XIN pin and 32 kHz to the XCIN pin. φ indicates
the internal clock.
Fig. 2.9.4 State transitions of internal clock φ
2–184
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
2.10 Reset
The internal reset state is provided by applying a “L” level to the RESET pin. After that, the reset state is
released by applying a “H” level to the RESET pin, so that the program is executed in the middle-speed
mode starting from the contents at the reset vector address.
2.10.1 Explanation of operations
Figure 2.10.1 shows the internal reset state hold/release timing.
Internal processing
sequence
Internal clock
φ
2 µs or more
Hold reset state
RESET
Middle-speed = approximately
8000 cycles of XIN input
Fig. 2.10.1 Internal reset state hold/release timing
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–185
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
The reset state is provided by applying a “L” level
to the RESET pin at power source voltage of 2.5 V
to 5.5 V. Allow 2 µ s or more as “L” level applying
time.
By applying a “H” level to the RESET pin in the
internal reset state, the timers and their count source
shown in Table 2.10.1 is automatically set. After
that, the internal reset state is released by the timer
2 underflow.
After applying “H” level, only the main clock oscillates in the middle-speed mode regardless of the
oscillation state previous to internal resetting. The
XCIN pin on the sub-clock side becomes the input
port.
After the internal reset state is released, the program is run from the address determined with the
contents (high-order address) at address FFFD16
and the contents (low-order address) at address
FFFC16.
Figure 2.10.2 shows the internal processing sequence
immediately after reset release.
Table 2.10.1 Timers 1 and 2 at reset
Item
Timer 1
Timer 2
FF 16
Value
0116
Count
source
f (XIN)/16
Timer 1 underflow
VCC
f(XIN)
1 µs at f(XIN) = 8 MHz
Internal clock
φ 2 µs or more
RESET
Approximately 8000 cycles of XIN input
Internal reset
Address bus
FFFC16 FFFD16
Data bus
AL
AL,AH
AH
SYNC
Internal clock φ : CPU reference clock frequency = f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode
immediately after reset)
AH, AL : Interrupt jump destination addresses
SYNC : CPU operation code fetch cycle
(This is a internal signal, so that it cannot be observed from
the external unit)
: Undefined
Fig. 2.10.2 Internal processing sequence immediately after reset release
2–186
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
2.10.2 Internal state of the microcomputer immediately after reset release
Figure 2.9.3 shows the internal state of the microcomputer immediately after reset release.
The contents of all other registers except registers in Figure 2.10.3 and internal RAM are undefined at
poweron reset.
Port P0 direction register
Port P1 direction register
Port P2 direction register
Port P4 direction register
Port P5 direction register
Port P6 direction register
Port P7 direction register
PULL register A
PULL register B
Serial I/O1 status register
Serial I/O1 control register
UART control register
Serial I/O2 control register
Timer X (low-order)
Timer X (high-order)
Timer Y (low-order)
Timer Y (high-order)
Timer 1
Timer 2
Timer 3
Timer X mode register
Timer Y mode register
Timer 123 mode register
φ output control register
Watchdog timer control register
Segment output enable register
LCD mode register
Interrupt edge selection register
CPU mode register
Interrupt request register 1
Interrupt request register 2
Interrupt control register 1
Interrupt control register 2
Processor status register
Program counter
Address b7
Contents of register
b1
0016
000116
0016
000316
0016
000516
0016
000916
000B16
0016
000D16
0016
000F16
0016
0 0
1 0 1
1
001616 0
0
001716
0016
001916 1
0 0
0
0 0 0
0
001A16
0016
001B16 1
1 1
0
0 0 0
0
001D16
0016
002016
FF16
002116
FF16
002216
FF16
002316
FF16
002416
FF16
002516
0116
002616
FF16
002716
0016
002816
0016
002916
0016
002A16
0016
003716 0
1 1
1
1 1 1
1
003816
0016
003916
0016
003A16
0016
003B16 0
1 0
0
1 0 0
0
003C16
0016
003D16
0016
003E16
0016
003F16
0016
(PS) X X X X X 1 X X
(PCH)
Contents of address FFFD16
(PCL)
Contents of address FFFC16
Notes X : Undefined
The contents of all other registers and internal RAM are undefined at
poweron reset, so they must be initialized by software.
Fig. 2.10.3 Internal state of microcomputer immediately after reset release
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–187
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
2.10.3 Reset circuit
Design a configuration of the reset circuit so that the reset input voltage may be 0.5 V or less at the time
when the power sorce voltage passes 2.5 V.
Figure 2.10.4 shows the poweron reset conditions and Figure 2.10.5 shows poweron reset circuit examples.
Power on
VCC
2.5 V
0V
0.5 V
RESET
0V
Fig. 2.10.4 Poweron reset conditions
3820 group
RESET
27
3820 group
VCC
RESET
73
27
Fig. 2.10.5 Poweron reset circuit examples
2–188
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Power source voltage
detection circuit
VCC
73
APPLICATION
2.10 Reset
2.10.4 Notes on the RESET pin
In case where the reset signal rise time is long, connect a ceramic capacitor or others across the RESET
pin and the VSS pin. And use a 1000 pF or more capacitor for high frequency use. When connecting the
capacitor, note the following:
●Make the length of the wiring which is connected to a capacitor as short as possible.
●Be sure to check the operation of application products on the user side.
REASON
If the several nanosecond or several ten nanosecond impulse noise enters the RESET pin, it may cause
a microcomputer failure.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–189
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11.1 Oscillation circuit
Two oscillation circuits are included to obtain clocks required for operations.
• X IN–X OUT oscillation circuit............Main clock (XIN input) oscillation circuit
• X CIN–X COUT oscillation circuit........Sub-clock (X CIN input) oscillation circuit
A clock✽1 obtained by dividing the frequency input to the clock input pins XIN or XCIN is an internal clock
φ. The internal clock φ is used as a standard for operations.
✽1: The internal clock φ varies with modes.
•High-speed mode ........Frequency input to the XIN pin/2
•Middle-speed mode .....Frequency input to the XIN pin/8
•Low-speed mode .........Frequency input to the XCIN pin/2
(1) Oscillation circuit using ceramic resonators
Figure 2.11.1 shows an oscillation circuit example using ceramic resonators. As shown in the figure,
an oscillation circuit can be formed by connecting a ceramic resonator or a quartz-crystal oscillator
between the pins XIN and the X OUT and between the pins X CIN and X COUT. As the XIN–X OUT oscillation circuit includes a feedback resistor, an external resistor is omissible.
As the X CIN –X COUT oscillation circuit does not include any feedback resistor, connect a feedback
resistor externally.
Regarding circuit constants for R f, Rd, C IN, COUT, C CIN and C COUT, ask the resonator manufacturer
for information, and set the values recommended by the resonator manufacturer.
3820 group
XCIN
28
Rf
XCOUT
29
XIN
30
XOUT
31
Rd
CCIN
CCOUT
CIN
Fig. 2.11.1 Oscillation circuit example using ceramic resonators
2–190
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
COUT
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
(2) External clock input circuit
An external clock can also be supplied to the main clock oscillation circuit.
Figure 2.11.2 shows an external clock input circuit example. As an external clock to be input to the
X IN pin, use a pulse signal with a duty ratio of 50%. At this time, open the XOUT pin.
Any clock externally generated cannot be input to the X CIN pin directly. Cause oscillation with an
external ceramic resonator.
3820 group
XCIN
28
XCOUT
Rf
29
XIN
30
XOUT
31
Open
Rd
External oscillation circuit
CCIN
CCOUT
VCC
VSS
Fig. 2.11.2 External clock input circuit example
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–191
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11.2 Internal clock φ
The internal clock φ is the standard for operations.
(1) Clock generating circuit
The clock generating circuit controls the oscillation of the oscillation circuit. The generated clock
(internal clock φ ) is supplied to the CPU and peripheral units.
Figure 2.11.3 shows the clock generating circuit block diagram. Oscillation can be stopped and resumed by the clock generating circuit.
XCOUT
XCIN
“0” Port Xc
switch bit
“1”
XOUT Internal system clock
selection bit (Note)
“1” Low-speed mode
XIN
1/2
1/4
“0”
Middle-/high-speed
mode
1/2
Timer 1
count source
selection bit
“1”
Timer 1
“0”
Timer 2
count source
selection bit
“0”
Timer 2
“1”
Main clock
division ratio
selection bit
“1” Middle-speed mode
Main clock
stop bit
Q S
R
S Q
STP
instruction
Timing φ
(Internal clock)
“0”
High-/low-speed
mode
WIT
instruction
R
Q S
R
STP
instruction
Reset
Interrupt disable flag (I)
Interrupt request
Note: When using the low-speed mode, set the port Xc switch bit to “1.”
Fig. 2.11.3 Clock generating circuit block diagram
2–192
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
(2) Clock output function
The internal clock φ can be output from the φ pin by setting the φ output control bit (bit 0) of the φ
output control register (address 002A 16) to “1.”
The φ pin is also used as port P41. Accordingly, to use it as an φ pin, set bit 1 of the port P4 direction
register to “1.”
Figure 2.11.4 shows the structure of the φ output control register.
φoutput control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
φ output control register (CKOUT) [Address 2A16]
B
Name
0 φ output control bit
Functions
0: Port function
1: φ clock output
(Port direction register
= “1”)
1 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
to written to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
At reset R W
0
0
0 ×
Fig. 2.11.4 Structure of φ output control register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–193
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11.3 Oscillating operation
The start and stop sources for oscillating operation are described below.
(1) Oscillating operation
At reset release, the middle-speed mode is provided. At this time, only the main clock oscillates and
the XCIN and X COUT pins function as I/O ports.
To use the sub-clock, set the P70, P7 1 pull-up (bit 4) of the PULL register A (address 001616) to “0”
and disconnect each pull-up resistor of the XCIN and X COUT pins.
■Middle-speed mode
The internal clock φ after reset release is obtained by dividing f(XIN) by 8 (f(XIN) is the frequency which
is input to the X IN pin).
When changing to the high-speed mode:
Set the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 6) of the CPU mode register (address 003B16) to “0.”
When changing to the low-speed mode:
Change the mode according to the following procedure.
➀ Set the port Xc switch bit (bit 4) of the CPU mode register to “1.”
➁ Generate the oscillation stabilizing time of X CIN input by software.
➂ Set the internal system clock selection bit (bit 7) of the CPU mode register to “1.”
■High-speed mode
The clock obtained by dividing f(X IN) by 2 is an internal clock φ .
When changing to the middle-speed mode:
Set the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 6) of the CPU mode register to “1.”
When changing to the low-speed mode:
Change the mode according to the following procedure.
➀ Set the port Xc switch bit (bit 4) of the CPU mode register to “1.”
➁ Generate the oscillation stabilizing time of X CIN input by software.
➂ Set the internal system clock selection bit (bit 7) of the CPU mode register to “1.”
2–194
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
■Low-speed mode
The clock obtained by dividing the frequency f(XCIN) input to the XCIN pin by 2 is an internal clock φ.
In the low-speed mode, the oscillation of the main clock is stopped by setting the main clock (XIN–
X OUT) stop bit to “1,” so that the low-power operation can be attained.
When changing to the middle- or high-speed modes:
Change the mode according to the following procedure.
➀ Set the main clock (X IN–X OUT) stop bit (bit 5) of the CPU mode register to “0.”
➁ Generate the oscillation stabilizing time of X IN input by software.
➂ Set the internal system clock selection bit (bit 7) of the CPU mode register to “0.”
➃ Specify the main clock division ratio selection bit (bit 6) of the CPU mode register.
Notes 1: Make a mode change from the middle- or high-speed modes to the low-speed mode after
the oscillation of both the main clock and the sub-clock is stabilized (for oscillation stabilizing time, ask the resonator manufacturer for information).
2: For the sub-clock, the stabilizing of oscillation requires much time. When making a change
from the middle-speed or high-speed modes to the stop mode and then making a return
from the stop mode while the sub-clock oscillates, the oscillation of the sub-clock is not yet
stabilized even when the main clock has become stable and the CPU has been restored.
3: For a mode change, set to f(X IN) > f(X CIN ) ✕ 3.
(2) Oscillating operation in the stop mode
After the stop mode is provided by executing the STP instruction, every oscillation stops and the
internal clock φ stops at the “H” level. At the time when restoration is made from the stop mode by
rest input or by the occurrence of an interrupt request for restoration, oscillation starts.
For the details of the stop mode, refer to “2.9.1 Stop mode.”
(3) Oscillating operation in the wait mode
After the wait mode is provided by executing the WIT instruction, the internal clock φ supplied to the
CPU stops at the “H” level. As oscillation is continued, the supply of internal clock φ to the peripheral
units is continued.
At the time when restoration is made from the wait mode by reset input or by the occurrence of an
interrupt request for restoration, the supply of internal clock φ to the CPU starts. For the details of the
wait mode, refer to “2.9.2 Wait mode.”
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–195
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
(4) State transitions of internal clock φ
Figure 2.11.5 shows the state transitions of the internal clock φ.
RESET
“1 CM
”↔ 4
C
“1 M “0
”↔ 6 ”
“0
”
CM6
“1”↔“0”
High-speed mode
(f (φ) = 4 MHz)
CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected)
CM6 = 0 (High-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM7
“1”↔“0”
CM7
“1”↔“0”
Middle-speed mode
(f (φ) = 1 MHz)
CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected)
CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
High-speed mode
(f (φ) = 4 MHz)
CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected)
CM6 = 0 (High-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 0 (32 kHz stopped)
Low-speed mode
(f (φ) = 16 kHz)
CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected)
CM6 = 0 (High-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM6
“1”↔“0”
5
M 1”
C “
”↔ 6 ”
“0 CM “0
”↔
“1
Low-speed mode
(f (φ) = 16 kHz)
CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected)
CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed)
CM5 = 1 (8 MHz stopped)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
b7
CM5
“1”↔“0”
CM6
“1”↔“0”
“1 CM
”↔ 5
“1 CM “0
”↔ 6 ”
“0
”
Low-speed mode
(f (φ) = 16 kHz)
CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected)
CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
CM5
“1”↔“0”
CM4
“1”↔“0”
CM6
“1”↔“0”
4
M 1”
C “
”↔ 6 ”
“0 CM “0
”↔
“1
CM4
“1”↔“0”
Middle-speed mode
(f (φ) = 1 MHz)
CM7 = 0 (8 MHz selected)
CM6 = 1 (Middle-speed)
CM5 = 0 (8 MHz oscillating)
CM4 = 0 (32 kHz stopped)
Low-speed mode
(f (φ) = 16 kHz)
CM7 = 1 (32 kHz selected)
CM6 = 0 (High-speed)
CM5 = 1 (8 MHz stopped)
CM4 = 1 (32 kHz oscillating)
b4
CPU mode register (CPUM)
[Address 3B16]
CM4: Port Xc switch bit
0: I/O port
1: XCIN, XCOUT
CM5: Main clock (XIN–XOUT) stop bit
0: Oscillating
1: Stopped
CM6: Main clock division ratio selection bit
0: f(XIN)/2 (high-speed mode)
1: f(XIN)/8 (middle-speed mode)
CM7: Internal system clock selection bit
0: XIN–XOUT selected
(middle-/high-speed mode)
1: XCIN–XCOUT selected
(low-speed mode)
Notes 1: Switch the mode by the allows shown between the mode blocks.( Do not switch between the mode
directly without an allow.)
2: The all modes can be switched to the stop mode or the wait mode and returned to the source mode when
the stop mode or the wait mode is released.
3: Timer and LCD operate in the wait mode.
4: In middle-/high-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 1 ms occurs
automatically by timer 1 and timer 2.
5: In low-speed mode, when the stop mode is released, a delay of approximately 0.25 s occurs automatically
by timer 1 and timer 2.
6: Wait until oscillation stabilizes after oscillating the main clock XIN before the switching from the low-speed
mode to the middle-/high-speed mode.
7: The example assumes that 8 MHz is being applied to the XIN pin and 32 kHz to the XCIN pin. φ indicates
the internal clock.
Fig. 2.11.5 State transitions of internal clock φ
2–196
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
2.11.4 Oscillation stabilizing time
In the oscillating circuit using ceramic resonators, the oscillation is unstable for a certain time when the
oscillation of the resonators starts.
The time required for stabilizing of oscillation is called oscillation stabilizing time.
An appropriate oscillation stabilizing time is required in accordance with the conditions of the oscillation
circuit in use. For oscillation stabilizing time, ask the resonator manufacturer for information.
(1) Oscillation stabilizing time at poweron
In the oscillating circuit using ceramic resonators, oscillation is unstable for a certain time immediately
after poweron. At reset release, the oscillation stabilizing time for approximately 8,000 cycles of XIN
input is automatically generated.
Figure 2.11.6 shows the oscillation stabilizing time at poweron.
●Middle-/high-speed mode
VCC
2.5 V
2 µs or more
RESET
XIN
Oscillation stabilizing time
Internal reset
Release internal reset state
Fig. 2.11.6 Oscillation stabilizing time at poweron
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2–197
APPLICATION
2.11 Oscillation circuit
(2) Oscillation stabilizing time at restoration from the stop mode
In the stop mode, oscillation stops.
When restoration is made from the stop mode by reset input or an interrupt request, the oscillation
stabilizing time for approximately 8,000 cycles of XIN input or XCIN input is automatically generated as
at poweron.
At restoration made by reset, XIN input is a clock source of oscillation stabilizing time.
At restoration made by an interrupt request, either X IN input or X CIN input set as a system clock
immediately before execution of the STP instruction becomes a count source of oscillation stabilizing
time.
When XIN input is a system clock, the oscillation stabilizing time at restoration becomes approximately
8,000 cycles of XIN input. However, note that the oscillation on the XCIN side may not be stable even
after the lapse of this oscillation stabilizing time.
For the details of the stop mode, refer to “2.9.1 Stop mode.”
(3) Oscillation stabilizing time at reoscillation of X IN
When starting the oscillation of XIN which was stopped by setting the main clock (XIN–XOUT) stop bit
of the CPU mode register to “1,” set this bit to “0.” At this time, generate oscillation stabilizing time
by software.
Figure 2.11.7 shows the oscillation stabilizing time at reoscillation of X IN.
VCC
Main clock
(XIN–XOUT)
stop bit
Oscillation stabilizing time (Note)
XIN
Note: For oscillation stabilizing time, ask the resonator manufacturer for information.
Fig. 2.11.7 Oscillation stabilizing time at reoscillation of XIN
2–198
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
CHAPTER 3
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.2 Countermeasures against
noise
3.3 Control registers
3.4 List of instruction codes
3.5 Machine instructions
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
3.7 Mark specification form
3.8 Package outlines
3.9 SFR allocation
3.10 Pin configuration
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1 Built-in PROM version
In contrast with the mask ROM version, the microcomputer with a built-in programmable ROM is called the
built-in programmable ROM version (referred as “the built-in PROM version”).
The following two types of built-in PROM version are available.
•EPROM version.....................The contents of the built-in EPROM version can be written, deleted and
rewritten.
•One Time PROM version.......The contents of the built-in PROM can be written only once and cannot be
deleted and rewritten.
The EPROM version has the function of the One Time PROM version and also permits deleting and
rewriting the contents of the PROM.
3–2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1.1 Product expansion
Table 3.1.1 shows the product expansion of the built-in PROM version.
Table 3.1.1 Product expansion of built-in PROM version
Product
PROM
RAM
Package
Programming
adapter
M38203E4-XXXFP
80P6N-A✽1 PCA4738F-80A
M38203E4GP
One Time
PROM
16384 bytes
(16254 bytes)
80P6S-A ✽2 PCA4738G-80
80P6D-A ✽3 PCA4738H-80
EPROM
16384 bytes
(16254 bytes)
80D0 ✽4
PCA4738L-80A EPROM version
M38207E8-XXXFP
80P6N-A✽1 PCA4738F-80A
Shipped after programming
and inspection at plant
Shipped in blank✽5
M38207E8FP
M38207E8GP
Shipped after programming
and inspection at plant
Shipped in blank✽5
M38203E4HP
M38207E8-XXXGP
Shipped after programming
and inspection at plant
Shipped in blank✽5
512 bytes
M38203E4-XXXHP
M38203E4FS
Shipped after programming
and inspection at plant
Shipped in blank✽5
M38203E4FP
M38203E4-XXXGP
Remarks
One Time
PROM
32768 bytes
(32638 bytes)
80P6S-A ✽2 PCA4738G-80
Shipped after programming
and inspection at plant
Shipped in blank✽5
1024 bytes
M38207E8-XXXHP
80P6D-A ✽3 PCA4738H-80
Shipped after programming
and inspection at plant
Shipped in blank✽5
M38207E8HP
M38207E8FS
EPROM
32768 bytes
(32638 bytes)
✽1
✽2
✽3
✽4
✽5
0.8 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
0.65 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
0.5 mm-pitch plastic molded QFP
0.8 mm-pitch ceramic LCC
The product is shipped without writing any data in the built-in PROM
80P6N-A
:
80P6S-A
:
80P6D-A
:
80D0
:
Shipped in blank :
80D0 ✽4
PCA4738L-80A EPROM version
Note: The number in parentheses denotes a user ROM capacity.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–3
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1.2 Performance overview
Table 3.1.2 shows a performance overview of the built-in PROM version.
The performance of the built-in PROM version is the same as that of the mask ROM version with the
exception that the PROM is built in.
Table 3.1.2 Performance overview of built-in PROM version
Parameter
Basic instructions
Instruction execution time
Memory sizes
PROM
Performance
RAM
Programmable I/O ports
Oscillation frequency
Main clock f(XIN)
Sub-clock f(XCIN)
Interrupts
Timers
Serial I/O1
Serial I/O2
LCD
(Liquid Crystal Display)
drive control functions
Bias
Duty ratio
Segment output
Common output
Watchdog timer
φ clock output function
Clock generating circuit
Power source voltage
Power dissipation
High-speed mode
Low-speed mode
Operating temperature range
Device structure
Packages
EPROM version
One Time PROM
version
71
0.5 µs (minimum instructions at 8MHz oscillation frequency)
M38203E4
16384 bytes
(user ROM capacity; 16254 bytes)
M38207E8
32768 bytes
(user ROM capacity; 32638 bytes)
M38203E4
512 bytes
M38207E8
1024 bytes
43
8 MHz (maximum)
32 kHz (standard) to 50 kHz (maximum)
16 sources, 16 vectors
(includes key input interrupt)
8-bit ✕ 3
16-bit ✕ 2
8-bit ✕ 1 (operable in clock synchronous mode and UART mode)
8-bit ✕ 1 (operable only in clock synchronous mode)
Select 1/2 or 1/3
Select duty ratio value of 2, 3, or 4
40 (maximum)
4 (maximum)
14-bit ✕ 1
1-bit output
2 built-in circuits (connect an external ceramic resonator or an external
quartz-crystal oscillator)
2.5 V (minimum) to 5.0 V (standard) to 5.5 V (maximum)
✽4.0 V (minimum) in high-speed mode. However, at f(XIN) =
(4 ✕ V CC – 8) MHz, 2.5 V to 4.0 V is possible.
32 mW (at 8 MHz oscillation frequency, V CC = 5 V)
0.045 mW (at 32 kHz oscillation frequency, V CC = 3 V)
–20 °C to 85 °C
CMOS silicon gate
80D0 (0.8 mm-pitch ceramic LCC)
80P6N-A (0.8 mm-pitch plastic mold QFP)
80P6S-A (0.65 mm-pitch plastic mold QFP)
80P6D-A (0.5 mm-pitch plastic mold QFP)
Note: The parts enclosed by thick line denotes performance peculiar to the PROM version.
3–4
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
P30/SEG16
P31/SEG17
P32/SEG18
P33/SEG19
P34/SEG20
P35/SEG21
P36/SEG22
P37/SEG23
P00/SEG24
P01/SEG25
P02/SEG26
P03/SEG27
P04/SEG28
P05/SEG29
P06/SEG30
P07/SEG31
P10/SEG32
P11/SEG33
P12/SEG34
P13/SEG35
P14/SEG36
P15/SEG37
P16/SEG38
P17/SEG39
3.1.3 Pin configuration
The pin configuration of the built-in PROM version is the same as that of the mask ROM version.
Figure 3.1.1 shows the pin configuration of the EPROM version.
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
M38203E4FS
M38207E8FS
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
JAPAN
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
VCC
SEG7
76
77
78
79
80
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
VSS
XOUT
XIN
P70/XCOUT
P71/XCIN
RESET
P4 0
P41/φ
P45/TXD
P44/RXD
P43/INT1
P42/INT0
SEG0
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM0
VL3
VL2
VL1
P61/RTP1
P60/INT3/RTP0
P57/INT2
P56/TOUT
P55/CNTR1
P54/CNTR0
P53/SRDY2
P52/SCLK2
P51/SOUT2
P50/SIN2
P47/SRDY1
P46/SCLK1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Package Type : 80D0
Fig. 3.1.1 Pin configuration of EPROM version (top view)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–5
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
P30/SEG16
P31/SEG17
P32/SEG18
P33/SEG19
P34/SEG20
P35/SEG21
P36/SEG22
P37/SEG23
P00/SEG24
P01/SEG25
P02/SEG26
P03/SEG27
P04/SEG28
P05/SEG29
P06/SEG30
P07/SEG31
P10/SEG32
P11/SEG33
P12/SEG34
P13/SEG35
P14/SEG36
P15/SEG37
P16/SEG38
P17/SEG39
Figure 3.1.2 and Figure 3.1.3 show the pin configurations of the One Time PROM version.
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
65
66
67
68
69
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
VCC
SEG7
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
M38203E4-XXXFP
M38203E4FP
M38207E8-XXXFP
M38207E8FP
P45/TXD
Package type : 80P6N-A
Fig. 3.1.2 Pin configuration of One Time PROM version (top view) (1)
3–6
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
P44/RXD
P43/INT1
P42/INT0
SEG0
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM0
VL3
VL2
VL1
P61/RTP1
P60/INT3/RTP0
P57/INT2
P56/TOUT
P55/CNTR1
P54/CNTR0
P53/SRDY2
P52/SCLK2
P51/SOUT2
P50/SIN2
P47/SRDY1
P46/SCLK1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
VSS
XOUT
XIN
P70/XCOUT
P71/XCIN
RESET
P40
P41/φ
APPENDIX
P32/SEG18
P33/SEG19
P34/SEG20
P35/SEG21
P36/SEG22
P37/SEG23
P00/SEG24
P01/SEG25
P02/SEG26
P03/SEG27
P04/SEG28
P05/SEG29
P06/SEG30
P07/SEG31
P10/SEG32
P11/SEG33
P12/SEG34
P13/SEG35
P14/SEG36
P15/SEG37
3.1 Built-in PROM version
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P31/SEG17
P30/SEG16
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
VCC
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
SEG0
COM3
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
M38203E4-XXXGP
M38203E4GP
M38203E4-XXXHP
M38203E4HP
M38207E8-XXXGP
M38207E8GP
M38207E8-XXXHP
M38207E8HP
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
P16/SEG38
P17/SEG39
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
VSS
XOUT
XIN
P70/XCOUT
P71/XCIN
RESET
P40
P41/φ
P42/INT0
P43/INT1
P45/TXD
P44/RXD
COM2
COM1
COM0
VL3
VL2
VL1
P61/RTP1
P60/INT3/RTP0
P57/INT2
P56/TOUT
P55/CNTR1
P54/CNTR0
P53/SRDY2
P52/SCLK2
P51/SOUT2
P50/SIN2
P47/SRDY1
P46/SCLK1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Package type : 80P6S-A/80P6D-A
Fig. 3.1.3 Pin configuration of One Time PROM version (top view) (2)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–7
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
XCOUT
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
I/O port P5
P6(2)
9 10
I/O
port
P6
28 29
I/O
port
P7
Serial I/O2(8)
Reset
φ
P7(2)
P5(8)
Sub–clock
output
Sub–clock
input
Watchdog timer
XCOUT
XCIN
I/O port P4
PCH
A
X
Y
S
PCL
PS
φ
Input port P3
57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
P3(8)
27
RESET
Reset input
CPU
Serial I/O1(8)
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
P4(8)
Address bus
Note : Pin numbers are for package type 80P6N–A.
XCIN
31
30
Clock generating circuit
Main clock output
XOUT
INT2
Fig. 3.1.4 Functional block diagram of built-in PROM version
INT0, INT1
3–8
Main clock input
XIN
Date bus
PROM
P2(8)
I/O port P2
P1(8)
LCD
display
RAM
(20 bytes)
RAM
I/O port P1
41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
Key–on wake up
Timer 3(8)
Timer 1(8) Timer 2(8)
Timer Y(16)
Timer X(16)
32
(0V)
VSS
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
73
(5V)
VCC
I/O port P0
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56
P0(8)
LCD
drive
control
circuit
COM0
COM1
COM2
COM3
SEG0
SEG1
SEG2
SEG3
SEG4
SEG5
SEG6
SEG7
SEG8
SEG9
SEG10
SEG11
SEG12
SEG13
SEG14
SEG15
5
4
3
2
1
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
8 VL1
7 VL2
6 VL3
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1.4 Functional block diagram
Figure 3.1.4 shows the functional block diagram of the built-in PROM version.
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
3.1.5 Notes on use
Notes on using the built-in PROM version are described below.
(1) All products of built-in PROM version
■Notes on programming
●When programming the contents of the PROM, use the dedicated programming adapter. This permits programming with a general-purpose PROM programmer.
At that time, set all of SW1, SW2 and SW3 in the above programming adapter to “OFF.”
●As a high voltage is used for programming, be careful not to apply overvoltage to pins. Special care
must be exercised at poweron.
■Notes on reading
When reading out the contents of the PROM, use the dedicated programming adapter as in programming. This permits reading out with a general-purpose PROM programmer.
At that time, set all of SW1, SW2 and SW3 in the programmer to “OFF.”
■Notes on using port P4 0
When using port P4 0 as an input port in the One Time PROM/EPROM version, connect a resistors
of several kΩ externally to port P40 in series. If this pin is not used, connect a resistor of several kΩ
externally to V SS in series (for improvement of the value withstand noise operation failure).
For details, refer to “3.2 Countermeasures against noise, 3.2.1 Shortest wiring length, (3) Wiring
to the V PP pin of the One Time PROM version and the EPROM version.”
(2) EPROM Version
■Notes on deleting
●Sunlight and fluorescent lamps include light which may delete programmed information. For use in
the read mode, cover the transparent glass part of the delete window with a seal or others.
●The seal to cover the transparent glass part is prepared by us.
This seal is metallic (aluminium) for reasons of prevention of information-deleting light and toughness. Be careful not to bring this seal into contact with lead pins of the microcomputer.
●Before deleting information, clean the transparent glass. Finger marks and seal paste may block
ultraviolet rays and effect delete characteristics.
■Notes on mounting
●To mount the EPROM version for a purpose other than evaluation, use a suitable mounting socket.
When mounting a ceramic package on the socket, fix it securely with silicone resin.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–9
APPENDIX
3.1 Built-in PROM version
(3) One Time PROM version
■Notes on setting the PROM programmer area
●For products shipped in blank, access to the first 128 bytes and addresses FFFE16 and FFFF16 in
the built-in PROM user area is inhibited.
Note the above point when setting the PROM programmer area.
■Notes before actual use
The programming test and screening for PROM of the One Time PROM version (shipped in blank) are
not performed in the assembly process and the following processes. To ensure reliability after programming, performing programming and test according to the Figure 3.1.5 before actual use are
recommended.
Programming with PROM programmer
Screening (Caution)
(Leave at 150 °C for 40 hours)
Verification with PROM programmer
Functional check in target device
Caution: The screening temperature is far higher than the
storage temperature. Never expose to 150°C
exceeding 100 hours.
Fig. 3.1.5 Programming and testing of One Time PROM version (shipped in blank)
3–10
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
Countermeasures against noise are described below. The following countermeasures are effective against
noise in theory, however, it is necessary not only to take measures as follows but to evaluate before actual
use.
3.2.1 Shortest wiring length
The wiring on a printed circuit board can function as an antenna which feeds noise into the microcomputer.
The shorter the total wiring length (by mm unit), the less the possibility of noise insertion into a microcomputer.
(1) Wiring for the reset input pin
Make the length of wiring which is connected to the RESET input pin as short as possible. Especially,
connect a capacitor across the RESET input pin and the V SS pin with the shortest possible wiring
(within 20 mm).
Reason
The reset works to initialize the internal state of a microcomputer.
The width of a pulse input into the RESET pin is determined by the timing necessary conditions. If
noise having a shorter pulse width than the standard is input to the RESET input pin, the reset is
released before the internal state of the microcomputer is completely initialized. This may cause a
program runaway.
Noise
Reset
circuit
RESET
VSS
Reset
circuit
VSS
VSS
RESET
VSS
Fig. 3.2.1 Wiring for the RESET input pin
(2) Wiring for clock input/output pins
●Make the length of wiring which is connected
to clock I/O pins as short as possible.
●Make the length of wiring (within 20 mm) across
the grouding lead of a capacitor which is connected to an oscillator and the V SS pin of a
microcomputer as short as possible.
●Separate the V SS pattern only for oscillation
from other V SS patterns.
Noise
XIN
XOUT
VSS
XIN
XOUT
VSS
Fig. 3.2.2 Wiring for clock I/O pins
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–11
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
Reason
A microcomputer’s operation synchronizes with a clock generated by the oscillator (circuit). If noise
enters clock
I/O pins, clock waveforms may be deformed. This may cause a program failure or program runaway.
Also, if a potential difference is caused by the noise between the V SS level of a microcomputer and
the V SS level of an oscillator, the correct clock will not be input in the microcomputer.
(3) Wiring to the V PP pin of the One Time
PROM version and the EPROM version
<When the VSS pin is also used as any other pin
than the CNV SS✽1 >
●Make the length of wiring which is connected
to the VPP pin as short as possible.
●Connect an approximately 5 kΩ resistor to the
V PP pin in serial (refer to Figure 3.2.3).
3820
P40/VPP
RESET
When the microcomputer does
not have the CNVSS pin, the VPP
pin is also used as the input pin
adjacent to the RESET pin.
✽1 When a microcomputer does not have the
CNV SS pin, the VPP pin is also as the input
pin adjacent to the RESET input pin.
Reason
The V PP pin of the One Time PROM and the
EPROM version is the power source input pin
for the built-in PROM. When programming in
the built-in PROM, the impedance of the VPP
pin is low to allow the electric current for writing flow into the PROM. Because of this, noise
can enter easily. If noise enters the VPP pin,
abnormal instruction codes or data are read
from the built-in PROM, which may cause a
program runaway.
Approximately
5 kΩ
Fig. 3.2.3 Wiring for the V PP pin of the One Time
PROM and the EPROM version
3.2.2 Connection of a bypass capacitor across
the V SS line and the V CC line
Connect an approximately 0.1 µF bypass capacitor
across the V SS line and the V CC line as follows:
●Connect a bypass capacitor across the V SS pin
and the V CC pin at equal length.
●Connect a bypass capacitor across the V SS pin
and the VCC pin with the shortest possible wiring.
●Use lines with a larger diameter than other signal
lines for V SS line and VCC line.
Chip
VC C
VSS
Fig. 3.2.4 Bypass capacitor across the V SS line
and the V CC line
3–12
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
3.2.3 Oscillator concerns
Take care to prevent an oscillator that generates
clocks for a microcomputer operation from being
affected by other signals.
(1) Installing an oscillator away from large current signal lines
Install a microcomputer (and especially an
oscillator) as far as possible from signal lines
where a current larger than the tolerance of
current value flows.
Microcomputer
Mutual inductance
M
XIN
XOUT
VSS
Large
current
GND
Fig. 3.2.5 Wiring for a large current signal line
Reason
In the system using a microcomputer, there
are signal lines for controlling motors, LEDs,
and thermal heads or others. When a large
current flows through those signal lines, strong
noise occurs because of mutual inductance.
3.2.4 Installing an oscillator away from signal lines where
potential levels change frequently
Install an oscillator away from signal lines where
potential levels change frequently. Also, do not cross
such signal lines over the clock lines or the signal
lines which are sensitive to noise.
Reason
Signal lines where potential levels change frequently
(such as the CNTR pin signal line) may affect other
lines at signal rising edge or falling edge. If such
lines cross over a clock line, clock waveforms may
be deformed, which causes a microcomputer failure
or a program runaway.
Do not cross
CNTR
XIN
XOUT
VSS
Fig. 3.2.6 Wiring to a signal line where potential
levels change frequently
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–13
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
3.2.5 Oscillator protection using V SS pattern
As for a two-sided printed circuit board, print a V SS
pattern on the underside (soldering side) of the
position (on the component side) where an oscillator is mounted.
Connect the VSS pattern to the microcomputer VSS
pin with the shortest possible wiring. Besides, separate this VSS pattern from other VSS patterns.
An example of V SS patterns on the
underside of a printed circuit board
Oscillator wiring
pattern example
XIN
XOUT
VSS
Separate the VSS line for oscillation from other VSS lines
Fig. 3.2.7 V SS pattern on the underside of an
oscillator
3.2.6 Setup for I/O ports
Setup I/O ports using hardware and software as
follows:
<Hardware>
●Connect a resistor of 100 Ω or more to an I/O
port in series.
<Software>
●As for an input port, read data several times by
a program for checking whether input levels are
equal or not.
●As for an output port, since the output data may
reverse because of noise, rewrite data to its data
register at fixed periods.
●Rewirte data to direction registers and pull-up control registers (only the product having it) at fixed
periods.
Noise
Data bus
Data register
I/O port
pins
Fig. 3.2.8 Setup for I/O ports
When a direction register is set for input port again at
fixed periods, a several-nanosecond short pulse may
be output from this port. If this is undesirable, connect
a capacitor to this port to remove the noise pulse.
3–14
Noise
Direction register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.2 Countermeasures against noise
3.2.7 Providing of watchdog timer function by
software
If a microcomputer runs away because of noise or
others, it can be detected by a software watchdog
timer and the microcomputer can be reset to normal operation. This is equal to or more effective
than program runaway detection by a hardware watchdog timer. The following shows an example of a
watchdog timer provided by software.
In the following example, to reset a microcomputer
to normal operation, the main routine detects errors
of the interrupt processing routine and the interrupt
processing routine detects errors of the main routine.
This example assumes that interrupt processing is
repeated multiple times in a single main routine
processing.
<The interrupt processing routine>
●Decrements the SWDT contents by 1 at each
interrupt processing.
●Determins that the main routine operates normally
when the SWDT contents are reset to the initial
value N at almost fixed cycles (at the fixed interrupt processing count).
●Detects that the main routine has failed and determines to branch to the program initialization
routine for recovery processing in the following
case:
①If the SWDT contents are not initialized to the
initial value N but continued to decrement and if
they exceed the limit (and reach 0 or less)
<The main routine>
●Assigns a single byte of RAM to a software watchdog timer (SWDT) and writes the initial value N in
the SWDT once at each execution of the main
routine. The initial value N should satisfy the following condition:
N+1 ≥ (Counts of interrupt processing executed in
each main routine)
As the main routine execution cycle may change because of an interrupt processing or others, the initial
value N should have a margin.
●Watches the operation of the interrupt processing routine by comparing the SWDT contents with
countsof interrupt processing after the initial value
N has been set.
●Detects that the interrupt processing routine has
failed and determines to branch to the program
initialization routine for recovery processing in the
following cases:
①If the SWDT contents do not change after interrupt processing
➁If the changed SWDT contents are abnormal (In
Figure 3.2.9, the main routine determines that
the interrupt processing routine has failed only
if the SWDT contents do not change).
Main routine
Interrupt processing routine
(SWDT)← N
(SWDT) ← (SWDT) – 1
CLI
Interrupt processing
Main processing
(SWDT)
≤ 0?
N
(SWDT)
= N?
=N
Interrupt processing
routine errors
≤0
>0
RTI
Return
Main routine
errors
Fig. 3.2.9 Watchdog timer by software
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–15
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
3.3 Control registers
Port P0 direction register, port P1 direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port P0 direction register (P0D) [Address 0116]
Port P1 direction register (P1D) [Address 0316]
Name
B
0 Port P0 direction
register /
Port P1 direction
register
At reset R W
Functions
0 : All bits are input mode
×
0
1 : All bits are output mode
1 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written
to to and be read out.
7
× ×
0
Note: In ports P0 and P1, input/output switching is performed by a port unit.
By setting bit 0 of the corresponding port direction register to “0”, the
port is set for the input mode. By setting to “1”, the port is set for the
output mode. Nothing is allocated for bits 1 to 7 of the ports P0 and
P1 direction registers, and these bits cannot be written to.
Fig. 3.3.1 Structure of port P0 and P1 direction registers
Port Pi direction register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Port Pi direction register (PiD) (i = 2, 4 to 7)
[Address 0516, 0916, 0B16, 0D16, 0F16]
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Port Pi direction
register
Functions
0 : Port Pi0 input mode
1 : Port Pi0 output mode
At reset
0
R W
×
0 : Port Pi1 input mode
1 : Port Pi1 output mode
0 : Port Pi2 input mode
1 : Port Pi2 output mode
0 : Port Pi3 input mode
1 : Port Pi3 output mode
0 : Port Pi4 input mode
1 : Port Pi4 output mode
0 : Port Pi5 input mode
1 : Port Pi5 output mode
0 : Port Pi6 input mode
1 : Port Pi6 output mode
0 : Port Pi7 input mode
1 : Port Pi7 output mode
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
0
×
Notes 1: Nothing is allocated bit 0 of port P4 direction register and bit 2
to bit 7 of port P7 direction register. These bits cannot be written
to.
2: The contents of the port Pi direction register cannot be read out
(refer to “2.1.4 Notes on use”).
Fig. 3.3.2 Structure of port Pi (i = 2, 4 to 7) direction registers
3–16
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
PULL register A
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
PULL register A (PULLA) [Address 1616]
Name
B
0
P00–P07 pull-down
1 P10–P17 pull-down
2
P20–P27 pull-up
3
P30–P37 pull-down
4
P70, P71 pull-up
Functions
0 : No pull-down
1 : Pull-down
0 : No pull-down
1 : Pull-down
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-down
1 : Pull-down
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written
to to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
At reset R W
1
1
0
1
0
0
0 ×
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up or pull-down is
impossible.
Fig. 3.3.3 Structure of PULL register A
PULL register B
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
PULL register B (PULLB) [Address 1716]
B
Name
0 P41-P43 pull-up
1 P44-P47 pull-up
2 P50-P53 pull-up
3 P54-P57 pull-up
Functions
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
0 : No pull-up
1 : Pull-up
5 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written
to to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
4 P60, P61 pull-up
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 ×
Note: For ports set for the output mode, pull-up is impossible.
Fig. 3.3.4 Structure of PULL register B
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–17
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Serial I/O1 status register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS) [Address 1916]
B
Name
0 Transmit buffer
empty flag (TBE)
1 Receive buffer full flag
(RBF)
2 Transmit shift register shift
completion flag (TSC)
3
4
5
6
7
Functions
At reset R W
×
0
0: Buffer full
1: Buffer empty
×
0: Buffer empty
0
1: Buffer full
×
0: Transmit shift in progress
0
1: Transmit shift completed
×
Overrun error flag
0
0: No error
(OE)
1: Overrun error
×
Parity error flag
0: No error
0
(PE)
1: Parity error
×
0: No error
Framing error flag
0
1: Framing error
(FE)
×
Summing error flag
0
0: (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 0
(SE)
1: (OE) U (PE) U (FE) = 1
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to
1 ×
1
and is fixed to “1” at reading.
Fig. 3.3.5 Structure of serial I/O1 status register
3–18
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Serial I/O1 control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON) [Address 1A16]
B
0
Name
BRG count source
selection bit (CSS)
Functions
0: f(XIN)
1: f(XIN)/4
At reset R W
0
1
Serial I/O1
•In clock synchronous mode
synchronization clock 0: BRG output/4
selection bit
1: External clock input
(SCS)
•In UART mode
0: BRG output/16
1: External clock input/16
0
2
SRDY1 output enable 0: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as I/O port P47
1: P47/SRDY1 pin operates as signal output
bit (SRDY)
pin SRDY1
(SRDY1 signal indicates receive enable state)
0
3
Transmit interrupt
source selection
bit (TIC)
0: When transmit buffer has emptied
1: When transmit shift operation is
completed
0
4
Transmit enable bit
(TE)
0: Transmit disabled
1: Transmit enabled
0
5
Receive enable bit
(RE)
0: Receive disabled
1: Receive enabled
0
6
Serial I/O1 mode
0: Clock asynchronous serial I/O1 (UART)
selection bit (SIOM)
mode
1: Clock synchronous serial I/O1 mode
7
Serial I/O1 enable
bit
(SIOE)
0: Serial I/O1 disabled
(pins P44–P47 operate as I/O pins)
1: Serial I/O1 enabled
(pins P44–P47 operate as serial I/O1 pins)
0
0
Fig. 3.3.6 Structure of serial I/O1 control register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–19
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
UART control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
UART control register (UARTCON) [Address 1B16]
B
Name
0 Character length
selection bit (CHAS)
1
2
3
4
5
to
7
Functions
0: 8 bits
1: 7 bits
0: Parity checking disabled
1: Parity checking enabled
0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
0: 1 stop bit
1: 2 stop bits
Parity enable bit
(PARE)
Parity selection bit
(PARS)
Stop bit length
selection bit (STPS)
0: CMOS output (in output mode)
P45/TxD P-channel
1: N-channel open-drain output
output disable bit
(in output mode)
(POFF)
Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be written
to and are fixed to “1” at reading.
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
1
1 ×
Fig. 3.3.7 Structure of UART control register
Serial I/O2 control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON) [Address 1D16]
B
Name
Internal
0
synchronization
clock select bits
1
2
Functions
b2b1b0
0 0 0: f(XIN)/8
0 0 1: f(XIN)/16
0 1 0: f(XIN)/32
0 1 1: f(XIN)/64
1 0 0:
1 0 1: Do not set
1 1 0: f(XIN)/128
1 1 1: f(XIN)/256
0
0
0
3 Serial I/O2 port
selection bit
0: I/O port (P51, P52)
1: SOUT2, SCLK2 signal output
0
4
SRDY2 output
enable bit
0: I/O port (P53)
1: SRDY2 signal output
0
5
Transfer direction
selection bit
0: LSB first
1: MSB first
0
0: External clock
1: Internal clock
0
6 Synchronization
clock selection bit
7
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and
is fixed to “0” at reading.
Fig. 3.3.8 Structure of serial I/O2 control register
3–20
At reset R W
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
0 ×
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Timer X mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer X mode register (TXM) [Address 2716]
B
Name
0
Timer X write
control bit
1
Real time port
control bit
2
3
4
5
6
Functions
0 : Write value in latch and counter
1 : Write value in latch only
0 : Real time port function
invalid
1 : Real time port function
valid
P60 data for real time 0 : “L” level output
port
1 : “H” level output
P61 data for real time 0 : “L” level output
1 : “H” level output
port
b5b4
Timer X operating
0 0 : Timer mode
mode bits
0 1 : Pulse output mode
1 0 : Event counter mode
1 1 : Pulse width measurement
mode
•CNTR0 interrupt
CNTR0 active edge
0 : Falling edge active
switch bit
1 : Rising edge active
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
•Pulse output mode
0 : Start at initial level “H” output
1 : Start at initial level “L” output
•Event counter mode
0 : Rising edge active
1 : Falling edge active
7
Timer X stop control
bit
•Pulse width measurement mode
0 : Measure “H” level width
1 : Measure “L” level width
0 : Count start
1 : Count stop
0
Fig. 3.3.9 Structure of timer X mode register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–21
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Timer Y mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer Y mode register (TYM) [Address 2816]
B
Name
Functions
At reset R W
Nothing
is
allocated.
These
bits
cannot
be
written
0
0 ×
0
to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
3
4 Timer Y operating
mode bits
b5b4
0 0 : Timer mode
0 1 : Period measurement mode
1 0 : Event counter mode
5
1 1 : Pulse width HL continuously
measurement mode
•CNTR
1 interrupt
6 CNTR1 active edge
0 : Falling edge active
switch bit
1 : Rising edge active
0
0
0
•Period measurement mode
0 : Measure falling edge to
falling edge
1 : Measure rising edge to
rising edge
•Event counter mode
0 : Rising edge active
1 : Falling edge active
7 Timer Y stop control 0 : Count start
bit
1 : Count stop
Fig. 3.3.10 Structure of timer Y mode register
3–22
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
0
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Timer 123 mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Timer 123 mode register (T123M) [Address 2916]
B
0
1
Name
TOUT output active
edge switch bit
0 : Start at “H” output
1 : Start at “L” output
Functions
At reset R W
0
TOUT output control
bit
0 : TOUT output disabled
1 : TOUT output enabled
0
Timer 2 write control 0 : Write value in latch and
counter
bit
1 : Write value in latch only
3 Timer 2 count source 0 : Timer 1 underflow
1 : f(XIN)/16
selection bit
(Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16
(Low-speed mode) (Note)
4 Timer 3 count source 0 : Timer 1 underflow
1 : f(XIN)/16
selection bit
(Middle-/high-speed mode)
f(XCIN)/16
(Low-speed mode) (Note)
5 Timer 1 count source 0 : f(XIN)/16
(Middle-/high-speed mode)
selection bit
f(XCIN)/16
(Low-speed mode) (Note)
1 : f(XCIN)
0
2
0
0
0
0
6, 7 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
written to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
0 ×
Note: Internal clock φ is f(XCIN)/2 in the low-speed mode.
Fig. 3.3.11 Structure of timer 123 mode register
φ output control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
φ output control register (CKOUT) [Address 2A16]
B
Name
0 φ output control bit
Functions
0: Port function
1: φ clock output
(Port direction register
= “1”)
1 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
to written to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
At reset R W
0
0
0 ×
Fig. 3.3.12 Structure of φ output control register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–23
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Watchdog timer control register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON) [Address 3716]
B
Name
0 Watchdog timer H
to bits
5
6
Functions
At reading, the count value of
watchdog timer H is read.
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to and
is fixed to “1” at reading.
7 Watchdog timer H
count source
selection bit
0: Underflow from watchdog
timer L
(WDT is used as 14-bit timer)
1: f(XIN)/16 or f(XCIN)/16
(WDT is used as 6-bit timer)
At reset R W
×
1
(Note)
1
1 ×
0
Note: When a value is written to address 3716, the following values are set,
so that the watchdog timer starts a count operation.
Watchdog timer H = “3F16”
Watchdog timer L = “FF16”
Fig. 3.3.13 Structure of watchdog timer control register
Segment output enable register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0
Segment output enable register (SEG) [Address 3816]
B
Name
Functions
At reset R W
0: Input ports P30–P37
0 Segment output
0
1: Segment output SEG16–SEG23
enable bit 0
0: I/O ports P00, P01
1 Segment output
0
enable bit 1
1: Segment output SEG24, SEG25
0: I/O ports P02–P07
2 Segment output
0
enable bit 2
1: Segment output SEG26–SEG31
0: I/O ports P10, P11
3 Segment output
0
1: Segment output SEG32, SEG33
enable bit 3
0: I/O port P12
4 Segment output
0
enable bit 4
1: Segment output SEG34
0: I/O ports P13–P17
5 Segment output
0
1: Segment output SEG35–SEG39
enable bit 5
6,7 Fix these bits to “0.”
0
0 0
Fig. 3.3.14 Structure of segment output register
3–24
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
LCD mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
LCD mode register (LM) [Address 3916]
B
Name
0 Duty ratio selection
bits
1
2 Bias control bit
3 LCD enable bit
Functions
b1b0
00: Not available
01: 2 (use COM0, COM1)
10: 3 (use COM0–COM2)
11: 4 (use COM0–COM3)
0: 1/3 bias
1: 1/2 bias
0: LCD OFF
1: LCD ON
6
7 LCDCK count source
selection bit (Note 2)
0
0
0
0
0
4 Fix this bit to “0.”
5 LCD circuit divider division
ratio selection bits (Note 1)
At reset R W
b6b5
00: LCDCK count source
01: 2 division of LCDCK count source
10: 4 division of LCDCK count source
11: 8 division of LCDCK count source
0: f(XCIN)/32
1: f(XIN)/8192
0 0
0
0
Notes 1: Reference values at f(XIN) = 8 MHz
00: 977 Hz
01: 488 Hz
10: 244 Hz
11: 122 Hz
2: LCDCK is a clock for a LCD timing controller.
Fig. 3.3.15 Structure of LCD mode register
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–25
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Interrupt edge selection register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE) [Address 3A16]
B
Name
Functions
0 : Falling edge active
0 INT0 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
0 : Falling edge active
1 INT1 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
0 : Falling edge active
2 INT2 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
0 : Falling edge active
3 INT3 interrupt edge
1 : Rising edge active
selection bit
4 Nothing is allocated. These bits cannot be
to written to and are fixed to “0” at reading.
7
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0 ×
0
Fig. 3.3.16 Structure of interrupt edge selection register
CPU mode register
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1
CPU mode register (CPUM) [Address 3B16]
B
Name
0 Processor mode bits
1
2
Stack page selection
bit
Functions
b1b0
00: Single-chip mode
01:
10:
Not available
11:
0: 0 page
1: 1 page
3 Fix this bit to “1.”
4
Port XC switch bit
Main clock division
ratio selection bit
7 Internal system clock
selection bit
0: I/O port
1: XCIN, XCOUT
0
0
0
0
0: f(XIN)/2
(high-speed mode)
1: f(XIN)/8
(middle-speed mode)
1
0: XIN–XOUT selected
(middle-/high-speed mode)
1: XCIN–XCOUT selected
(low-speed mode)
0
Fig. 3.3.17 Structure of CPU mode register
3–26
0
1
5 Main clock (XIN–XOUT) 0: Oscillating
stop bit
1: Stopped
6
At reset R W
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1 1
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Interrupt request register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 1 (IREQ1) [Address 3C16]
B
Name
Functions
0
INT0 interrupt request
bit
INT1 interrupt request
bit
Serial I/O receive
interrupt request bit
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
1 : Interrupt request issued
1
2
3
Serial I/O transmit
interrupt request bit
Timer X interrupt
request bit
Timer Y interrupt
request bit
4
5
6
Timer 2 interrupt
request bit
Timer 3 interrupt
request bit
7
At reset R W
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
✽ : “0” is set by software, but not “1.”
Fig. 3.3.18 Structure of interrupt request register 1
Interrupt request register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt request register 2 (IREQ2) [Address 3D16]
B
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Functions
CNTR0 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
0 : No interrupt request issued
CNTR1 interrupt
1 : Interrupt request issued
request bit
Timer 1 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
INT2 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
INT3 interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
Key input interrupt
0 : No interrupt request issued
request bit
1 : Interrupt request issued
Serial I/O2
0 : No interrupt request issued
interrupt request bit 1 : Interrupt request issued
Nothing is allocated. This bit cannot be written to
and is fixed to “0” at reading.
At reset R W
✽
0
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
✽
0
0 ×
✽ : “0” can be set by software, but “1” cannot be set.
Fig. 3.3.19 Structure of interrupt request register 2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3–27
APPENDIX
3.3 Control registers
Interrupt control register 1
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Interrupt control register 1 (ICON1) [Address 3E16]
B
Name
0
INT0 interrupt enable
bit
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
1
INT1 interrupt enable
bit
Serial I/O1 receive
interrupt enable bit
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
2
3 Serial I/O1 transmit
interrupt enable bit
4 Timer X interrupt
enable bit
5 Timer Y interrupt
enable bit
6 Timer 2 interrupt
enable bit
7 Timer 3 interrupt
enable bit
Functions
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0
0
0
Fig. 3.3.20 Structure of interrupt control register 1
Interrupt control register 2
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0
Interrupt control register 2 (ICON2) [Address 3F16]
B
Name
0
CNTR0 interrupt
enable bit
CNTR1 interrupt
enable bit
Timer 1 interrupt
enable bit
INT2 interrupt enable
bit
INT3 interrupt enable
bit
Key input interrupt
enable bit
Serial I/O2
interrupt enable bit
Fix this bit to “0.”
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Functions
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
0 : Interrupts disabled
1 : Interrupts enabled
Fig. 3.3.21 Structure of interrupt control register 2
3–28
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
At reset R W
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
APPENDIX
3.4 List of instruction codes
3.4 List of instruction codes
D7 – D4
D3 – D0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Hexadecimal
notation
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
ORA
ABS
ASL
ABS
SEB
0, ZP
0000
0
BRK
ORA
JSR
IND, X ZP, IND
BBS
0, A
—
ORA
ZP
ASL
ZP
BBS
0, ZP
PHP
ORA
IMM
ASL
A
SEB
0, A
—
0001
1
BPL
ORA
IND, Y
CLT
BBC
0, A
—
ORA
ZP, X
ASL
ZP, X
BBC
0, ZP
CLC
ORA
ABS, Y
DEC
A
CLB
0, A
—
0010
2
JSR
ABS
AND
IND, X
JSR
SP
BBS
1, A
BIT
ZP
AND
ZP
ROL
ZP
BBS
1, ZP
PLP
AND
IMM
ROL
A
SEB
1, A
BIT
ABS
0011
3
BMI
AND
IND, Y
SET
BBC
1, A
—
AND
ZP, X
ROL
ZP, X
BBC
1, ZP
SEC
AND
ABS, Y
INC
A
CLB
1, A
LDM
ZP
0100
4
RTI
EOR
STP
IND, X (Note)
BBS
2, A
COM
ZP
EOR
ZP
LSR
ZP
BBS
2, ZP
PHA
EOR
IMM
LSR
A
SEB
2, A
JMP
ABS
0101
5
BVC
EOR
IND, Y
BBC
2, A
—
EOR
ZP, X
LSR
ZP, X
BBC
2, ZP
CLI
EOR
ABS, Y
—
CLB
2, A
—
0110
6
RTS
ADC
MUL
IND, X (Note)
BBS
3, A
TST
ZP
ADC
ZP
ROR
ZP
BBS
3, ZP
PLA
ADC
IMM
ROR
A
SEB
3, A
JMP
IND
0111
7
BVS
ADC
IND, Y
—
BBC
3, A
—
ADC
ZP, X
ROR
ZP, X
BBC
3, ZP
SEI
ADC
ABS, Y
—
CLB
3, A
—
1000
8
BRA
STA
IND, X
RRF
ZP
BBS
4, A
STY
ZP
STA
ZP
STX
ZP
BBS
4, ZP
DEY
—
TXA
SEB
4, A
STY
ABS
STA
ABS
STX
ABS
SEB
4, ZP
1001
9
BCC
STA
IND, Y
—
BBC
4, A
STY
ZP, X
STA
ZP, X
STX
ZP, Y
BBC
4, ZP
TYA
STA
ABS, Y
TXS
CLB
4, A
—
STA
ABS, X
—
CLB
4, ZP
1010
A
LDY
IMM
LDA
IND, X
LDX
IMM
BBS
5, A
LDY
ZP
LDA
ZP
LDX
ZP
BBS
5, ZP
TAY
LDA
IMM
TAX
SEB
5, A
LDY
ABS
LDA
ABS
LDX
ABS
SEB
5, ZP
1011
B
BCS
LDA
JMP
IND, Y ZP, IND
BBC
5, A
LDY
ZP, X
LDA
ZP, X
LDX
ZP, Y
BBC
5, ZP
CLV
LDA
ABS, Y
TSX
CLB
5, A
1100
C
CPY
IMM
SLW
CMP
(Note)
IND, X
WIT
BBS
6, A
CPY
ZP
CMP
ZP
DEC
ZP
BBS
6, ZP
INY
CMP
IMM
DEX
SEB
6, A
CPY
ABS
1101
D
BNE
CMP
IND, Y
BBC
6, A
—
CMP
ZP, X
DEC
ZP, X
BBC
6, ZP
CLD
CMP
ABS, Y
—
CLB
6, A
—
1110
E
CPX
IMM
FST
SBC
(Note)
IND, X
DIV
BBS
7, A
CPX
ZP
SBC
ZP
INC
ZP
BBS
7, ZP
INX
SBC
IMM
NOP
SEB
7, A
CPX
ABS
1111
F
BEQ
SBC
IND, Y
BBC
7, A
—
SBC
ZP, X
INC
ZP, X
BBC
7, ZP
SED
SBC
ABS, Y
—
CLB
7, A
—
—
—
—
ORA
CLB
ASL
ABS, X ABS, X 0, ZP
AND
ABS
ROL
ABS
SEB
1, ZP
AND
CLB
ROL
ABS, X ABS, X 1, ZP
EOR
ABS
LSR
ABS
SEB
2, ZP
EOR
CLB
LSR
ABS, X ABS, X 2, ZP
ADC
ABS
ROR
ABS
SEB
3, ZP
ADC
CLB
ROR
ABS, X ABS, X 3, ZP
LDX
LDA
LDY
CLB
ABS, X ABS, X ABS, Y 5, ZP
CMP
ABS
DEC
ABS
SEB
6, ZP
DEC
CMP
CLB
ABS, X ABS, X 6, ZP
SBC
ABS
INC
ABS
SEB
7, ZP
INC
SBC
CLB
ABS, X ABS, X 7, ZP
3-byte instruction
2-byte instruction
1-byte instruction
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-29
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
Symbol
Function
Details
IMP
OP n
ADC
(Note 1)
(Note 5)
When T = 0
A←A+M+C
When T = 1
M(X) ← M(X) + M + C
AND
(Note 1)
When TV= 0
A←A M
When T = 1 V
M(X) ← M(X) M
ASL
C←
7
0
←0
IMM
# OP n
A
# OP n
BIT, A
# OP n
ZP
# OP n
BIT, ZP
# OP n
Adds the carry, accumulator and memory contents. The results are entered into the
accumulator.
Adds the contents of the memory in the address indicated by index register X, the
contents of the memory specified by the addressing mode and the carry. The results are
entered into the memory at the address indicated by index register X.
69 2
2
65 3
2
“AND’s” the accumulator and memory contents.
The results are entered into the accumulator.
“AND’s” the contents of the memory of the address indicated by index register X and the
contents of the memory specified by the addressing mode. The results are entered into
the memory at the address indicated by index
register X.
29 2
2
25 3
2
06 5
2
0A 2
Shifts the contents of accumulator or contents
of memory one bit to the left. The low order bit
of the accumulator or memory is cleared and
the high order bit is shifted into the carry flag.
1
#
BBC
(Note 4)
Ab or Mb = 0?
Branches when the contents of the bit specified in the accumulator or memory is “0”.
13 4
+
2i
2
17 5
+
2i
3
BBS
(Note 4)
Ab or Mb = 1?
Branches when the contents of the bit specified in the accumulator or memory is “1”.
03 4
+
2i
2
07 5
+
2i
3
BCC
(Note 4)
C = 0?
Branches when the contents of carry flag is
“0”.
BCS
(Note 4)
C = 1?
Branches when the contents of carry flag is
“1”.
BEQ
(Note 4)
Z = 1?
Branches when the contents of zero flag is “1”.
BIT
A
BMI
(Note 4)
N = 1?
Branches when the contents of negative flag is
“1”.
BNE
(Note 4)
Z = 0?
Branches when the contents of zero flag is “0”.
BPL
(Note 4)
N = 0?
Branches when the contents of negative flag is
“0”.
BRA
PC ← PC ± offset
Jumps to address specified by adding offset to
the program counter.
BRK
B←1
M(S) ← PCH
S←S–1
M(S) ← PCL
S←S–1
M(S) ← PS
S←S–1
PCL ← ADL
PCH ← ADH
Executes a software interrupt.
3-30
V
M
24 3
“AND’s” the contents of accumulator and
memory. The results are not entered anywhere.
00 7
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1
2
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
ZP, X
ZP, Y
OP n
# OP n
75 4
ABS
ABS, X
ABS, Y
IND
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
2
6D 4
3 7D 5
3 79 5
35 4
2
2D 4
3 3D 5
3 39 5
16 6
2
0E 6
3 1E 7
3
2C 4
Processor status register
ZP, IND
# OP n
IND, X
IND, Y
REL
SP
# OP n
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
N
V
T
B
D
I
Z
C
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
3
61 6
2 71 6
2
N
V
•
•
•
•
Z
C
3
21 6
2 31 6
2
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
90 2
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
B0 2
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
F0 2
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
M7 M6 •
•
•
•
Z
•
3
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
#
7
30 2
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
D0 2
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10 2
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
80 4
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
•
1
•
•
3-31
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
Symbol
Function
Details
IMP
OP n
IMM
# OP n
BVC
(Note 4)
V = 0?
Branches when the contents of overflow flag is
“0”.
BVS
(Note 4)
V = 1?
Branches when the contents of overflow flag is
“1”.
CLB
Ab or Mb ← 0
Clears the contents of the bit specified in the
accumulator or memory to “0”.
CLC
C←0
Clears the contents of the carry flag to “0”.
18 2
1
CLD
D←0
Clears the contents of decimal mode flag to
“0”.
D8 2
1
CLI
I←0
Clears the contents of interrupt disable flag to
“0”.
58 2
1
CLT
T←0
Clears the contents of index X mode flag to
“0”.
12 2
1
CLV
V←0
Clears the contents of overflow flag to “0”.
B8 2
1
CMP
(Note 3)
When T = 0
A–M
When T = 1
M(X) – M
Compares the contents of accumulator and
memory.
Compares the contents of the memory specified by the addressing mode with the contents
of the address indicated by index register X.
COM
M←M
Forms a one’s complement of the contents of
memory, and stores it into memory.
CPX
X–M
Compares the contents of index register X and
memory.
E0 2
CPY
Y–M
Compares the contents of index register Y and
memory.
C0 2
DEC
A ← A – 1 or
M←M–1
Decrements the contents of the accumulator
or memory by 1.
DEX
X←X–1
Decrements the contents of index register X CA 2
by 1.
1
DEY
Y←Y–1
Decrements the contents of index register Y
by 1.
1
DIV
A ← (M(zz + X + 1),
M(zz + X)) / A
M(S) ← 1’s complememt
of Remainder
S←S–1
Divides the 16-bit data that is the contents of
M (zz + x + 1) for high byte and the contents of
M (zz + x) for low byte by the accumulator.
Stores the quotient in the accumulator and the
1’s complement of the remainder on the stack.
EOR
(Note 1)
When T = 0
–M
A←AV
“Exclusive-ORs” the contents of accumulator
and memory. The results are stored in the accumulator.
“Exclusive-ORs” the contents of the memory
specified by the addressing mode and the
contents of the memory at the address indicated by index register X. The results are
stored into the memory at the address indicated by index register X.
When T = 1
–M
M(X) ← M(X) V
Connects oscillator output to the XOUT pin.
FST
INC
A ← A + 1 or
M←M+1
Increments the contents of accumulator or
memory by 1.
INX
X←X+1
Increments the contents of index register X by
1.
INY
Y←Y+1
Increments the contents of index register Y by
1.
3-32
A
# OP n
BIT, A
# OP n
1B 2
+
2i
C9 2
2
49 2
E2 2
# OP n
#
1F 5
+
2i
2
1
2
44 5
2
2
E4 3
2
2
C4 3
2
C6 5
2
45 3
2
E6 5
2
1
2
1
3A 2
E8 2
1
C8 2
1
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
# OP n
BIT, ZP
C5 3
1A 2
88 2
ZP
1
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
ZP, X
OP n
D5 4
D6 6
ZP, Y
# OP n
2
2
ABS
# OP n
CD 4
ABS, X
# OP n
3 DD 5
ABS, Y
# OP n
3 D9 5
IND
# OP n
3
Processor status register
ZP, IND
# OP n
IND, X
# OP n
C1 6
IND, Y
# OP n
2 D1 6
# OP n
2
F6 6
2
2
SP
# OP n
#
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
N
V
T
B
D
I
Z
C
50 2
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
70 2
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
•
•
•
•
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
•
•
•
•
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
C
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
EC 4
3
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
C
CC 4
3
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
C
CE 6
3 DE 7
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
3
E2 16 2
55 4
REL
4D 4
EE 6
3 5D 5
3 FE 7
3 59 5
3
41 6
2 51 6
3
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2
3-33
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
Symbol
Function
Details
IMP
OP n
IMM
# OP n
JMP
If addressing mode is ABS
PCL ← ADL
PCH ← ADH
If addressing mode is IND
PCL ← M (ADH, ADL)
PCH ← M (ADH, ADL + 1)
If addressing mode is ZP, IND
PCL ← M(00, ADL)
PCH ← M(00, ADL + 1)
Jumps to the specified address.
JSR
M(S) ← PCH
S←S–1
M(S) ← PCL
S←S–1
After executing the above,
if addressing mode is ABS,
PCL ← ADL
PCH ← ADH
if addressing mode is SP,
PCL ← ADL
PCH ← FF
If addressing mode is ZP, IND,
PCL ← M(00, ADL)
PCH ← M(00, ADL + 1)
After storing contents of program counter in
stack, and jumps to the specified address.
LDA
(Note 2)
When T = 0
A←M
When T = 1
M(X) ← M
Load accumulator with contents of memory.
LDM
M ← nn
Load memory with immediate value.
LDX
X←M
Load index register X with contents of
memory.
A2 2
LDY
Y←M
Load index register Y with contents of
memory.
A0 2
LSR
7
0→
MUL
(Note 5)
M(S) · A ← A ✕ M(zz + X)
S←S–1
Multiplies the accumulator with the contents of
memory specified by the zero page X addressing mode and stores the high byte of the result
on the stack and the low byte in the accumulator.
NOP
PC ← PC + 1
No operation.
ORA
(Note 1)
When T = 0
A←AVM
“Logical OR’s” the contents of memory and accumulator. The result is stored in the
accumulator.
“Logical OR’s” the contents of memory indicated by index register X and contents of
memory specified by the addressing mode.
The result is stored in the memory specified by
index register X.
0
→C
When T = 1
M(X) ← M(X) V M
3-34
A9 2
A
# OP n
BIT, A
# OP n
ZP
# OP n
BIT, ZP
# OP n
A5 3
2
3C 4
3
2
A6 3
2
2
A4 3
2
46 5
2
05 3
2
2
Load memory indicated by index register X
with contents of memory specified by the addressing mode.
Shift the contents of accumulator or memory
to the right by one bit.
The low order bit of accumulator or memory is
stored in carry, 7th bit is cleared.
4A 2
EA 2
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1
1
09 2
2
#
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
ZP, X
OP n
B5 4
ZP, Y
# OP n
2
B6 4
ABS
# OP n
ABS, X
# OP n
4C 3
3
20 6
3
AD 4
3 BD 5
2 AE 4
ABS, Y
# OP n
3 B9 5
3
BE 5
IND
Processor status register
ZP, IND
IND, X
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
6C 5
3 B2 4
2
02 7
2
3
IND, Y
# OP n
REL
# OP n
SP
# OP n
22 5
A1 6
2 B1 6
2
3
#
2
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
N
V
T
B
D
I
Z
C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
B4 4
2
AC 4
3 BC 5
3
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
56 6
2
4E 6
3 5E 7
3
0
•
•
•
•
•
Z
C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
62 15 2
15 4
2
0D 4
3 1D 5
3 19 5
3
01 6
2 11 6
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2
3-35
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
Symbol
Function
Details
IMP
IMM
OP n
# OP n
A
# OP n
BIT, A
# OP n
ZP
# OP n
BIT, ZP
# OP n
PHA
M(S) ← A
S←S–1
Saves the contents of the accumulator in
memory at the address indicated by the stack
pointer and decrements the contents of stack
pointer by 1.
48 3
1
PHP
M(S) ← PS
S←S–1
Saves the contents of the processor status
register in memory at the address indicated by
the stack pointer and decrements the contents
of the stack pointer by 1.
08 3
1
PLA
S←S+1
A ← M(S)
Increments the contents of the stack pointer
by 1 and restores the accumulator from the
memory at the address indicated by the stack
pointer.
68 4
1
PLP
S←S+1
PS ← M(S)
Increments the contents of stack pointer by 1
and restores the processor status register
from the memory at the address indicated by
the stack pointer.
28 4
1
ROL
7
←
Shifts the contents of the memory or accumulator to the left by one bit. The high order bit is
shifted into the carry flag and the carry flag is
shifted into the low order bit.
2A 2
1
26 5
2
Shifts the contents of the memory or accumulator to the right by one bit. The low order bit is
shifted into the carry flag and the carry flag is
shifted into the high order bit.
6A 2
1
66 5
2
82 8
2
E5 3
2
0
←C ←
ROR
7
C→
RRF
7
→
0
→
0
→
Rotates the contents of memory to the right by
4 bits.
RTI
S←S+1
PS ← M(S)
S←S+1
PCL ← M(S)
S←S+1
PCH ← M(S)
Returns from an interrupt routine to the main
routine.
40 6
1
RTS
S←S+1
PCL ← M(S)
S←S+1
PCH ← M(S)
Returns from a subroutine to the main routine.
60 6
1
SBC
(Note 1)
(Note 5)
When T = 0
A←A–M–C
Subtracts the contents of memory and
complement of carry flag from the contents of
accumulator. The results are stored into the
accumulator.
Subtracts contents of complement of carry flag
and contents of the memory indicated by the
addressing mode from the memory at the address indicated by index register X. The
results are stored into the memory of the address indicated by index register X.
When T = 1
M(X) ← M(X) – M – C
E9 2
SEB
Ab or Mb ← 1
Sets the specified bit in the accumulator or
memory to “1”.
SEC
C←1
Sets the contents of the carry flag to “1”.
38 2
1
SED
D←1
Sets the contents of the decimal mode flag to
“1”.
F8 2
1
SEI
I←1
Sets the contents of the interrupt disable flag
to “1”.
78 2
1
SET
T←1
Sets the contents of the index X mode flag to
“1”.
32 2
1
Disconnects the oscillator output from the
XOUT pin.
C2 2
1
SLW
3-36
2
0B 2
+
2i
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
1
0F 5
+
2i
#
2
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
ZP, X
OP n
ZP, Y
# OP n
ABS
# OP n
ABS, X
# OP n
ABS, Y
# OP n
IND
# OP n
Processor status register
ZP, IND
# OP n
IND, X
# OP n
IND, Y
# OP n
REL
# OP n
SP
# OP n
#
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
N
V
T
B
D
I
Z
C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
(Value saved in stack)
36 6
2
2E 6
3 3E 7
3
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
C
76 6
2
6E 6
3 7E 7
3
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(Value saved in stack)
F5 4
2
ED 4
3 FD 5
3 F9 5
3
E1 6
2 F1 6
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
2
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
V
•
•
•
•
Z
C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
•
•
•
•
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
•
•
•
•
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
3-37
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
Symbol
Function
Details
IMP
OP n
STA
M←A
# OP n
Stores the contents of accumulator in memory.
Stops the oscillator.
STP
IMM
42 2
A
# OP n
BIT, A
# OP n
ZP
# OP n
BIT, ZP
# OP n
85 4
2
1
STX
M←X
Stores the contents of index register X in
memory.
86 4
2
STY
M←Y
Stores the contents of index register Y in
memory.
84 4
2
TAX
X←A
Transfers the contents of the accumulator to AA 2
index register X.
1
TAY
Y←A
Transfers the contents of the accumulator to
index register Y.
1
TST
M = 0?
Tests whether the contents of memory are “0”
or not.
64 3
2
TSX
X←S
Transfers the contents of the stack pointer to BA 2
index register X.
1
TXA
A←X
Transfers the contents of index register X to
the accumulator.
8A 2
1
TXS
S←X
Transfers the contents of index register X to
the stack pointer.
9A 2
1
TYA
A←Y
Transfers the contents of index register Y to
the accumulator.
98 2
1
Stops the internal clock.
C2 2
1
WIT
Notes 1
2
3
4
5
3-38
A8 2
: The number of cycles “n” is increased by 3 when T is 1.
: The number of cycles “n” is increased by 2 when T is 1.
: The number of cycles “n” is increased by 1 when T is 1.
: The number of cycles “n” is increased by 2 when branching has occurred.
: N, V, and Z flags are invalid in decimal operation mode.
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
#
APPENDIX
3.5 Machine instructions
Addressing mode
ZP, X
ZP, Y
OP n
# OP n
95 5
2
96 5
94 5
2
Symbol
ABS
ABS, X
ABS, Y
ZP, IND
IND
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
8D 5
3 9D 6
3 99 6
3
Processor status register
# OP n
IND, X
IND, Y
REL
# OP n
# OP n
# OP n
81 7
2 91 7
2
SP
# OP n
#
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
N
V
T
B
D
I
Z
C
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2 8E 5
3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8C 5
3
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
N
•
•
•
•
•
Z
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Contents
Symbol
IMP
IMM
A
Implied addressing mode
Immediate addressing mode
Accumulator or Accumulator addressing mode
BIT, A
Accumulator bit relative addressing mode
ZP
BIT, ZP
Zero page addressing mode
Zero page bit relative addressing mode
ZP, X
ZP, Y
ABS
ABS, X
ABS, Y
IND
Zero page X addressing mode
Zero page Y addressing mode
Absolute addressing mode
Absolute X addressing mode
Absolute Y addressing mode
Indirect absolute addressing mode
ZP, IND
Zero page indirect absolute addressing mode
IND, X
IND, Y
REL
SP
C
Z
I
D
B
T
V
N
Indirect X addressing mode
Indirect Y addressing mode
Relative addressing mode
Special page addressing mode
Carry flag
Zero flag
Interrupt disable flag
Decimal mode flag
Break flag
X-modified arithmetic mode flag
Overflow flag
Negative flag
+
–
V
V
–
V
–
←
X
Y
S
PC
PS
PCH
PCL
ADH
ADL
FF
nn
M
M(X)
M(S)
M(ADH, ADL)
M(00, ADL)
Ab
Mb
OP
n
#
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
Contents
Addition
Subtraction
Logical OR
Logical AND
Logical exclusive OR
Negation
Shows direction of data flow
Index register X
Index register Y
Stack pointer
Program counter
Processor status register
8 high-order bits of program counter
8 low-order bits of program counter
8 high-order bits of address
8 low-order bits of address
FF in Hexadecimal notation
Immediate value
Memory specified by address designation of any addressing mode
Memory of address indicated by contents of index
register X
Memory of address indicated by contents of stack
pointer
Contents of memory at address indicated by ADH and
ADL, in ADH is 8 high-order bits and ADL is 8 low-order bits.
Contents of address indicated by zero page ADL
1 bit of accumulator
1 bit of memory
Opcode
Number of cycles
Number of bytes
3-39
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-14B<25B0>
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4-XXXFP/GP/HP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Receipt
Mask ROM number
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
Date:
)
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M38203M4-XXXFP
Microcomputer name :
M38203M4-XXXGP
M38203M4-XXXHP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
407F16
408016
7FFD16
7FFE16
7FFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38203M4–’
data
ROM 16254 bytes
27512
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM
area is from address C08016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is
stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
C07F16
C08016
FFFD16
FFFE16
FFFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38203M4–’
data
ROM 16254 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M38203M4–”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16.
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
(1/2)
3-40
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 3316
‘8’ = 3816
‘2’ = 3216
‘0’ = 3016
‘3’ = 3316
‘M’ = 4D16
‘4’ = 3416
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-14B<25B0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4-XXXFP/GP/HP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier
assembler source program.
EPROM type
27256
27512
The pseudo-command
*= $8000
.BYTE
‘M38203M4–’
*= $0000
.BYTE
‘M38203M4–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will
not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (80P6N for M38203M4-XXXFP,80P6S for M38203M4-XXXGP,80P6D for M38203M4-XXXHP) and
attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form.
❈ 3. Usage conditions
Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection :
(1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator?
Ceramic resonator
Quartz crystal
External clock input
Other (
At what frequency?
)
MHz
f(XIN) =
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT?
Ports P71 and P70 function
XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
❈ 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-41
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH07-60B<36A0>
Mask ROM number
Receipt
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4DXXXFP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
Date:
)
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
407F16
408016
7FFD16
7FFE16
7FFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38203M4D’
data
ROM 16254 bytes
27512
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM
area is from address C08016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is
stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
C07F16
C08016
FFFD16
FFFE16
FFFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38203M4D’
data
ROM 16254 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M38203M4D”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16.
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
(1/2)
3-42
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 3316
‘8’ = 3816
‘2’ = 3216
‘0’ = 3016
‘3’ = 3316
‘M’ = 4D16
‘4’ = 3416
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘D’ = 4416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH07-60B<36A0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4DXXXFP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier
assembler source program.
EPROM type
27256
27512
The pseudo-command
*= $8000
.BYTE
‘M38203M4D’
*= $0000
.BYTE
‘M38203M4D’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will
not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (80P6N for M38203M4DXXXFP) and attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form.
❈ 3. Usage conditions
Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection :
(1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator?
Ceramic resonator
Quartz crystal
External clock input
Other (
At what frequency?
)
MHz
f(XIN) =
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT?
Ports P71 and P70 function
XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
❈ 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-43
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-58B<2XB0>
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38207M8-XXXFP/GP/HP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Receipt
Mask ROM number
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
Date:
)
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M38207M8-XXXFP
Microcomputer name :
M38207M8-XXXGP
M38207M8-XXXHP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27512
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM
area is from address 808016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is
stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
807F16
808016
FFFD16
FFFE16
FFFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38207M8–’
data
ROM 32638 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M38207M8–”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16.
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
(1/2)
3-44
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 3316
‘8’ = 3816
‘2’ = 3216
‘0’ = 3016
‘7’ = 3716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘8’ = 3816
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ – ’ = 2D16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH06-58B<2XB0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38207M8-XXXFP/GP/HP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier
assembler source program.
EPROM type
27512
The pseudo-command
*= $0000
.BYTE
‘M38207M8–’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will
not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (80P6N for M38207M8-XXXFP,80P6S for M38207M8-XXXGP,80P6D for M38207M8-XXXHP) and
attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form.
❈ 3. Usage conditions
Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection :
(1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator?
Ceramic resonator
Quartz crystal
External clock input
Other (
At what frequency?
)
MHz
f(XIN) =
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT?
Ports P71 and P70 function
XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
❈ 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-45
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-64B<45A0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Receipt
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38207M8DXXXFP/GP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
)
Date:
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M38207M8DXXXFP
Microcomputer name :
M38207M8DXXXGP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27512
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM
area is from address 808016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is
stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
807F16
808016
FFFD16
FFFE16
FFFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38207M8D’
data
ROM 32638 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M38207M8D”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16.
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
(1/2)
3-46
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 3316
‘8’ = 3816
‘2’ = 3216
‘0’ = 3016
‘7’ = 3716
‘M’ = 4D16
‘8’ = 3816
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘D’ = 4416
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-64B<45A0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38207M8DXXXFP/GP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier
assembler source program.
EPROM type
27512
The pseudo-command
*= $0000
.BYTE
‘M38207M8D’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will
not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (80P6N for M38207M8DXXXFP,80P6S for M38207M8DXXXGP) and attach it to the mask ROM
confirmation form.
❈ 3. Usage conditions
Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection :
(1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator?
Ceramic resonator
Quartz crystal
External clock input
Other (
At what frequency?
)
MHz
f(XIN) =
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT?
Ports P71 and P70 function
XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
❈ 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-47
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-63B<45B0>
Mask ROM number
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4LXXXFP/GP/HP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Receipt
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
Date:
)
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M38203M4LXXXFP
Microcomputer name :
M38203M4LXXXGP
M38203M4LXXXHP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
407F16
408016
7FFD16
7FFE16
7FFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38203M4L’
data
ROM 16254 bytes
27512
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM
area is from address C08016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is
stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
C07F16
C08016
FFFD16
FFFE16
FFFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38203M4L’
data
ROM 16254 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M38203M4L”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16.
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
(1/2)
3-48
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 3316
‘8’ = 3816
‘2’ = 3216
‘0’ = 3016
‘3’ = 3316
‘M’ = 4D16
‘4’ = 3416
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ L ’ = 4C16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-63B<45B0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M4LXXXFP/GP/HP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier
assembler source program.
EPROM type
27256
27512
The pseudo-command
*= $8000
.BYTE
‘M38203M4L’
*= $0000
.BYTE
‘M38203M4L’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will
not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (80P6N for M38203M4LXXXFP,80P6S for M38203M4LXXXGP,80P6D for M38203M4LXXXHP) and
attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form.
❈ 3. Usage conditions
Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection :
(1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator?
Ceramic resonator
Quartz crystal
External clock input
Other (
At what frequency?
)
MHz
f(XIN) =
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT?
Ports P71 and P70 function
XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
❈ 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-49
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-46B<43B0>
Mask ROM number
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M2LXXXFP/GP/HP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
Receipt
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
Date:
Section head Supervisor
signature
signature
❈ Customer
TEL
(
Company
name
Date
issued
Date:
)
Issuance
signature
Note : Please fill in all items marked ❈.
Submitted by
Supervisor
❈ 1. Confirmation
Specify the name of the product being ordered and the type of EPROMs submitted.
Three EPROMs are required for each pattern.
If at least two of the three sets of EPROMs submitted contain identical data, we will produce masks based on this data. We
shall assume the responsibility for errors only if the mask ROM data on the products we produce differs from this data.
Thus, extreme care must be taken to verify the data in the submitted EPROMs.
M38203M2LXXXFP
Microcomputer name :
M38203M2LXXXGP
M38203M2LXXXHP
(hexadecimal notation)
Checksum code for entire EPROM
EPROM type (indicate the type used)
27256
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
607F16
608016
7FFD16
7FFE16
7FFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38203M2L’
data
ROM 8062 bytes
27512
In the address space of the microcomputer, the internal ROM
area is from address E08016 to FFFD16. The reset vector is
stored in addresses FFFC16 and FFFD16.
EPROM address
000016
Product name
000F16
001016
E07F16
E08016
FFFD16
FFFE16
FFFF16
ASCII code :
‘M38203M2L’
data
ROM 8062 bytes
(1) Set the data in the unused area (the shaded area of
the diagram) to “FF16”.
(2) The ASCII codes of the product name “M38203M2L”
must be entered in addresses 000016 to 000816. And
set the data “FF16” in addresses 000916 to 000F16.
The ASCII codes and addresses are listed to the right
in hexadecimal notation.
Address
000016
000116
000216
000316
000416
000516
000616
000716
(1/2)
3-50
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
‘M’ = 4D16
‘3’ = 3316
‘8’ = 3816
‘2’ = 3216
‘0’ = 3016
‘3’ = 3316
‘M’ = 4D16
‘2’ = 3216
Address
000816
000916
000A16
000B16
000C16
000D16
000E16
000F16
‘ L ’ = 4C16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
FF16
APPENDIX
3.6 Mask ROM ordering method
GZZ-SH08-46B<43B0>
Mask ROM number
740 FAMILY MASK ROM CONFIRMATION FORM
SINGLE-CHIP MICROCOMPUTER M38203M2LXXXFP/GP/HP
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
We recommend the use of the following pseudo-command to set the start address of the assembier
assembler source program.
EPROM type
27256
27512
The pseudo-command
*= $8000
.BYTE
‘M38203M2L’
*= $0000
.BYTE
‘M38203M2L’
Note : If the name of the product written to the EPROMs does not match the name of the mask confirmation form, the ROM will
not be processed.
❈ 2. Mark specification
Mark specification must be submitted using the correct form for the package being ordered. Fill out the appropriate mark
specification form (80P6N for M38203M2LXXXFP,80P6S for M38203M2LXXXGP,80P6D for M38203M2LXXXHP) and
attach it to the mask ROM confirmation form.
❈ 3. Usage conditions
Please answer the following questions about usage for use in our product inspection :
(1) How will you use the XIN-XOUT oscillator?
Ceramic resonator
Quartz crystal
External clock input
Other (
At what frequency?
)
MHz
f(XIN) =
(2) Which function will you use the pins P71/XCIN and P70/XCOUT as P71 and P70, or XCIN and XCOUT?
Ports P71 and P70 function
XCIN and XCOUT function (external resonator)
❈ 4. Comments
(2/2)
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-51
APPENDIX
3.7 Mark specification from
3.7 Mark specification from
3-52
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.7 Mark specification from
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-53
APPENDIX
3.8 Package outlines
3.8 Package outlines
3-54
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.8 Package outlines
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-55
APPENDIX
3.9 SFR Allocation
3.9 SFR Allocation
000016
Port P0 (P0)
002016
Timer X (low-order) (TXL)
000116
Port P0 direction register (P0D)
002116
Timer X (high-order) (TXH)
000216
Port P1 (P1)
002216
Timer Y (low-order) (TYL)
000316
Port P1 direction register (P1D)
002316
Timer Y (high-order) (TYH)
000416
Port P2 (P2)
002416
Timer 1 (T1)
000516
Port P2 direction register (P2D)
002516
Timer 2 (T2)
000616
Port P3 (P3)
002616
Timer 3 (T3)
002716
Timer X mode register (TXM)
000716
000816
Port P4 (P4)
002816
Timer Y mode register (TYM)
000916
Port P4 direction register (P4D)
002916
Timer 123 mode register (T123M)
000A16
Port P5 (P5)
002A16
φ output control register (CKOUT)
000B16
Port P5 direction register (P5D)
002B16
000C16
Port P6 (P6)
002C16
000D16
Port P6 direction register (P6D)
002D16
000E16
Port P7 (P7)
002E16
000F16
Port P7 direction register (P7D)
002F16
001016
003016
001116
003116
001216
003216
001316
003316
001416
003416
001516
003516
001616
PULL register A (PULL A)
003616
001716
PULL register B (PULL B)
003716
Watchdog timer control register (WDTCON)
001816
Transmit/Receive buffer register (TB/RB)
003816
Segment output enable register (SEG)
001916
Serial I/O1 status register (SIO1STS)
003916
LCD mode register (LM)
001A16
Serial I/O1 control register (SIO1CON)
003A16
Interrupt edge selection register (INTEDGE)
001B16
UART control register (UARTCON)
003B16
CPU mode register (CPUM)
001C16
Baud rate generator (BRG)
003C16
Interrupt request register 1(IREQ1)
001D16
Serial I/O2 control register (SIO2CON)
003D16
Interrupt request register 2(IREQ2)
001E16
001F16
Serial I/O2 register (SIO2)
003E16
Interrupt control register 1(ICON1)
003F16
Interrupt control register 2(ICON2)
Memory map of special function register (SFR)
3-56
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
APPENDIX
3.10 Pin configuration
3.10 Pin configuration
P30/SEG16
P31/SEG17
P32/SEG18
P33/SEG19
P34/SEG20
P35/SEG21
P36/SEG22
P37/SEG23
P00/SEG24
P01/SEG25
P02/SEG26
P03/SEG27
P04/SEG28
P05/SEG29
P06/SEG30
P07/SEG31
P10/SEG32
P11/SEG33
P12/SEG34
P13/SEG35
P14/SEG36
P15/SEG37
P16/SEG38
P17/SEG39
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
VCC
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
65
66
40
67
38
37
39
68
69
36
70
35
34
71
72
M38203M4-XXXFP
M38203M4-XXXFP
73
74
75
33
32
31
30
29
76
77
28
78
27
79
80
26
25
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SEG0
COM3
COM2
COM1
COM0
VL3
VL2
VL1
P61/RTP1
P60/INT3/RTP0
P57/INT2
P56/TOUT
P55/CNTR1
P54/CNTR0
P53/SRDY2
P52/SCLK2
P51/SOUT2
P50/SIN2
P47/SRDY1
P46/SCLK1
P45/TXD
P44/RXD
P43/INT1
P42/INT0
1 2 3 4
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
VSS
XOUT
XIN
P70/XCOUT
P71/XCIN
RESET
P40
P41/
Package type : 80P6N-A
80-pin plastic-molded QFP
Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXFP
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
3-57
APPENDIX
3.10 Pin configuration
P32/SEG18
P33/SEG19
P34/SEG20
P35/SEG21
P36/SEG22
P37/SEG23
P00/SEG24
P01/SEG25
P02/SEG26
P03/SEG27
P04/SEG28
P05/SEG29
P06/SEG30
P07/SEG31
P10/SEG32
P11/SEG33
P12/SEG34
P13/SEG35
P14/SEG36
P15/SEG37
PIN CONFIGURATION (TOP VIEW)
60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41
P31/SEG17
P30/SEG16
SEG15
SEG14
SEG13
SEG12
SEG11
SEG10
SEG9
SEG8
VCC
SEG7
SEG6
SEG5
SEG4
SEG3
SEG2
SEG1
SEG0
COM3
61
40
62
39
63
38
64
37
65
36
66
35
67
34
68
69
70
71
72
33
M38203M4-XXXGP
M38203M4-XXXHP
32
31
30
29
73
28
74
27
75
26
76
25
77
24
78
23
79
22
21
80
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
COM2
COM1
COM0
VL3
VL2
VL1
P61/RTP1
P60/INT3/RTP0
P57/INT2
P56/TOUT
P55/CNTR1
P54/CNTR0
P53/SRDY2
P52/SCLK2
P51/SOUT2
P50/SIN2
P47/SRDY1
P46/SCLK1
P45/TXD
P44/RXD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Package type : 80P6S-A/80P6D-A
80-pin plastic-molded QFP
Pin configuration of M38203M4-XXXGP/ HP
3-58
3820 GROUP USER’S MANUAL
P16/SEG38
P17/SEG39
P20
P21
P22
P23
P24
P25
P26
P27
VSS
XOUT
XIN
P70/XCOUT
P71/XCIN
RESET
P40
P41/
P42/INT0
P43/INT1
MITSUBISHI SEMICONDUCTORS
USER’S MANUAL
3820Group
Jul. First Edition 1995
Editioned by
Committee of editing of Mitsubishi Semiconductor USER’S MANUAL
Published by
Mitsubishi Electric Corp., Semiconductor Marketing Division
This book, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form without permission
of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
©1995 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
User’s Manual
3820 Group
H-EE367-A KI-9507 Printed in Japan (ROD)
© 1995 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
New publication, effective Jul. 1995.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
GRADE
MESC TECHNICAL NEWS
A
No. M380-14-9907
Corrections and Supplementary Explanation for
“3820/3822/3825 Group User’s Manuals”
This news includes a few corrections and supplementary explanation for the following
documents.
Please refer to the corrected information as shown below.
● User’s Manual attaching this news
• 3820 Group
(Printed & PDF documents, 1995.7 issued, document number: H-EE367-A)
• 3822 Group
(Printed & PDF documents, 1995.3 issued, document number: H-ED347-A)
• 3825 Group
(Printed & PDF documents, 1995.7 issued, document number: H-EE379-A)
(1/ 4)
M380-14-9907
Corrections and Supplementary Explanation for “3820/3822/3825 Group User’s Manuals” No.1
Page
3820 Group
3822 Group
3825 Group
(1) Timer X
■ Timer
Previous change
User’s Manual P2-66 [Notes on use]
User’s Manual P2-65 Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the timer X interrupt enable bit and
User’s Manual P2-65
the timer X interrupt request bit to “0”.
•After setting ➃ below, set the timer X interrupt enable bit to “1”
mode
(interrupts enabled).
After change
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before timer X stops counting (before setting ➀ below), clear the
timer X interrupt enable bit to “0”.
•After setting ➂ below, clear the timer X interrupt request bit to “0”
and next set the timer X interrupt enable bit to “1” (interrupt enabled).
•Set ➃ last.
3820 Group
3822 Group
3825 Group
(1) Timer X
■ Pulse
User’s Manual P2-67
Previous change
User’s Manual P2-66
User’s Manual P2-66 [Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer X or
output mode
CNTR0) and the interrupt request bits (timer X or CNTR0) to “0”.
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer X or
CNTR0) to “1” (interrupts enabled).
After change
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before timer X stops counting (before setting ➁ below), clear the
interrupt enable bit (timer X or CNTR0) to “0”.
•After setting ➃ below, clear the interrupt request bit (timer X or
CNTR0) to “0” and next set the interrupt enable bit (timer X or
CNTR0) to “1” (interrupt enabled).
•Set ➄ last.
3820 Group
3822 Group
3825 Group
(1) Timer X
■ Event
User’s Manual P2-68
Previous change
User’s Manual P2-67
User’s Manual P2-67 [Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer X or
counter mode
CNTR0) and the interrupt request bits (timer X or CNTR0) to “0”.
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer X or
CNTR0) to “1” (interrupts enabled).
After change
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before timer X stops counting (before setting ➁ below), clear the
interrupt enable bit (timer X or CNTR0) to “0”.
•After setting ➃ below, clear the interrupt request bit (timer X or
CNTR0) to “0” and next set the interrupt enable bit (timer X or
CNTR0) to “1” (interrupt enabled).
•Set ➄ last.
(2 / 4)
M380-14-9907
Corrections and Supplementary Explanation for “3820/3822/3825 Group User’s Manuals” No.2
Page
3820 Group
3822 Group
3825 Group
(1) Timer X
■ Pulse
mode
Previous change
User’s Manual P2-69 [Notes on use]
User’s Manual P2-68 Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer X or
User’s Manual P2-68
CNTR0) and the interrupt request bits (timer X or CNTR0) to “0”.
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer X or
width measurement
CNTR0) to “1” (interrupts enabled).
After change
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before timer X stops counting (before setting ➁ below), clear the
interrupt enable bit (timer X or CNTR0) to “0”.
•After setting ➃ below, clear the interrupt request bit (timer X or
CNTR0) to “0” and next set the interrupt enable bit (timer X or
CNTR0) to “1” (interrupt enabled).
•Set ➄ last.
3820 Group
3822 Group
3825 Group
(2) Timer Y
■ Timer
User’s Manual P2-71 [Notes on use]
User’s Manual P2-70 Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
User’s Manual P2-70
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the timer Y interrupt enable bit and
the timer Y interrupt request bit to “0”.
mode
•After setting ➃ below, set the timer Y interrupt enable bit to “1”
(interrupts enabled).
After change
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before timer Y stops counting (before setting ➀ below), clear the
timer Y interrupt enable bit to “0”.
•After setting ➂ below, clear the timer Y interrupt request bit to “0”
and next set the timer Y interrupt enable bit to “1” (interrupt enabled).
•Set ➃ last.
3820 Group User’s Manual
3822 Group User’s Manual
3825 Group User’s Manual
(2) Timer Y
■ Period measurement
P2-72
Previous change
P2-71
[Notes
on
use]
P2-71
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or
mode
CNTR1) and the interrupt request bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to “0”.
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or
CNTR1) to “1” (interrupts enabled).
After change
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before timer Y stops counting (before setting ➁ below), clear the
interrupt enable bit (timer Y or CNTR1) to “0”.
•After setting ➃ below, clear the interrupt request bit (timer Y or
CNTR1) to “0” and next set the interrupt enable bit (timer Y or
CNTR1) to “1” (interrupt enabled).
•Set ➄ last.
3820 Group
3822 Group
3825 Group
(2) Timer Y
■ Event
User’s Manual P2-73
Previous change
User’s Manual P2-72
[Notes
on
use]
User’s Manual P2-72
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or
counter mode
CNTR1) and the interrupt request bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to “0”.
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or
CNTR1) to “1” (interrupts enabled).
After change
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before timer Y stops counting (before setting ➁ below), clear the
interrupt enable bit (timer Y or CNTR1) to “0”.
•After setting ➃ below, clear the interrupt request bit (timer Y or
CNTR1) to “0” and next set the interrupt enable bit (timer Y or
CNTR1) to “1” (interrupt enabled).
•Set ➄ last.
(3 /4)
M380-14-9907
Corrections and Supplementary Explanation for “3820/3822/3825 Group User’s Manuals” No.3
Page
Previous change
3820 Group User’s Manual P2-74 [Notes on use]
3822 Group User’s Manual P2-73 Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before setting ➀ below, clear the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or
3825 Group User’s Manual P2-73
CNTR1) and the interrupt request bits (timer Y or CNTR1) to “0”.
(2) Timer Y
•After setting ➄ below, set the interrupt enable bits (timer Y or
■ Pulse width HL continuCNTR1) to “1” (interrupts enabled).
ously measurement mode
After change
[Notes on use]
Notes 1: For using interrupt processing, set the following:
•Before timer Y stops counting (before setting ➁ below), clear the
interrupt enable bit (timer Y or CNTR1) to “0”.
•After setting ➃ below, clear the interrupt request bit (timer Y or
CNTR1) to “0” and next set the interrupt enable bit (timer Y or
CNTR1) to “1” (interrupt enabled).
•Set ➄ last.
(4 /4)